TRANSCO Water Standard Design Guidelines

N-14054 Consultancy Services for the Development of
Water Standard Design Guideline

May 2018
Design Guidelines
Prepared For
Document Control Sheet
TRANSCO WATER STANDARD DESIGN GUIDELINES
Project No. N14054
Final Report
Document No: MWH/ABU/D900167/R03
Issue Authorised
Date Description/Amendment Checked Reviewed
No for Issue
01 28/2/17 Draft Final Report PF TY BP, MH
02 13/7/17 Final Report SM PF BB, MH
03 18/4/2018 Final Report (amended) MY PF BB,MH
This report has been prepared solely for the benefit of Abu Dhabi Transmission and Despatch Company
(TRANSCO). No liability is accepted by this company or any employee or sub-Consultant of this company
with respect to its use by any other person.
This disclaimer shall apply notwithstanding that the report may be made available to other persons for
an application for permission or approval or to fulfil a legal requirement.

Abu Dhabi Transmission & Despatch Company (TRANSCO)
N-14054
Design Guidelines
Table of Contents
1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 5
2 Resource Documents ...................................................................................................................... 6
3 Studies ............................................................................................................................................. 7
3.1 Hydraulics ..................................................................................................................... 7
3.2 Geotechnical & Geophysical Studies ............................................................................ 23
3.3 Environmental Studies ................................................................................................ 69
3.4 Pipe Wall Thickness Determination.............................................................................. 71
3.5 Pipe Stress Analysis ..................................................................................................... 75
3.6 Power Supply .............................................................................................................. 81
4 General Design Requirements ...................................................................................................... 82
4.1 Design Life Cycle.......................................................................................................... 82
4.2 Demand Calculations ................................................................................................... 82
4.3 Material Selection ....................................................................................................... 82
4.4 Design Loads ............................................................................................................... 83
4.5 Drawing Requirements ................................................................................................ 83
4.6 Approvals ................................................................................................................... 89
4.7 Health Safety Environment & Quality (HSEQ) ............................................................... 89
4.8 HAZID / HAZOP ........................................................................................................... 91
4.9 Operation & Control Philosophy (OCP)......................................................................... 91
4.10 Value Engineering ....................................................................................................... 95
4.11 Risk Management ....................................................................................................... 95
5 Civil Works .................................................................................................................................... 96
5.1 Design Codes............................................................................................................... 96
5.2 Topographic Survey ..................................................................................................... 97
5.3 Geotechnical Investigations ......................................................................................... 97
5.4 General Civil / Structural Requirements – Pump Stations.............................................. 98
5.5 General Civil / Structural Requirements – Reservoirs .................................................. 111
5.6 Drawing Requirements .............................................................................................. 119
5.7 Design Data............................................................................................................... 120
6 Electrical Works .......................................................................................................................... 128
6.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 128
6.2 Design Philosophy ..................................................................................................... 129
6.3 Concept Design ......................................................................................................... 130
Page 2 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
6.4 Preliminary Design .................................................................................................... 131
6.5 Design Requirements ................................................................................................ 132
6.6 Studies ...................................................................................................................... 146
6.7 Small power and Lighting .......................................................................................... 153
7 Mechanical Works....................................................................................................................... 156
7.1 Design Codes............................................................................................................. 156
7.2 Water Transmission Pump ......................................................................................... 156
7.3 Pump Station Piping .................................................................................................. 159
7.4 Mechanical Work ...................................................................................................... 163
7.5 Storage Tank System ................................................................................................. 166
7.6 Electro Chlorination Systems ..................................................................................... 168
7.7 Surge Protection Systems .......................................................................................... 170
7.8 Motor Cooling System ............................................................................................... 172
7.9 Anti-Flooding System ................................................................................................ 173
7.10 Fire Fighting System .................................................................................................. 174
7.11 HVAC System ............................................................................................................ 176
7.12 Well System .............................................................................................................. 182
7.13 Tap-Off Station system .............................................................................................. 183
7.14 Diesel Fuel Storage and Transfer ................................................................................ 185
8 I&C Works ................................................................................................................................... 187
8.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 187
8.2 Preliminary design..................................................................................................... 189
8.3 Final design ............................................................................................................... 190
8.4 Design Criteria........................................................................................................... 191
8.5 Control System Architecture ...................................................................................... 193
8.6 Process Requirements and Field Devices .................................................................... 194
8.7 Major Automation Hardware and Software ............................................................... 200
8.8 Telecommunications Requirements ........................................................................... 207
8.9 Security..................................................................................................................... 209
9 Pipelines ...................................................................................................................................... 211
9.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 211
9.2 Design Codes............................................................................................................. 211
9.3 Input Data................................................................................................................. 212
9.4 Topographical Survey ................................................................................................ 213
9.5 Geotechnical Survey & Soil Tests ............................................................................... 213
9.6 Material Selection ..................................................................................................... 214
Page 3 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
9.7 Design of Ductile Iron Pipelines ................................................................................. 214
9.8 Design of Carbon Steel Pipelines ................................................................................ 217
9.9 Design of High Density Polyethylene Pipelines ........................................................... 218
9.10 Alignment Selection .................................................................................................. 220
9.11 Pipe Profile ............................................................................................................... 221
9.12 Valves ....................................................................................................................... 222
9.13 Fittings & Accessories ................................................................................................ 224
9.14 Pipe Installation ........................................................................................................ 226
9.15 Thrust Restraint ........................................................................................................ 229
9.16 Corrosion Protection ................................................................................................. 231
9.17 Contamination & Permeation Protection ................................................................... 232
9.18 Testing & Commissioning .......................................................................................... 232
Appendix A – Typical Drawings ………………………………………………………………………………………………………I

Appendix B – Size & Weight Requirements (Geo-Technical)………………………………………………..………..II
Appendix C – Soil Properties for Analysis & Design…………………………………………………………………….…III
Appendix D – Borehole Log Sample……………………………………………………………………………………………...IV
Appendix E – Marine EIA Survey for Offshore Development…………………………………………………..……..V
Appendix F – Guideline for Preliminary Investigation for Consultant…………………………………………….VI
Appendix G – Required Analyses per Soil Type & Designed Structures…………………………………………VII
Appendix H – Table of Content of PDR, FDR, DD………………………………………………………………………….VIII
Page 4 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
1 Introduction
These TRANSCO Design Guidelines were developed under project N-14054, commencing in July 2016
by the appointed Consultant, MWH Global. The Design Guidelines were developed in conjunction with
the TRANSCO Particular Specifications and Standard Detail Drawings.
Prior to the development of these guidelines, TRANSCO was communicating design requirements to
external entities individually. These guidelines take into consideration previously established and
applied practises, and build upon them based on the institutional knowledge within TRANSCO’s
various departments which has developed over many years of practical experience. These guidelines
also include improvements based on internationally accepted best practices.
These guidelines are applicable to the design of water infrastructure for TRANSCO. They are applicable
to the project lifecycle from the planning / concept stage, to design, and construction. These
guidelines are applicable internally and externally, including to Consultants, Contractors, and other
entities responsible to the design and construction of TRANSCO assets.
The guidelines are set out in 9 sections plus Appendices. Each of these sections are described as
follows:
• Section 1 Introduction
• Section 2 Resource Documents –This section lists the related documents of ADWEA and other
stakeholders which are to be read in conjunction with the design guidelines
• Section 3 Studies - covers the areas of hydraulic steady state and transient modelling,
geotechnical and geophysical investigations, environmental planning and regulatory
requirements, pipe stress analysis and power supply studies
• Section 4 General Design - sets out the general requirements of demand calculations, design
loads, operation and control philosophy, drawing requirements, approvals, HSEQ, and
HAZID/HAZOP studies
• Section 5 Civil Works Design - covers the civil aspects of TRANSCOs facilities including pump
stations, reservoirs, pipelines and interface points
• Section 6 Electrical Design - sets out the electrical requirements for the pumping station and
associated facilities
• Section 7 Mechanical Design - sets out the mechanical aspects of pump stations, pipelines and
reservoirs
• Section 8 Instrumentation and Control - sets out the control requirements as well as SCADA
and communications requirements to operate the system
• Section 9 Pipelines design - sets out the requirements for design of Carbon Steel, Ductile Iron
and HDPE pipelines
Appendices contain additional information relating to geotechnical investigations, 55 typical drawings

to assist TRANSCO’s designers develop a consistent approach to the various facility designs for
TRANSCO.
Page 5 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
2 Resource Documents
These guidelines shall be considered in conjunction with the ADWEA Standard Specifications,
TRANSCO Specifications, Standard Detail Drawings, the scope of works for individual projects, and the
reference documents detailed herein.
These guidelines were developed in general accordance with stipulations of the following documents:
o Water Transmission Code (WTC) Rev 4, 2012

o Water Transmission Security Standard (WTSS)Rev 1, 2004
o Metering & Data Exchange Code (MDEC) Version 4, 2017
o ADWEA Water Standard Specification (AWSS) Latest revisions
o Water Transmission Network Development Master Plan (Long term) 2015
o Project Documentation for executed water projects.
o Water Quality Regulations 4th Edition, 2014
In addition to the above documents, Designers of TRANSCO projects should take into account
guidelines from stakeholder organisations such as Abu Dhabi Urban Planning Council Manuals and
Guidelines, Abu Dhabi Municipality Manuals and Guidelines and similar documents from elsewhere in
the UAE.
If a conflict occurs between these Guidelines and the reference documents, the Guidelines shall
generally take precedence subject to agreement with TRANSCO Engineer.
Page 6 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
3 Studies
3.1 Hydraulics
These guidelines are issued for the use of Consultants and Contractors on design and construction
contracts for TRANSCO. They are to be read in conjunction with the latest versions of the following
documents:
• Water Transmission Code

• Water Security Standard
• Water Quality Guidelines
• Metering and Data Exchange Code
• ADWEA Standard Specifications
Hydraulic calculations and modelling are required at the following stages of project development:
• Preliminary Design Report (PDR)

• Final Design Report (FDR)
• Detailed Design (EPC or Procure/Construct)
This document explains the process for conducting hydraulic modelling and covers three aspects of
the hydraulic design process:
• Steady State Hydraulics

• Water Quality Modelling
• Surge (Transient) Modelling
There are common data requirements and approaches for all three aspects. These are addressed in
the following sections.
3.1.1 Input Data

3.1.1.1 Provided by TRANSCO
The following input data will be provided by TRANSCO to the Consultant/Contractor on
commencement of the study, however this is subject to availability and if data is not available with
TRANSCO it shall be collected by the Consultant from other sources and/or shall prepare as required:
• Existing TRANSCO network models (if any)

• GIS data
• Digital terrain model (DTM)
• As built drawings (existing systems)
• Design data (pressure, flow, etc.)
• Operation and Control philosophy (existing systems)
• Master Plan (if required)
3.1.1.2 Provided by the Consultant/Contractor

The following input data will be collected by the Contractor:
• Existing Distribution Company (DISCO) network models (if any)

• Existing downstream DISCO network GIS data
• Operational pressure and flow records
• Hydraulic characteristics of components e.g. valves [Kv and Xf (cavitation potential) values]
• Air valves data (inflow and out flow curves)
Page 7 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
• Air vessels data (operation levels, controls & dimensions)
3.1.2 Modelling Software

Steady state modelling refers to the prediction of network pressures and flows at discrete intervals
over the design day. Extended Period Modelling (EPS) shall be used unless the system to be designed
operates at constant pressure and flow.
TRANSCO’s preferred steady state hydraulic modelling software is InfoWater (Innovyze Inc., USA). The
latest version of InfoWater software shall be used for all calculations. Water quality modelling shall
also be conducted using InfoWater software.
Where approved by TRANSCO, steady state hydraulic modelling may be conducted in EPANET (EPA,
USA) or any other software which is compatible with EPANET or Infowater.
TRANSCO’s surge (transient) modelling software is WANDA (Deltares, Netherlands). All design surge
calculations shall be conducted in WANDA. However, other surge modelling software which are
compatible with WANDA can be used for basic surge simulations subject to approval of TRANSCO.
Approval would be subject to comparison by test case. Test case to be proposed by the designer and
should include a comparison from Streeter and Wylie plus one comparison involving air valve opening
and closing.
A copy of all hydraulic, water quality and surge models shall be provided to TRANSCO on completion
of design studies. Models shall be delivered in WANDA files format for surge and in INFOWATER or
EPANET format for steady state whichever is available with TRANSCO.
If another surge software is used with TRANSCO permission, all surge models provided to TRANSCO
shall be compatible to WANDA and shall run on TRANSCO system without any error or alerts. All such
conversions shall be performed prior to the submission and TRANSCO may allow Consultants Engineer
to have these conversions in TRANSCO office subject to availability of licence. Duration of such
permission will not exceed one week. No computer will be provided by TRANSCO and no design work
will be allowed in TRANSCO office.
Models shall be submitted with all submissions and works that are related to hydraulics and surge and
for which TRANSCO review is required. Models shall be delivered in WANDA files format for surge and
in INFOWATER or EPANET format for steady state whichever is available with TRANSCO.
All surge models compatible to WANDA format shall be provided. All scenarios/cases analysed by the
Consultant shall be submitted and separate files shall be provided with complete data to TRANSCO.
All components in WANDA e.g. pipes, pumps, valves, vessels etc. shall include notes indicating the
necessary details not limited to the following;
Pipeline
Type Existing or Proposed
Source of Information As built or Design
Levels as built or design
Equipment
Type Existing or proposed
Source of Information From Data sheet or From Contractor or assumed
Page 8 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
3.1.3 General Design Parameters
3.1.3.1 Pipe Roughness
Losses in the pipeline depends on the roughness of the internal surface of the pipeline. Roughness will
vary with pipe material, type of coating and age of the pipeline. Pipeline hydraulic calculations shall
use the Darcy Weisbach - Colebrook-White equation for calculating the friction losses.
Darcy Weisbach equation is given below.
H L = f L V2 / 2gD
Where
H L = head loss due to friction, m
f = friction factor (symbol “l” lambda also used for friction factor in some references)
L = length, m
V = velocity, m/sec
G = acceleration due to gravity, m/sec2
D = diameter of pipeline
Friction factor ‘f’ shall be calculated using Colebrook White equation which is given below
Where,
f = friction factor
d = diameter, m
R e = Reynolds Number
k s = roughness of pipe, m
Roughness values shall be established by field measurement or based on appropriate industry

guidance. A table of typical roughness values for different pipe materials is given in Table 3.1 below.
In Table 3.1, second column represents the design value whereas the third column presents the range
to be considered in the sensitivity analysis. Consultants shall provide their calculations based on design
value as well as based on the sensitivity testing range.
Table 3.1 – Pipe Roughness Values.
Pipe Material Roughness Value (mm)

Design Value Sensitivity Test Range
uPVC 0.0045 0.003 – 0.006
GRP 0.045 0.03 – 0.06
Page 9 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
Ductile Iron lined with Cement 0.15 0.05 – 0.30
Mortar
Carbon Steel lined with Cement 0.10 0.05 – 0.15

Mortar
Ductile Iron / Carbon Steel lined

with:
Polyethylene
0.06 0.01 – 0.15
Polyurethane
0.02 -
3.1.3.2 Minor Loss

Headloss at bends, fittings and appurtenances shall be included in all calculations. Minor loss values
shall be established for significant elements such as flow control valves, pressure control valves, non-
return valves, etc., and included in calculations as a discrete headloss. Distributed headloss from bends
and minor fittings (e.g. line valves) may be accommodated using appropriate pipe roughness values.
Control valve characteristics (Minor Loss or Kv against Position) shall be determined from
manufacturer data. Consultant shall provide the head loss and flow values against various percentages
of openings and the required values of Kv, Xf (cavitation index) for the equipment selection. Other
minor loss coefficients may be obtained from appropriate industry look-up tables. A table of typical
values for common network fittings is given in Table 3.2 below.
Table 3.2 – Minor Fittings Loss Coefficients.
Fitting Loss Coefficient ‘K’ Fitting Loss Coefficient ‘K’
Entry Losses Exit losses
-Sharp Edge 0.5 -Sudden Enlargement 1.0
-Rounded Entrance 0.25 Bellmouth Outlet 0.2
-Bellmouth Entrance 0.05
Bends (R/D=1) Bends (R/D 2 to 7)
-22.5 degree 0.15 -22.5 degree 0.1
-45 degree 0.3 -45 degree 0.2
-90 degree 0.75 -90 degree 0.4
Tee Angle Branch
-flow in line 0.3 -flow in line 0.35
-line to branch 0.9 -line to branch (45 deg.) 0.6
Sudden Enlargements Sudden Contractions
Page 10 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
Fitting Loss Coefficient ‘K’ Fitting Loss Coefficient ‘K’
Inlet: outlet dia. Inlet: outlet dia.
3:4 0.2 4:3 0.2
1:2 0.6 2:1 0.35
1:5 1.0 5:1 0.5
Taper Gate Valves
Inlet: outlet dia. -fully open 0.12
3:4 0.04 -25% closed 1.0
1:2 0.12 -50% closed 6.0
Globe Valve 10.0 Reflux Valve 1.0 – 2.0
Ball Valve 0.1 Butterfly Valve (open) 0.5 - 2.0
Note: minor losses can also be taken from tables in WANDA software. Examples from WANDA include
Bends(R/D=1.5)
45 degree 0.12 90 degree 0.2
Ball valve (100% open) 0.25 Diffuser (1:4) 0.1
Minor losses through the fittings can be calculated using the loss coefficient given in Table 3.2 and
using the following formula
h m = K V2 / 2g
Where
h m = head loss due to fitting, m
V = velocity, m/sec
K = loss coefficient (“xi” also used for loss coefficient in some references)
g = acceleration due to gravity, m/sec2
For discrete losses, handbook of Hydraulic Resistance by Idelchik shall be used and reference shall be
provided. However, if any other similar book is proposed by the Consultant, it shall be first approved
from the TRANSCO and two (2) copies of reference shall be provided to TRANSCO for approval.
3.1.3.3 Pipe Diameter

True pipeline internal diameter shall be used for all calculations. Internal diameters shall be obtained
from manufacturer data or relevant International Standards. At preliminary design stage, Nominal
diameter can be used, however in detailed design stage all calculations shall be based on True
diameter of the pipeline.
3.1.3.4 Pump Curves

Pump characteristic curves (head-flow) shall be obtained from manufacturer data or determined by
in-situ measurement.
Page 11 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
For proposed/new systems the pump curves shall be obtained from the pump manufacturer and same
shall be used in the analysis.
For existing system, in addition to the manufacturer data, the in situ pump curves shall also be plotted
and evaluated. The in situ curves can be plotted by taking the measurements of the pump
head/pressure against various flow rates by varying the system resistance. If in situ (site
measurement) curve is different than the original design, the actual measurements shall be used with
prior approval from TRANSCO.
Pump and motor inertia shall be obtained from the manufacturer and combined inertia shall be used.
In case these are not available at initial stage, these shall be calculated using the below equations for
pumps and motors. However, in detailed design actual inertia from manufacturer shall be used.
0.844
 P 
I P = 0.03407 3 
N 
Where
I p = inertia of pump, kg.m2
I m = inertia of motor, kg.m2
P = Pump power, KW
N = speed of pump, RPM in 1000 revolutions per minute
Combined inertia will be sum of pump inertia and motor inertia.
3.1.3.5 Design Flow

Design flow shall be established by reference to; TRANSCO design statement, ADWEC demand
forecast, typical or measured diurnal demand variation, and consideration of emergency supply
conditions. Design flow is normally provided as average demand on Peak Week for each design
horizon. A series of design horizons (e.g. current or future years) may be provided for consideration
in the hydraulic design.
3.1.3.6 Design Pressure

Minimum permissible pressure at tap-offs is normally determined by the customer (DSCO) subject to
an ADWEA prescribed minimum pressure of 1.25 bar within the distribution system.
In transmission systems, the minimum steady state pressure is commonly governed by system
topography. At local high points or at Terminal Stations, the minimum pressure shall be maintained
between 3 and 5 metres, in order to maintain sufficient positive pressure to (a) prevent contaminant
intrusion and (b) ensure correct seat of air valves on the line. When designing for steady state
conditions, consideration should be given to transients possibly causing lower pressure at local high
points. Pressure should be determined relative to top of pipe (soffit) or air valve float as appropriate.
Page 12 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
Maximum steady state pressure in transmission systems is determined by the designer and designated
as Design Pressure (DP). The Design Pressure should encompass the envelope of all normal operating
conditions, such as pump on, pump off, static system, maximum demand and minimum demand at all
design horizons (e.g. current and future years).
Definitions of various Pressure terms and abbreviations are given in Table 3.3 below.
Table 3.3 - Various Pressure terms, abbreviations and definitions
Term Abbreviation Definition
Design Pressure / Maximum DP / MAOP Design Pressure or Maximum Allowable

Allowable Operating Pressure Operating pressure is the maximum
allowable pressure in the system under
steady state conditions.
Maximum Design Pressure / MDP / MASP Maximum Design Pressure or Maximum

Maximum Allowable Surge allowable Surge pressure is the maximum
Pressure allowable pressure in the system during
the surge event (including the surge
pressure).
Site Test Pressure STP Site Test Pressure is the pressure at

which the system shall be tested at site.
Site Test Pressure (STP) is the pressure at which system shall be tested at the site. The requirements
of Site Test Pressure (STP) for various pipe materials are given below.
For Ductile Iron, Carbon Steel and GRP pipes, the Site Test Pressure (STP) shall be considered equal to
the pressure rating of the pipeline. The pipe pressure rating shall not be less than 1.5 times the
maximum operating pressure in the system.
For HDPE pipelines, the Site Test Pressure (STP) shall be considered equal to the rated pressure of the
pipeline. Note that while selecting the pipe pressure class, temperature de-rating shall be considered
as per manufacturer recommendations and pipe pressure rating at design temperature (after applying
temperature de-rating factor) shall not be less than 1.5 times the maximum operating pressure in the
system.
All thrust blocks, anchor blocks and restraining systems on the pipelines shall be designed for the Site
Test Pressure (STP).
For long pipelines which have high static head, the site tests can be carried out in segments of the
pipeline with proper isolation. Individual segments shall be tested at STP, any valves and other
equipment in the test section shall be suitable to withstand the applied pressure. Additionally, any
pipe segments with low levels shall be specially checked against any additional pressure due to
topography. All individual segments shall be tested at the selected STP. All thrust blocks shall be
designed considering the STP of the pipeline.
All as built drawings shall include the information of Design Pressure (DP), Maximum Design Pressure
(MDP) and Site Test Pressure (STP) of the pipelines.
Page 13 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
3.1.3.7 Boundary Conditions
The hydraulic model should encompass defined hydraulic boundaries such as tank, customer
discharge, levels, elevations, pressures, etc. as necessary for accurate analysis of the system. The
designer should be aware of the contractual boundary between TRANSCO and DISCO assets but the
model should not be limited to this extent artificially. Simplification of the DSCO network is permitted
in the model when insufficient data are available for a more detailed representation.
The designer shall liaise with the appropriate Stakeholders to obtain information on the downstream
distribution system. The Designer shall collect all necessary information, prepare files, complete forms
and agree with the consumer.
Specifically in the case of direct connection with either new or modification of connection with
customer the designer needs to ensure that he collects all necessary paramaters as requested in Direct
Connection Procedures. He needs to have the Direct Connection Application Form signed and stamped
by DISCO.
3.1.4 Surge Design Parameters

3.1.4.1 Pipe Material Properties
Pipe material properties such as external diameter, thickness, Young’s Modulus, Poisson’s Ratio, etc.
shall be taken from manufacturer data or relevant International Standards. Pipe wave speed shall be
calculated from material properties for each pipe in the network under analysis. Allowance shall be
made for variations in wave speed due to system unknowns (e.g. presence of free air, pipe restraint
conditions, material and diameter, Young Modulus, temperature, time step etc.).
In calculation of wave speed ignore the concrete lining thickness. Typical Young Modulus values for
various materials are given in Table 3.4 below. These can be used in the analysis.
Table 3.4 – Typical Youngs Modulus Values for Various Materials
Material Young Modulus Value (GPa)
Asbestos cement 23 – 24
Cast Iron 80 – 170
Concrete 14 – 30
Concrete (reinforced) 30 – 60
Ductile Iron 172
Polyethylene 0.7 – 0.8
PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) 2.4 – 3.5
Steel 200 – 207
GRP 11 - 13
GRE 13 - 15
Page 14 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
3.1.4.2 Valves
The properties of all types of valves e.g. flow control valves, non-return/check valves, pressure
regulating valve, air valves etc. included in the system, shall be obtained from the manufacturer and
same shall be used in the analysis. Inlet and outlet of the air valves shall be properly designed to avoid
negative pressure in the pipeline and shall not result air slam due to rapid expulsion of air during surge
event or priming/pump start up. The adopted properties of all types of valves and their operational
ranges shall be included in the report.
Check Valve
When selecting the check valve type, consideration shall be given to check valve dynamic closing
characteristics and consequence of check valve slam on surge. Ideally, valves shall be selected based
on their surge response following surge analysis. Recommendations of the surge report shall include
appropriate check valve type (instead of selecting the check valve first and then trying to mitigate
surge effects caused by that particular valve). A fast acting non slam type check valve is preferred.
Reverse velocity characteristic of the selected check valves shall be obtained from manufacturer to
allow for modelling of the valve dynamic characteristics in surge software.
Pressure Relief /Release Valve and Chamber
Pressure relief valves are to be located in a chamber with instrumentation to monitor water level to
ensure the chamber is not full and is ready to receive additional flow from the pressure relief valve.
3.1.4.3 Gas Expansion Coefficient

The Gas Expansion Coefficient or Laplace Coefficient is a key parameter for performance of air vessels.
In general the Kpvalue for bladder type will be 1.4 and for air valves will be 1.2. However the Laplace
Coefficient shall be tested for a range from isothermal (Kp=1.0) to adiabatic (Kp=1.4). In case of
significant impact on surge vessel volume, TRANSCO can ask Consultants to investigate and submit the
additional scenarios within the sensitivity range. Results of all scenarios shall be submitted to
TRANSCO for final selection and approval.
3.1.4.4 Design Pressure

The objective of surge protection is to prevent excessive high pressure from damaging the pipeline
and to minimise risk of contamination from air entry or low pressure at potential intrusion locations
(joints and fittings). Secondary effects such as air valve slam or cavity formation/collapse will also be
avoided by this approach.
Minimum surge pressure shall be 0 bar gauge (atmospheric) with a target pressure of 3 to 5 metres at
air valves, if economically achievable (Case 1). This will prevent air entry into the pipeline. Negative
pressure is not allowed in any segment of the pipeline including the high points. If design is
uneconomical TRANSCO may advise to apply Case 2, e.g. by allowing air entrapment particularly on
pipeline with challenging profile/sections)
At critical locations e.g. high points along the pipeline profile, the inlets and out lets of the air valves
shall be properly sized. Air valves shall be sized to prevent any negative pressure in the pipeline during
surge event. Special consideration shall be given to the sizing of outlets of air valves and these shall
be designed to avoid air slam due to rapid air expulsion including during start-up of pumps. . At high
points (if required) additional air valves can be provided to prevent the negative pressure, however,
air outlet capacities shall be checked against start up conditions to prevent air valve slam due to rapid
air release. All such special cases are subject to TRANSCO approval.
Page 15 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
Additionally, all air valves along the pipeline shall be adequately sized and shall allow normal operation
of the washouts in case of pipe draining during maintenance.
The Consultants shall provide all surge analysis scenarios for the following two cases;
Case-1: If communication system e.g. SCADA control, Fibre Optic Cable (FOC) is available.
Case-2: If communication system e.g. SCADA control, Fibre Optic Cable (FOC) is not working due
to any reason.
As mentioned above, the negative pressure in the pipeline is not allowed. However, only in Case-2
when communication system (No FOC, SCADA) is not available and negative pressure cannot be
avoided, a negative pressure up to -5 m may be allowed subject to TRANSCO approval and structural
stability of the pipeline.
For suction pipelines, minimum allowable pressure during surge event is -5 m. All pipes, pipe supports,
bends, joints shall be designed to withstand the resulting pressure and detailed calculations shall be
submitted to TRANSCO for approval.
Definitions of various pressure terms are presented in Table 3.3 in earlier section. All new pipelines
shall be tested at the pipe pressure rating as described in Section 3.3.3.6 and accordingly all thrust
blocks on the pipeline shall be designed for the Site Test Pressure (STP). For further details of thrust
blocks design refer to Section 5.
The Maximum Design Pressure (MDP) is the maximum operating pressure including surge. MDP must
always be less than System Test Pressure (STP). Maximum surge pressure should be less than 1 bar
below STP (ref BS EN 805), the equation of BS EN 805 is given below.
Maximum Design Pressure including surge Calculated (MDP) = System Test Pressure (STP) - 1 bar
Pipelines should be structurally designed to at least STP (positive pressure) and full vacuum (negative
pressure). Hence, all pipes and fittings on the project should be rated to at least STP.
3.1.4.5 Surge Protection Devices

TRANSCO expect the surge designer to consider all appropriate surge mitigation devices in the surge
design. Typical devices (adapted from Thorley) are shown in Figure 3.1.
Page 16 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
Figure 3.1 – Typical Surge protection devices.
The designer should be cognisant of the minimum pressure limits for pipelines. This normally
precludes the use of air valves for surge protection. However, in exceptional circumstances air valves
may be designed specifically for surge control. These circumstances include intermediate high points
(consider rerouting pipelines to avoid) or locations above hydraulic grade when the system is at rest.
The designer should ensure that suitable air valve types are specified (e.g. anti-shock or anti-slam type)
and the required locations are identified in the design report. Consideration should be given for in-
built redundancy of air valves (i.e. N+1 design philosophy) where the surge control relies on these
devices. Software used for the surge analysis shall be capable to simulate the air valves inlet and out
let air flow vs pressure curves provided by the manufacturer.
Surge Vessel:
System shall be designed considering one surge vessel out of operation so an in built redundancy of
surge vessels (i.e. N+1 design philosophy) shall be adopted. Surge vessels air charge should be
provided considering one vessel out of operation.
Surge vessel air management systems comprise; mass control, 5-point level control, variable level
control, fixed mass (bladder), P-V or PV-T control. TRANSCO’s preference is for mass control. The
designer should justify selection of the recommended method of air control in their surge analysis
report.
Surge vessel designs should be optimised for minimum acceptable total vessel volume (i.e. minimum
cost) at each location. Consultant shall provide the details of surge vessels e.g. operation levels,
control philosophy and dimensions of the vessels. In the report all operational levels e.g. High high
level, high level, low level, low low levels etc. and actions associated with these levels shall be
Page 17 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
described in detail. Air release from the surge vessel shall be automatic, compressor & air release
system shall be designed accordingly.
Air Compressor:
Air Compressor and air piping design (for air vessels) should consider requirements for; initial filling
and commissioning, daily operation, and occasional maintenance, which will require markedly
different air flow rates. Initial filling of surge vessels can be by mobile compressor whereas the daily
operation shall be by in-situ compressor. In-situ compressor shall have a capacity that re-filling of one
surge vessel can be accomplished in 4 hrs in case of maintenance.
The following table sets out the design criteria for compressors
Table 3.5 – Design Criteria for compressors
S/N Category of use Required Compressor Capacity Typical frequency of use
Current Design case

Initial Scheduled activity
1 Large compressors design to give Full loading
commissioning in a limited time (less than 8 hours) of all air Once per lifetime
vessels with stand-by capacity
Large compressors designed to provide the Scheduled activity

Maintenance
2 Full loading in a limited time (less than 8 few times in the
operation
hours) of one or several air vessels lifetime
Usually, no compressor is required as the

vessel is designed to allow trip without air
Restart of the loss. Unscheduled activity
3
system after trip Compressor size depends on the specific Infrequent (<monthly)
details of the pipeline systems and air vessels
design.
Dissolution of air Very small volume (similar to a dive bottle Unscheduled activity
4
into water compressors Infrequent (<monthly)
Small Compressors (5% of total vessel

volume is usually needed) in limited time
(few hours). Unscheduled activity
5 Daily fluctuation
The issue is only for level control vessels Daily
(mass control system do not need daily air
loads).
Further details of the compressor are discussed in Section 7 “Mechanical Design”.
3.1.5 Water Quality Design Parameters

3.1.5.1 Chlorine Residual Modelling
The Water Quality Regulations stipulate a maximum and minimum chlorine residual in water supply
systems. The designer will be required to simulate chlorine decay in pipe networks in order to
Page 18 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
demonstrate compliance with the Regulations. This is normally achieved using the InfoWater water
quality modelling option.
The key parameter governing chlorine decay in pipe networks is the bulk decay constant (when using
the first order decay algorithm). Typical values can be obtained from TRANSCO however TRANSCO
require the designer to establish the relevant bulk decay constant via laboratory testing. A procedure
for laboratory testing (black bottle test) including sampling, initial testing, incubation, post incubation
testing etc. is to be agreed with TRANSCO. The value of bulk decay constant to be used for chlorine
residual modelling after black bottle test shall be approved from TRANSCO.
InfoWater water quality modelling algorithms also allow pipe wall decay to be considered. For
transmission pipelines, the wall decay coefficient can be considered as zero (0). However, where
appropriate, wall decay constants may be established by field testing and model calibration. Reference
should be made to industry standard procedures for water quality modelling (e.g. Characterization of
Decay …., Vasconcelos, Boulos, et al). Water quality modelling simulations shall be carried out at early
year and for the milestone years between early year and the planning horizon.
Water Quality modelling shall be carried out in the detailed design stage. However, if significant
difference is expected in WQ requirements in various design options of preliminary design, a focused
study shall be included in the Preliminary Design Report (PDR). Detailed Design Report (DDR) shall
include complete WQM, design of proposed system and specifications of proposed equipment.
3.1.5.2 Chlorine Booster Design

The InfoWater water quality model may be used to design chlorine booster systems, as required for
individual project compliance. The designer should consider the intermittent and varying need for
chlorine boosting throughout the lifetime of the project. In the early stages of a project where water
demand is low, consideration should be given for mobile chlorine injection systems. Later project
stages may require permanent chlorine booster stations to be designed.
Maximum chlorine levels should be controlled in order to limit potential for formation of Disinfection
By-Products (DBPs).
3.1.5.3 Disinfection By-Products

Other water quality parameters including Disinfection By-Products (DBPs) do not need to be explicitly
modelled in InfoWater.
3.1.6 Design Cases

3.1.6.1 Steady State Hydraulics
Scenarios
The steady state design should consider the full operating range of pressure and flow for the project
design horizons (i.e. current and future cases). This includes minimum demand, average demand and
maximum design demand (see Section 3.1.3.5). Normal and emergency cases should be examined.
The objective of steady state design cases is to ensure that the complete range of operating conditions
is considered in analysis. Hence it is sufficient for the designer to address cases that define the
operating envelope. However, for pump selection purposes the normal operating cases should also
be analysed.
Preliminary Design Report (PDR) shall include the hydraulic analysis of all scenarios and details of
equipment. Detailed Design and Final Design Report shall incorporate the final profiles of the pipelines
and final selection of the equipment.
Page 19 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
The design report should include:
a. Hydraulic Profile
Comprising longitudinal section of pipeline with ground elevation / pipe profile, normal, maximum
and minimum hydraulic grade line (HGL) above datum
b. Pressure/Head Profile
Comprising pressure-distance plot along pipeline with normal, maximum and minimum pressure,
and pipe Standard Test Pressure superimposed.
c. Pump Curve and System Curve
Comprising pump(s) and system curve for normal, maximum and minimum static head
d. Valves
Comprising details of Flow Control Valves (FCV) and Pressure Control Valves (PCV), operating
range (minimum & maximum), operational requirements and hydraulic characteristics against
various flow conditions (20 % to 100%) e.g. Kv, Xf (cavitation index) etc. Control valve opening
below 5% is not acceptable.
Reporting
The Steady State Hydraulics Report shall contain the following sections as a minimum:
• Criteria
• Executive Summary
• Document Tracking
• Project Objectives
• Data Collection
• Design Case Definition (includes design flows)
• Description of Model Build
• Modelling Outcomes (including hydraulic profile, pressure /head profile, pump and system
curves, valves, tanks at high and low water levels)
• Proposed System Requirements (pumps, surge equipment, water quality, pressures, control
philosophy, summary table for control valves SCADA, equipment etc.)
• Conclusions and Recommendations
3.1.6.2 Surge Analysis

Scenarios
The surge design cases shall be selected to cover the full envelope of maximum and minimum pressure
in the system under consideration. Surge analysis shall be carried out in both the final design stage
and detailed design stage. However, if significant difference in the surge vessel requirements is
expected in design options of preliminary design stage (due to topography, route etc.), a focused study
shall be included in the Preliminary design Report (PDR). In both Final design and Detailed design,
Consultant shall carry out the complete surge analysis. The Detailed Design Report (DDR) shall include
the detailed surge analysis, plus design of equipment and their specifications.
Page 20 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
Consultant shall analyse the critical, emergency and typical operational scenarios under their design.
Typically this will include consideration of:
• Pump start (individual and sequential)

• Pump stop (individual and sequential)
• Pump trip (power loss to station)
• Priming analysis
• Valve closure (Interface Connection Point and Terminal Station)
• Pump switchover
• Pump by pass
• Flow diversion, pumping to other locations
• Other operating modes according to project requirements
TRANSCO can ask for any additional project specific scenarios in addition to above. Proposed
equipment (valves, vessels, air valves) shall be able to work in all scenarios, however, these shall
be designed considering the critical scenarios associated with the equipment performance. Some
of the typical scenarios and basis of design of typical equipment is shown in Table 3.5 below.
Table 3.6: Some typical scenarios and equipment design basis
Scenarios Abbreviations Equipment Design
Full Pump Trip FTP Surge vessel, check valve & air valve
Pump Start up PSUP Air valves outlet
Pump Stop & Re-start PSRS Air valve inlet and outlet
Single Pump Trip SPT Check valve
Pump Switch Over PSO -
Valve Closure VC Valves, Surge Vessel
Priming of Pipeline PP Filling Control Valve(priming bypass

valve
Scenarios should consider worst case conditions for:
• Air vessel water level (e.g. Low, Low Level and High, High Level)
• Gas Expansion Coefficient (Laplace Coefficient) from adiabatic to isothermal
Where necessary, the designer should also carry out a sensitivity test for unknown parameters (see
Section 3.1.3.1).
Reporting
In addition to the requirements set out under steady state reporting, the Surge Analysis Report shall
contain the following sections as a minimum:
• Surge Design Case Definition

• Description of Model Build
• Surge Modelling Outcomes
Page 21 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
• Proposed Surge System requirements
3.1.6.3 Water Quality Modelling

Scenarios
Modelling for water quality (chlorine residual) should consider the full range of operating scenarios
for current and future design horizons. It is sufficient to ensure that the envelope of maximum and
minimum water quality is addressed for each design phase. Water Quality modelling shall be carried
out in the detailed design stage. However, if significant difference is expected in WQ requirements in
various options of preliminary design, a focused study shall be included in the Preliminary Design
Report (PDR). Detailed Design Report (DDR) shall include complete WQM, design of proposed system
and specifications of proposed equipment.
Reporting
The Water Quality Report shall contain the following sections as a minimum:
• Water Quality Design Case Definition

• Description of Model Build and Model Calibration
• WQ Modelling Outcomes
• Proposed Chlorination System Requirements
Page 22 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
3.2 Geotechnical & Geophysical Studies

3.2.1 General
The Geotechnical and Geophysical soil investigations work under these Guidelines shall consist of
conducting a complete soil investigation for the adequate design and construction of the entire civil
works belong to the water works.
A complete investigation and analysis should consist of an adequate program of field

sampling/works/tests, laboratory testing, and engineering analysis and evaluation, with the results
presented in a report. The investigation and analysis should be performed in compliance with the
procedures outlined in this document and generally accepted principles/practices/internationally
accepted Standards of sound engineering practice.
As such these standards and practices are to be followed as the minimum and more details, standards
or specifications may be required dependent on the specifics of the project. The Consultant shall
perform Geotechnical soil Investigation and Geophysical investigation in line with ADWEA Standard
Specification Ref. W – C – SS – 002. Consultant's services include performance of subsurface
exploration by borings involve performing the Standard Penetration Tests, the Rock Quality
Designation and the Shear Vane Test (SPT, RQD & SVT) where found necessary. Sampling, cone
penetration tests, test/trial pits, field and laboratory testing, geotechnical analysis and the preparation
of preliminary and final geotechnical reports.
3.2.2 Planning of Ground Investigations

3.2.2.1 Objectives
The main objectives of The Geotechnical and Geophysical soil investigations are; to assess the
suitability of the site for the proposed construction scheme, to enable safe and economic design, to
plan the most appropriate stages and methods of construction and to identify techniques of ground
improvement wherever needed.
Site investigation should be undertaken to achieve the following objectives:
• Examination of all available soil / rock data.

• Identification of soil / rock and groundwater conditions of the site.
• Identification of areas of exceptionally weak ground.
• Highlighting any soil instabilities such as slope failures or geological structures such as;
faults, folds etc.
• Indication of any long term instabilities such as ground water problem, solution features,
buried channels and cavities
The Geotechnical and Geophysical soil investigations work under these Guidelines shall consist of
conducting a complete soil investigation for the adequate design and construction of the entire civil
works belong to the water works.
Before designing the investigation programme, the available information and documents should be
evaluated in a desk study.
Examples of information and documents that can be used are, but not limited to:
• Geological maps and descriptions;
• Previous investigations at the site and in the surroundings;

• Aerial photos and previous photo interpretations;
Page 23 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
• Topographical maps.
Ground investigations should provide a description of ground conditions relevant to the proposed
works and establish a basis for the assessment of the geotechnical parameters relevant for all
construction stages.
The information obtained should enable assessment of the following aspects, but not limited to:
• The suitability of the site with respect to the proposed construction and the level of acceptable
risks;
• The deformation of the ground caused by the structure or resulting from construction works,
its spatial distribution and behavior over time;
• The safety with respect to limit states (e.g. subsidence, ground heave, uplift, slippage of soil
and rock masses, buckling of piles, etc.);
• The loads transmitted from the ground to the structure (e.g. lateral pressures on piles) and
the extent to which they depend on its design and construction;
• The foundation methods (e.g. ground improvement, whether it is possible to excavate,
drivability of piles, drainage);
• The sequence of foundation works;

• The effects of the structure and its use on the surroundings;
• Any additional structural measures required (e.g. support of excavation, anchorage, sleeving
of bored piles, removal of obstructions); the effects of construction work on the surroundings;
Groundwater information should be sufficient to assess the following aspects, where relevant:
• The scope for and nature of groundwater-lowering work;

• Possible harmful effects of the groundwater on excavations or on slopes;
• Any measures necessary to protect the structure;
• The effects of groundwater lowering, desiccation, impounding etc. on the surroundings;
• The capacity of the ground to absorb water injected during construction work;
• Whether it is possible to use local groundwater, given its chemical constitution, for
construction purposes.
3.2.2.2 Sequence of Ground Investigations
1. Desk studies;
2. Preliminary investigations (from CONSULTANTS);
3. Design investigations;
4. Supervision of construction;
5. Controlling and monitoring.
Page 24 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
3.2.2.3 Desk Studies
The primary objectives of the desk study are to evaluate the ground conditions based upon available
information on geology and ground water conditions, both locally and regionally, in order to plan the
extent of subsequent stages of ground investigation. During the desk study stage, the information
may be collected from published literature such as:
• Geological maps.
• Geological memoirs.
• Flooding, erosion, landslide and subsidence history.

• Data held by central and local authorities.
• Construction and investigation records of adjacent sites.
• Aerial photographs and other remote sensing data.
• Site boundaries and outlines of the proposed construction area.
• Ground contours and natural drainage features.
• Location and ease of access to the site.
• Ecological considerations and potential contamination as well as any restrictions imposed by

local authorities and other service agencies.
• Previous reports on studies carried out by others.
3.2.2.4 Preliminary Investigations

This section is to be used as a guide for the CONSULTANT in planning the boring program. It is not the
intent that the location, boring interval, and depth specified herein be rigidly adhered to. The
CONSULTANT should make use of available soils and geologic maps, water well records, reports,
publications, aerial photographs, and other reference materials which are available to prepare a
preliminary boring program. Borings should then be selectively located during a field check attended
by the CONSULTANT geotechnical engineer and by TRANSCO foundation analysis engineer or his
appointed representative.
The actual location, spacing, and depth of borings should be dictated by the topography, geologic
conditions, visible soil conditions, and design considerations, and in accordance with the practices set
forth herein.
The allowable soil bearing capacity shall be calculated to cater for preventing soil shear failure under
the foundation base and to tolerate the settlement to acceptable limit over a depth of at least 1.5 B
below the formation level (where B is the breadth of the foundation). The depth of investigations shall
be extended to all strata that will affect the project or are affected by the construction.
Borings should extend through any unsuitable or questionable foundation materials and sufficiently
deep into stable soils so that the potential for settlement from compression of that layer or that the
deeper underlying soils can be determined. If deep excavations are required for building the structure,
the explorations should be carried to at least 1.5 times the depth of the excavation in order to locate
and determine groundwater levels in any aquifers that may exist below the level of excavation. This is
Page 25 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
necessary to plan and design a dewatering system that may be required in deep excavations and to
avoid heave or disturbance to the bottom of the excavations.
Often borings are made in several stages. In the first stage, relatively few borings are made. Based
upon these findings, additional borings may be made between the initial borings to define soil
conditions in greater detail. The selection of sample type and frequency is determined by soil
conditions and requirements of the structure. Where soil conditions are favorable, especially for small
structures, all borings are often completed in the first phase of the investigation. If soil conditions are
well known with fairly thick individual layers of consistent physical properties, relatively widely spaced
borings may be sufficient. If, however, soil conditions vary appreciably from place to place, more
closely spaced borings will be required. The number and spacing must be determined by engineering
judgment as the work progresses. Sufficient number of borings should be done to determine the
stratification and interrelation of the soils to the extent economically feasible. The exploration should
be conducted considering the requirements of the structure. All soil data necessary for the selection
of the foundation and its design must be obtained.
As guideline for a preliminary study, CONSULTANTS should refer to the Table in Appendix E– Guideline
for preliminary investigation for Consultant. The Table provides the minimum soil investigation
required to understand and define the local geology.
3.2.2.5 Design Investigations

Locations and depths of the investigation points
The most important step in geotechnical design is to conduct an adequate subsurface investigation.
The number, depth, spacing, and character of borings, sampling, and testing to be made in an
individual exploration program are dependent upon site conditions and the type of project and its
requirements, so no "rigid" rules may be established. Usually the extent of work is established as the
site investigation progresses in the field. However, the following are considered reasonable
"guidelines" to follow to produce the minimum subsurface data needed to allow cost-effective
geotechnical design and construction and to minimize claim problems.
When selecting the locations of investigation points, the following should be observed:
• The investigation points should be arranged in such a pattern that the stratification can be
assessed across the site;
• The investigation points for a building or structure should be placed at critical points relative
to the shape, structural behavior and expected load distribution (e.g. at the corners of the
foundation area);
• For linear structures, investigation points should be arranged at adequate offsets to the center
line, depending on the overall width of the structure, such as an embankment footprint or a
cutting;
• For structures on or near slopes and steps in the terrain (including excavations), investigation
points should also be arranged outside the project area, these being located so that the
stability of the slope or cut can be assessed;
• Where anchorages are installed, due consideration should be given to the likely stresses in
their load transfer zone;
• The investigation points should be arranged so that they do not present a hazard to the
structure, the construction work, or the surroundings (e.g. they may cause changes to the
ground and groundwater conditions);
Page 26 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
• The area considered in the design investigations should extend into the neighboring area to a
distance where no harmful influence on the neighboring area is expected;
• For groundwater measuring points, the possibility of using the equipment installed during the
ground investigation for continued monitoring during and after the construction period
should be considered.
The depth of investigations should be extended to all strata that should affect the project or are
affected by the construction.
• For dams, weirs and excavations below groundwater level, and where dewatering work is
involved, the depth of investigation should also be selected as a function of the hydro-
geological conditions;
• Slopes and steps in the terrain should be explored to depths below any potential slip surface.
For the spacing of investigation points and investigation depths, the values given in Table 3.7 should
be used as guidance (Reference: "Subsurface Investigations" FHWA HI-97-021 and Eurocode 7 part2,
modified and adapted):
• For high-rise and industrial structures, a grid pattern with points at 15 m to 40 m distance;
• For large-area structures, a grid pattern with points at not more than 60 m distance;
• For linear structures (roads, railways, channels, pipelines, dikes, tunnels, retaining walls), a
spacing of 20 m to 200 m, and max. 500 m;
• For special structures (e.g. bridges, stacks, machinery foundations), two to six investigation
points per foundation;
• For dams and weirs, 25 m to 75 m distance, along vertical sections;

• For Cut-off wall, a spacing of 20 m to 60 m.
Table 3.7 – Number and Depth of Borings Investigation.
Geotechnical Minimum Number Minimum Depth (Za) of Borings

Feature of Borings
Structure
1 per substructure Spread footings: 2B where L< 2B, 4B where L > 2B and
Foundation
unit under 30 m (100 interpolate for L between 2B and 4B
ft) in width (B)
For raft foundations and structures with several
2 per substructure foundation elements whose effects in deeper strata are
unit over 30 m (100 superimposed on each other: ≥ 1.5B (where B is the
ft) in width smaller side of the structure)
(B)Additional borings
in areas of erratic Deep foundations: 6m (20ft) below tip elevation or L two
subsurface times maximum pile group dimension, whichever is
conditions greater
Page 27 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines

Feature of Borings
For piles the following three conditions should be met:
− Z a ≥1,0b g
− Z a ≥5,0 m
− Z a ≥3D F
Where D F is the pile base diameter; and b g is the smaller

side of the rectangle circumscribing the group of piles
forming the foundation at the level of the pile base.
If bedrock is encountered: for piles core 3 m (10 ft) below

tip elevation; for shafts core 3D or 2 times maximum shaft
group dimension below tip elevation, whichever is greater.
Retaining Borings spaced every Extend borings to depth of 0.75 to 1.5 times wall height
Structures 30 to 60 m (100 to
200 ft). Some When stratum indicates potential deep stability or
borings should be at settlement problem, extend borings to hard stratum
the front of and
some in back of the
wall face.
Bridge Approach When approach Extend borings into competent material and to a depth
Embankments embankments are to where added stresses due to embankment load is less
over Soft Ground be placed over soft than 10% of existing effective overburden stress or 3 m
ground, at least one (10 ft) into bedrock if encountered at a shallower depth
boring should be
made at each Additional shallower explorations (hand auger holes)
embankment to taken at approach embankment locations to determine
determine the depth and extent of unsuitable surface soils or topsoil.
problems associated
with stability and If only soft soil encountered, the larger value of the
settlement of the following conditions should be met:
embankment.
Typically, test
For dams: 0,8h < Z a < 1,2h or Z a ≥6m where h is the
borings taken for the
embankment height.
approach
embankments are
located at the For cuttings: Z a ≥2,0 m or Z a ≥0,4h, where h is the dam
proposed abutment height or depth of cutting.
locations to serve a
dual function.
Page 28 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines

Feature of Borings
Centreline Cuts Borings typically Cuts: (1) in stable materials extend borings minimum 5 m
and spaced every 60 m (15 ft) below depth of cut at the ditch line and, (2) in weak
Embankments (200 ft) (erratic soils extend borings below grade to firm materials or to
conditions) to 120 m twice the depth of cut whichever occurs first.
(400 ft) (uniform
conditions) with at Embankments: Extend borings to a hard stratum or to a
least one boring depth of twice the embankment height.
taken in each
separate landform.
For high cuts and

fills, should have a
minimum of 3
borings along a line
perpendicular to
centreline or
planned slope face
to establish geologic
cross-section for
analysis.
Roads and A spacing of 20 m to Z a ≥2 m below the proposed formation level.

airfields 200 m, and max. 500
m
Trenches, small A spacing of 20 m to The larger value of: Z a ≥2 m below the invert level; Z a
tunnels and 200 m, and max. 500 ≥1,5b Ah where b Ah is the width of excavation.
pipelines m
For small tunnels and caverns: b Ab < za< 2,0b Ab , where b Ab
is the width of excavation.
The groundwater conditions described in should also be

taken into account.
Landslides Minimum 3 borings Extend borings to an elevation below active or potential

along a line failure surface and into hard stratum, or to a depth for
perpendicular to which failure is unlikely because of geometry of cross-
centreline or section.
planned slope face
to establish geologic Slope inclinometers used to locate the depth of an active
cross-section for slide must extend below base of slide.
analysis. Number of
sections depends on
extent of stability
Page 29 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines

Feature of Borings
problem. For active

slide, place at least
on boring each
above and below
sliding area
Excavations A grid pattern with Where the piezometric surface and the ground-water
points at 15 m to 40 tables are below the excavation base, the larger value of
m distance; the following conditions should be met:
For large-area
excavation, a grid − Z a ≥0,4h
pattern with points
at not more than 60 − Z a ≥(t + 2,0) m
m distance;
Where: t is the embedded length of the support; and h is
the excavation depth.
Where the piezometric surface and the ground-water

tables are above the excavation base, the larger value of
the following conditions should be met:
− Z a ≥(1,0⋅H + 2,0) m
− Z a ≥(t + 2,0) m
Where H is the height of the groundwater level above the

excavation base; and t is the embedded length of the
support.
Cut-off walls A spacing of 20 m to Z a ≥2 m below the surface of the stratum impermeable to

60 m; groundwater.
Ground Varies widely depending in the ground improvement technique(s) being
Improvement employed. For more information see "Ground Improvement Technical
Techniques Summaries" FHWA SA-98-086R.
Material Sites Borings spaced every Extend exploration to base of deposit or to depth required
(Borrow sources, 30 to 60 m (100 to to provide needed quantity.
Quarries) 200 ft).
Sand or Gravel SPT (split-spoon) samples should be taken at 1.5 m (5 ft) intervals or at
Soils significant changes in soil strata. Continuous SPT samples are recommended in
the top 4.5 m (15 ft) of borings made at locations where spread footings may be
placed in natural soils. SPT jar or bag samples should be sent to lab for
classification testing and verification of field visual soil identification.
Page 30 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines

Feature of Borings
Silt or Clay Soils SPT and "undisturbed" thin wall tube samples should be taken at 1.5 m (5 ft)
intervals or at significant changes in strata. Take alternate SPT and tube samples
in same boring or take tube samples in separate undisturbed boring. Tube
samples should be sent to lab to allow consolidation testing (for settlement
analysis) and strength testing (for slope stability and foundation bearing capacity
Analysis). Field vane shear testing is also recommended to obtain in-place shear
strength of soft clays, silts and well-rotted peat.
Rock Continuous cores should be obtained in rock or shales using double or triple tube
core barrels. In structural foundation investigations, core a minimum of 3 m (10
ft) into rock to insure it is bedrock and not a boulder. Core samples should be
sent to the lab for possible strength testing (unconfined compression) if for
foundation investigation. Percent core recovery and RQD value should be
determined in field or lab for each core run and recorded on boring log.
Groundwater Water level encountered during drilling, at completion of boring, and at 24 hours
after completion of boring should be recorded on boring log. In low permeability
soils such as silts and clays, a false indication of the water level may be obtained
when water is used for drilling fluid and adequate time is not permitted after
boring completion for the water level to stabilize (more than one week may be
required). In such soils, a plastic pipe water observation well should be installed
to allow monitoring of the water level over a period of time. Seasonal
fluctuations of water table should be determined where fluctuation will have
significant impact on design or construction (e.g., borrow source, footing
excavation, excavation at toe of landslide, etc.). Artesian pressure and seepage
zones, if encountered, should also be noted on the boring log. In landslide
investigations, slope inclinometer casings can also serve as water observations
wells by using "leaky" couplings (either normal aluminium couplings or PVC
couplings with small holes drilled through them) and pea gravel backfill. The top
0.3 m (1 ft) or so of the annular space between water observation well pipes and
borehole wall should be backfilled with grout, bentonite, or sand-cement
mixture to prevent surface water inflow which can cause erroneous
groundwater level readings.
Soil Borrow Exploration equipment that will allow direct observation and sampling of the
Sources subsurface soil layers is most desirable for material site investigations. Such
equipment that can consist of backhoes, dozers, or large diameter augers, is
preferred for exploration above the water table. Below the water table, SPT
borings can be used. SPT samples should be taken at 1.5 m (5 ft) intervals or at
significant changes in strata. Samples should be sent to lab for classification
testing to verify field visual identification. Groundwater level should be
recorded. Observations wells should be installed to monitor water levels where
significant seasonal fluctuation is anticipated.
Quarry Sites Rock coring should be used to explore new quarry sites. Use of double or triple
tube core barrels is recommended to maximize core recovery. For riprap source,
spacing of fractures should be carefully measured to allow assessment of rock
Page 31 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines

Feature of Borings
sizes that can be produced by blasting. For aggregate source, the amount and
type of joint infilling should be carefully noted. If assessment is made on the
basis of an existing quarry site face, it may be necessary to core or use
geophysical techniques to verify that nature of rock does not change behind the
face or at depth. Core samples should be sent to lab for quality tests to
determine suitability for riprap or aggregate.
Trial Pits
The depth and spacing of trial pits should be such as to give a true picture of the underlying soil, with
regard to any major changes in thickness, depth or properties of the strata over the base area of the
structure and in its immediate vicinity. Only a preliminary estimate of spacing is made first. This may
be decreased or increased depending upon the information revealed by borings.
According to Standard, the following specifications are laid down in this regard:
1. For a compact building site covering an area of about 0.4 hectare (i.e. 4000 m2), one trial pit
in each corner and one in the center (i.e. 5 trial pits in all) should be adequate;
2. For smaller areas and less important buildings even one trial pit in the center should be
sufficient;
3. For very large areas covering industrial and residential colonies, the geological nature of the
terrain should help in deciding the number of trial pits. Dynamic or static cone penetration
tests may be performed at every 100 meters by dividing the area in a grid pattern and numbers
of bore holes or trial pits are decided by examining the variation in the penetration curves;
4. For exploration purposes, the minimum depth is taken as 1.5 m because the weathering
processes affect the soil up to this depth. But where industrial processes affect the soil
characteristics this depth may be more;
5. Along pipeline routes, one (1) Trial Pit every 500 m should be adequate in uniform soil, and
every 200 m in average soil.
For preliminary estimate, the spacing may be adopted as presented in the following Table 3.8.
Table 3.8 – Number and Depth of Trial Pits Investigation.
Types of Buildings/pipeline Very Uniform Soil Average Soil

route
Compact building site (4000 5 TP (corners and center) 5 TP (corners and center)
m2)
Small area 1 TP (center) 1 TP (center)
Large areas (>100,000 m2) Every 100 meters in a grid Every 100 meters in a grid
Page 32 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
Multi-storeyed buildings 30 – 60 m 15 – 30 m
Single storey building 60 – 90 m 30 – 60 m
Pipeline Every 1000 m Every 500 m
* Small building < 30m in length requires a minimum of 1 borehole
When the bed rock is found, the surface should be plotted by a number of borings or surroundings in
order to locate any depressions. For this purpose, a few borings and sub-surface soundings (See
geophysical investigation section) are first made at large intervals and intermediate values, if needed,
can be normally obtained by soundings, or by further borings in case of unpredictable profile nature.
Sampling and Laboratory Tests
For identification and classification of the ground, at least one borehole or trial pit with sampling
should be available. Samples should be obtained from every separate ground layer influencing the
behavior of the structure. ASTM Standards (See Appendix A) should be applied.
Samples should be taken at any change of stratum and/or at a specified spacing, usually not larger
than 3 m. In inhomogeneous soil, or if a detailed definition of the ground conditions is required,
continuous sampling by drilling should be carried out or samples recovered at very short intervals.
Samples should contain all the mineral constituents of the strata from which they have been taken.
They should not be contaminated by any material from other strata or from additives used during the
sampling procedure.
Undisturbed samples (samples of quality class 1) from bound and organic layers should be taken as
instructed by the site engineer. They are to be taken from the undisturbed section underneath the
casing and should be documented in the drilling logs. The sampling should ensure that the soil
properties remain unchanged during sampling and handling, transport and storage, and should
identify the following:
• Particle size;
• Water content;
• Density, density index, porosity, permeability;

• Compressibility, shear strength;
• Sequence of layers;
• Boundaries of strata – broad;
• Boundaries of strata – fine;
• Atterberg limits, particle density, organic content.
• Tri-axle shear
• Direct Shear
Disturbed samples (samples with quality class 3 to 4) should be placed in sample containers of at least
1.0 litre volume and adequately closed (sealed). Labelling should be weather resistant and must
Page 33 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
include record of the borehole, date and depth. Disturbed samples should be taken in each case of
material/layer changes (e.g. change in grain size distribution, quality or colour), at least however every
meter. Recovery depths of the samples should be documented in the drilling logs.
Origin of samples should be clearly identified with indication of:
• Drilling Contractor;
• Section / Location;
• Drilling identification no.;

• Depth of sample recovery;
• Disturbed / undisturbed sample;
• Date of sample recovery;

• Meter from …… to …….
Sampling may be replaced by field tests if there is enough local experience to correlate the field tests
with the ground conditions to ensure unambiguous interpretation of the results.
Samples to be tested should be representative, i.e. they should be similar in characteristics to most of
the stratum from which they come, or be an average of the range of materials present. If this appears
difficult because of variations in the stratum, it may be necessary to consider subdivisions of the
stratum for sampling, testing, and design purposes. In general, tests on samples of mixed or stratified
material, such as varved clay, should be avoided; usually such results are not indicative of material
characteristics; and better data for analysis can be obtained by testing the different materials
separately. Undisturbed samples for structural properties tests must be treated with care to avoid
disturbance; an "undisturbed" sample found to be disturbed before testing normally should not be
tested. Fine-grained cohesive samples naturally moist in the ground should not be allowed to dry
before testing, as irreversible changes can occur; organic soils are particularly sensitive. Soils with
chemical salts in the pore water may change if water is added, diluting the salt concentration, or if
water is removed, concentrating or precipitating the salt. Organic soils require long-term low
temperature (60deg.C) drying to avoid severe oxidation (burning) of the organic material.
Tables in Appendix A provide with representative sample sizes.
3.2.2.6 Soil Classification

ASTM D2487 - 11 standard should be used to classify soils from any geographic location into categories
representing the results of prescribed laboratory tests to determine the particle-size characteristics,
the liquid limit, and the plasticity index.
3.2.2.7 Expansive Soil

In areas likely to have expansive soil, the building official shall require soil tests to determine where
such soils do exist. These tests are to be performed based on ASTM 4289. Soil is to be considered as
expansive if the expansive index is greater than 20. In all cases this is to be confirmed by the
Contractor’s geotechnical sub-Contractor. Controlling and Monitoring
A number of checks and additional tests should be made during the construction and execution of the
project, when relevant, in order to check that the ground conditions agree with those determined in
the design investigations and that the properties of the delivered construction materials and the
construction works correspond to those assumed or specified.
Page 34 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
The following control measures should be applied:
• Check of ground profile when excavating;
• Inspection of the bottom of the excavation;

• Groundwater monitoring.
Groundwater is one element that affects the stability and foundation analyses. The groundwater level
should be measured 24 hours after completion of the borehole.
Significant fluctuations in the location of ground water table should be anticipated throughout the
year, depending upon the amount of precipitation, evaporation, tidal variation and surface runoff. The
following monitoring program should take place:
1. 24 hours after completion of boreholes;

2. Weekly water monitoring plan which will continue two months after completion of boreholes;
3. If variations are insignificant (≤20 cm) then a monthly monitoring could be applied, otherwise
the weekly cadence is preferable.
3.2.2.8 On-site Responsibilities and Risks
1. Right of Entry. Unless otherwise agreed, Client should furnish right-of-entry and obtain
permits as required to perform the fieldwork at no cost to CONTRACTOR;
2. Site management; drilling rigs positioning and access, storage of drilling accessories, provide
all water supplies that may be needed for drilling operations and management of the water
that would be produced as part of the drilling operation which may require creating of
channels to drain the water from the drilling site and preparing temporary storage for it. This
water is anticipated to be encountered only during drilling within the shallow aquifer system;
3. Damage to Property. CONTRACTOR should take reasonable precautions to minimize damage
to land, equipment and other property contained therein caused by operations, and have to
repair such damage;
4. Toxic and Hazardous Materials. Client should provide CONTRACTOR with all information
within his possession or knowledge as to the potential occurrence of toxic or hazardous
materials at the site being investigated. If unanticipated toxic or hazardous materials are
encountered, Contractor reserve the right to demobilize their field operations. Remobilization
should proceed following consultation with our safety coordinator and Client’s acceptance of
proposed safety measures and fee adjustments.
5. Utilities and Pipelines. While performing fieldwork, CONTRACTOR should take reasonable
precautions to avoid damage to subterranean and sub-aqueous structures, pipelines and
utilities.
3.2.2.9 QHSE
HSE, Quality Management, NOIs are covered under Section 4-General Design Requirements.
Investigation Methods.
3.2.2.10 Topographical Survey

Topographical surveys of sites should be carried out to enable preliminary geometric designs. This
forms an important part of the preliminary geotechnical evaluation of sites, since ground elevations
might be altered due to the cut and fill operations during construction (building, micro tunneling, and
trenches for pipes).
Page 35 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
3.2.2.11 Geophysical Investigation

Basics
Geophysical testing methods are non-destructive testing procedures which can provide general
information on the general subsurface profile, depth to bedrock and water table, bedrock engineering
properties (i.e. from seismic refraction), presence of karst features (i.e. from Electrical Resistivity
Tomography (ERT)), extent of peat deposits, or presence of voids and buried utilities.
These methods should be combined with the aim of providing both the vertical and horizontal
variations in the subsurface material to a maximum depth of 25 m to 30 m below ground surface to
highlight potential anomalous areas associated with open or partially filled cavities.
These testing methods may also be used to evaluate existing bridge decks, foundations, and
pavements, and should be used to confirm borehole drillings location.
Seismic refraction 240m and MASW (Multi Channel Analysis of Surface Waves)
General Settings
The acquisition to ensure a continuous seismic profile should be carried out using:
• MASW sections;
• Refraction from dedicated Refraction shots on dedicated 240 m spreads.

Seismic geophysical survey should cover the area of a building site (line spacing 100 m) or along the
whole proposed pipeline route.
For the 240 m spread, one cable, 48 geophones, 5 m between each geophone should be used, with
11 shots per spread, with 30 m between each shot.
For the seismic refraction and MASW, either a weight drop, 8000 Joules (for 240m spread) or the
sledge hammer should be used if there is enough energy. The choice between these two sources
would be confirmed after tests.
To ensure a good quality of data, geophones are required to be driven/stuck/buried into the ground.
The estimate production is 960 m/day for the 240 m spread.
Therefore the recommended layout is depicted in the following Figure 3.2.
Page 36 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
Figure 3.2 – Acquisition geometry (seismic refraction 240m and MASW)
The listing in the following Table 3.9 provides specifications for the refraction and MASW acquisitions.
Table 3.9 – Specifications for the refraction and MASW.
240m spread – 30m depth

Active channels 48
Trace spacing 5m
Offset shot 30 m on each side
Shot spacing 15 or 30 m, according to tests
Nb of sot per base 11
Max. theoretical depth investigation 48 – 60 m
Recording length 2 seconds
Sample rate 0.5ms (Nyquist = 1000Hz)
Geophones 48 x 4.5 Hz
Seismograph GEODE 2 x 24 traces
Source Weight drop / Sledge hammer
The minimum required crew should be:
• 1 engineer Geophysicist.
• 1 observers.
• 1 geophysicist junior.
• 4 workers.
Page 37 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
• 2 drivers.
• 1 surveyor.
• 2 QC.
QA/QC & Processing for seismic refraction and MASW
During acquisition, particular attention should be given on the coherence of the zero-time.
The QA/QC should be done on site processing every day.
The applied processing sequence for Refraction Seismic should be as follows:
• Convert field data;

• First arrivals picking;
• ABC Interpretation;
• Export to SeisImager file format;
• Tomographic inversion;
• Conversion to layered model.
For MASW processing, the sequence should be as follow:
• Definition of the geometry

• CMP (Common Mid-Point) computation
• Phase velocity/Frequency transformation
• Dispersion curve picking
• Inversion
• Model definition (number of layers, thicknesses,..)
Changes could be made to these processing sequences after consultation with the COMPANY
Representative.
Figure 3.3 – Refraction tomographic inversion and layered model.
Page 38 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
Deliverables
• Interpretative report;
• Refraction tomographic inversion and layered model;

• Depth of a specific horizon obtained from layered model inversion (Figure 3.3);
• Alignment chart, with all the geotechnical parameters calculated from MASW and seismic
refraction results;
• Shear wave velocity variations.
Electrical Resistivity Tomography (ERT)
General Settings
ERT is carried out to characterize the resistivity of the soil on the top 25 meters covering the area of a
building site (line spacing 100 m) or along the whole proposed pipeline route. It aims to detect water
table, the structural extension of the different geological layers and precisely identify the location and
extension of fractured zones in the near surface.
For the 475 m active lines, one cable, 96 active electrodes, 5 m between each electrode should be
used.
With this technique, the apparent electrical resistivity distribution of the subsurface is measured using
an array of four electrodes. By injecting a dc or very low frequency ac current (I) between a pair of
electrodes and measuring the resulting potential difference (ΔV) with a second pair of electrodes, it is
possible to calculate the apparent resistivity using a derivation of Ohms law (R=ΔV/I). This approach is
known as galvanic resistivity.
For the same geometry array, Wenner-Schlumberger and dipole-dipole procedures should be
performed to resolve, respectively, vertical and lateral changes. These are set out below:
Resistivity equations:
Wenner Method: Schlumberger method
ρE = measured apparent soil resistivity (Ωm) ρE = measured apparent soil resistance (Ωm)
a = electrode spacing (m) a = electrode spacing (between voltage
b = depth of the electrodes (m) probes) (m)
RW = Wenner resistance b = depth of the electrodes (m)
c = electrode spacing (between voltage and
current probes) (m)
RS = Schlumberger resistance
A roll-along should be done to ensure lateral coherence on the same line. A half line (48 electrodes)
overlap should be done.
Due to this double acquisition procedure, an estimated production of 1000 m/day per team should be
applicable.
Page 39 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
The typical initial acquisition design should be as follows:
• Electrode spacing: 5 meters
• Active electrodes: 96
• Total active line: 475 meters
• Levels of acquisition: 31
• Investigation Depth: 55 meters
• Quadripoles: 2018p
The minimum required crew should be:
• 1 engineer Geophysicist
• 4 observers
• 4 geophysicist junior
• 16 workers
• 3 drivers
• 1 surveyor
QA/QC & Processing for ERT
Before each measurement, a line check should be done to verify that each electrodes is connected
and has a good contact resistance. Electrodes with bad contact resistance, which often happens in
extremely dry soil, should be watered with salted water which has proved to be a remarkably
conductive medium.
During data treatment, points with noise or interference can be removed to improve quality.
While measuring, the instrument is able to do a noise monitoring with a pre-injection control
consisting of a DC digital voltmeter function. The standard deviation between measurements is also
display to give an indication of the noise level during the measurement.
The data should be processed with the Res2DInv software from Geotomo Software. This software
should be used for field QC processing to determine the quality of field data:
• Check for any artefacts in data acquisition;

• Determine if any instrument problem occurred;
• Remove any noise or interference;

• Inversion and final processing.
During final processing, the roughness filter can be adjusted to emphasize resistivity variations in the
vertical, horizontal or diagonal directions. It can also be optimized to produce models with smooth
boundaries (for e.g. Chemical plumes), or with sharp boundaries (for e.g. Fractured zones).
Models and calibration site results should be used to test interpretations and geometries, particularly:
• Depth of investigation limitations;
Page 40 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
• Resolution issues;
• Noise or interference problems;
• Geometric constraints.
Deliverables
• Interpretative report;
• Resistivity model as the below Figure 3.4.
Figure 3.4 – The resistivity model.
Resistivity Survey for corrosivity of soil along pipeline route
The Contractor should carry out a soil resistivity survey to determine the corrosivity of the soil along
the pipeline routes. Soil resistivity readings should be taken at approximately 500 m spacing along the
pipeline or at the position as instructed by the ENGINEER using the Wenner 4-Electrode method.
Readings should be taken at each test location in order to reflect the resistivity at a depth of 1, 2 and
3 times the pipe’s diameter. The resistivity of the soil at each depth should be recorded in ohm-cm.
Soil resistivity readings should be presented throughout the route in graphical form. The Contractor
should provide four sets of pipeline route plans marked up to show the variations in resistivity along
the pipeline routes within the following bands:
0-100 ohm-cm highly aggressive
1000-3000 ohm-cm aggressive
3000-10000 ohm-cm mildly aggressive
In excess of 10000 ohm-cm non-aggressive
If the soil is highly aggressive and/or moderately aggressive, an additional protection is required for
the pipeline.
Downhole Seismic Testing
The previous geophysical investigation should be calibrated using a drilled borehole in the area of
exploration for direct calibration. Data from core description and SPT should be used in addition to a
downhole seismic testing.
Downhole seismic testing measures vertical changes in seismic velocity by placing a source at the top
of a borehole and measuring travel-times at multiple intervals in the borehole, usually with a 3-
component geophone. Common applications include:
Page 41 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
• Bridge/dam foundation analysis;
• Insitu materials testing;
• Soil and rock mechanics;
• Earthquake engineering;
• Liquefaction analysis, and;

• Surface geophysics calibration.
It is important that the hole is cased and well-grouted to ensure good seismic coupling between the
geophone and the surrounding soil and rock. See the crosshole ASTM D4428 / D4428M - 14 for good
grouting procedure.
The results of a downhole seismic survey should include travel time plots and velocity graphs for both
p- and shear-waves.
For structures assigned to Seismic Design Category C, D, E or F in accordance with Section 1613, a
geotechnical investigation shall be conducted, and shall include an evaluation of all of the following
potential geologic and seismic hazards:
1. Slope instability.
2. Liquefaction.
3. Differential settlement.
4. Surface displacement due to faulting or lateral spreading.
For structures assigned to Seismic Design Category D, E or F in accordance with Section 1613, the
geotechnical investigation required by Section 1803.5.11, shall also include:
1. The determination of lateral pressures on foundation walls and retaining walls due to earthquake
motions.
2. The potential for liquefaction and soil strength loss evaluated for site peak ground accelerations,
magnitudes and source characteristics consistent with the design earthquake ground motions. Peak
ground acceleration shall be permitted to be determined based on a site‐specific study taking into
account soil amplification effects, as specified in Chapter21 of ASCE 7, or, in the absence of such a
study, peak ground accelerations shall be assumed equal to SDS/2.5, where SDS is determined in
accordance with Section 1613.5.4.
3. An assessment of potential consequences of liquefaction and soil strength loss, including estimation
of differential settlement, lateral movement, lateral loads on foundations, reduction in foundation
soil‐bearing capacity, increases in lateral pressures on retaining walls and flotation of buried
structures.
4. Discussion of mitigation measures such as, but not limited to, ground stabilization, selection of
appropriate foundation type and depths, selection of appropriate structural systems to accommodate
anticipated displacements and forces, or any combination of these measures and how they shall be
considered in the design of the structure.
Page 42 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
3.2.2.12 Trial Test Pits
Trial Test Pits (PT) should be excavated until they are minimum 1.5 m x 1.5 m in base plan, to confirm
findings of the desk study, in terms of geotechnical properties and average soil profile.
The trial pit should terminate at either a maximum depth of 3 m or refusal; on encountering rockhead,
or on encountering groundwater and at whichever is encountered first. In case of groundwater, the
trial pit should be immediately backfilled to a level above the water table, before the pit floods),
All excavations deeper than 1.2 m should be carried out by personnel trained in confined space entry
and pit sides should be sloped or shored to ensure stability.
Trial Pits are to be excavated by hand or with a wheeled backhoe excavator capable of digging down
to at least 3 m below ground level. A toothless bucket should be used for the first 1.5 m to protect
services and utilities unless hand excavation is specified. The pit should be advanced in layers and a
suitably experienced geologist or technician supervise the excavation and produce a field log in
accordance with "Geological Society Engineering Group Working Party Report on The Logging of Rock
Cores for Engineering Purposes" &"Code of Practice for Site Investigation: BS 5930" and ASTM D5434.
The geotechnical logs (detailed stratigraphy) of trial pits together with photographs are to be attached
to the report
Bulk samples are to be recovered from trial pits for geotechnical laboratory testing, i.e. one (1) sample
per soil type should be taken for laboratory tests (see below) and one (1) sample of water if
encountered.
The trial pits are to be kept as small as practicably possible. Sidewalls should be shored if necessary to
protect adjacent structures and foundations, and to ensure pit stability.
All trial pits should be then backfilled with adequate compaction with layer thickness 300 mm using
backhoe bucket immediately after completion of investigation.
Since groundwater affects many elements of the foundation design and construction, groundwater
observations should be presented on the trial test pit logs.
3.2.2.13 Soakage testing or percolation testing in Trial Test Pits (TP) or at defined locations
One (1) permeability test per trial pit is required on sites where it is intended to use a soakaway.
The test determines the rate at which the ground absorbs a known volume of water. The test ensures
that the ground is suitable for a soakaway and that the soakaway is designed properly. Typically,
soakaways are used to collect surface runoff prior to being discharged into the surrounding soil. They
are usually used in areas where the surface run-off cannot be disposed into existing sewers or
watercourses. There are a number of permeability tests for measuring the rate of flow and
determining whether soakaways may work effectively at a site. These range from small to large scale.
Small-scale soakage tests are only applicable to draining relatively small areas. We recommend
applying a large-scale test as per follows:
• BRE Digest 365: 1991; Falling Head Test in Trial Pits (Large-scale)
The results of this test can be also used for the design of any projected dewatering system.
3.2.2.14 Boreholes Drilling and Coring

Geotechnical boreholes should be completed utilizing multipurpose rotary core drilling rig with cable
percussion drilling ability. Cable percussion drilling through overburden should be undertaken at 150
mm diameter; continuous rotary core drilling using double or triple tube core barrels with diamond /
Page 43 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
tungsten drill bits and water flush would be undertaken in rock at minimum 122 mm to recover cores
of 76 mm minimum nominal diameter, to the required depths.
102 mm diameter undisturbed samples are to be obtained in cohesive material utilizing thin-walled
samplers and split spoon samples are to be obtained in non-cohesive materials. Disturbed bulk
samples are to be also obtained within non-cohesive materials.
During drilling, drilling fluid losses incl. flushing water returns should be recorded, and as soon as
groundwater has been reached in the borehole, the groundwater level should be recorded
immediately; a water sample should be taken for measurement of field parameters (temperature, pH,
conductivity and dissolved oxygen). Furthermore groundwater levels are to be re-checked and
documented again when works are interrupted (e.g. casing is taken out or before refilling) and after
long breaks during work.
Increases or decreases in groundwater level, the timing and specific depths in relation to where or
how these variations occur are to be recorded as well as addition of water to the drilling. All records
related to groundwater should be integrated in the drilling logs provided to TRANSCO.
During coring, the following field observations should be carried out:
• Strength, colour, rock type, minor constituents, structure, state of weathering;

• Total Core Recovery (TCR)
• Solid core recovery (SCR)
• Rock Quality Designation (RQD)
• Geological Strength Index (GSI)
• Fracture index
• Fracture spacing and classification
All fieldworks and soil/rock description should be carried out in accordance with the relevant ASTM
D5434 and/or British Standards: BS 5930.
All recovered samples and cores should be logged and photographed by an experienced degree-
qualified geologist / engineer. Data presentation should be in the form of borehole logs, generated in
the GINT software format.
Core samples should be stored in core boxes to allow long-term and secured storage. Length of core
boxes should allow to store one and half meter of recovered core in one separate section. Labelling at
both ends and on the lid of the core boxes should have the following format and contain the following
information:
• Drilling Contractor
• Section / Location
• Investigation stage and date
• Drilling identification no.
• Core Box Nr.:
• Meter from …… to ……
Page 44 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
Core sample boxes from the field should be taken to the laboratory for testing on a daily basis. Rock
and core samples should be examined, described, classified, identified and coded by experienced
geotechnical engineers and the descriptions should be prepared according to BS 5930:1999 + A2 2010.
All actual core losses should be recorded and photographic documentation should be carried out.
The core boxes should be then accessible to be transported to a central storage facility of the Client
choice.
Service Inspection Pits
Inspection pits for services in advance of boreholes should be hand-excavated in the minimum
practicable dimensions up to a maximum depth of 1.2 m and in the pit floor a post hole should be
advanced, with a specialised split spoon spade (“post hole digger”), to 1.5 m below ground level.
If a utility is encountered, its depth and orientation should be noted and the location should be moved
to an adjacent position with the Client’s approval. Bulk samples should be recovered from inspection
pits for geotechnical laboratory testing.
Borehole Abandonment
After coring, the boreholes not to be used as groundwater monitoring stations (i.e. installation of
piezometers) should be properly abandoned by backfilling following industry standards for well
abandonment methods. Boreholes should be filled and plugged in a way that no voids remain, no
settlement of the surface can happen, no open connection exists between ground surface-natural
groundwater table and no damages on third party property can occur. Appropriate filling material
with an expanding and sealing character (e.g. bentonite-cement mix or special clay pellets) should be
used. After filling previously broken up surface, pavement etc. should be restored to its original state.
Well Completion – Piezometer Installation
Monitoring wells should also be installed. Some of the drilled wells should be completed with one
standpipe piezometer. The standpipe tube should have a maximum length that is the same as the
depth of the borehole itself. The number of piezometers to be installed should be specific to the
project and borehole accessibility.
A minimum of one (1) piezometer is required by site, and a minimum of one (1) every 2000 m along a
pipeline route.
The standpipe piezometers should comprise of 50mm ID (2”) PVC threaded pipe with plain and slotted
sections.
Generally, the slotted section should be based on the lithology penetrated or groundwater depth, but
should be at least 3 meters in length, surrounded by fine gravel to about 1.0m above and below the
slotted section. The slotted section of the PVC pipe should be protected by a 0.02mm diameter geo-
textile socks to prevent slots clogging. Detailed installation information as per the attached Piezo
sketch below.
The top of each standpipe should either protrude approximately 600mm above the surrounding
ground level and should be encased in concrete, fitted with a threaded screw top for protection and
ease of access, OR it should be cut slightly below ground level and fitted with a flush lockable cover,
based on Contractor request. Should the Contractor require no protection, the piezometer should
Page 45 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
protrude from the GL to approximately 300mm above, whereby it should be fitted with a screw cap
only, creating a simple groundwater monitoring station.
3.2.2.15 Permeability Tests in Soil Borings

A minimum of one permeability test (referred to as PT) should be performed.
The permeability test procedure is as follows:
• The 4‐inch inner diameter casing should be driven to the required test depth (refer to soil
boring procedure for allowable equipment). The space (annulus) between the casing and
borehole must be kept at a minimum. If the casing cannot be driven and a larger hole is first
bored to allow for the casing, the annulus must be properly sealed before any water is
introduced for testing into the casing;
• Measure the depth to the bottom of the hole to the nearest inch;
• Ensure that the depth to the bottom of the hole is within 1 inch of the depth to the bottom of
the casing;
• Place approximately 6 ‐ 8 inches of coarse sand (4.75mm – 2mm) at the bottom of the casing;
• Wash out casing using a continuous flow of clean water at low water pressure (the water
should not disturb the coarse sand layer at the bottom of the casing) until the water exiting
the casing runs clear;
• Saturate the soil beneath the bottom of the casing for at least thirty (30) minutes using clean
water;
• Fill casing to the top with clean water and record the temperature of the water;
• Record the time at the beginning of the test;
• Record the falling water level in the casing at 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, and 15 minutes after the
beginning of the test or until the water level in the casing has stopped falling.
• At the conclusion of the test, fill the casing to the top with clean water and maintain the water
at this level for five (5) minutes.
• Repeat the test once for each PT depth using the same procedure.
Clean water must be used to conduct PTs; PTs conducted using “dirty water” creates faulty results and
should be rejected.
If a soil boring was conducted within 20 ft of a planned PT location, the borehole from the soil boring
must be completely backfilled before the PT is commenced.
The Contractor should maintain continuous data of PTs and report them accurately in Permeability
Test Logs (PT Logs).
3.2.2.16 Packer Tests in Rock Borings

A minimum of one packer test should be performed.
Packer tests consist of isolating specific sections (usually 10 ft) of a bedrock borehole with inflatable
packers (bladders) so that water-quality samples can be collected and aquifer tests can be conducted.
A series of such tests allows definition of the vertical distribution of water quality (usually
contaminants) and hydraulic conductivity (pathways for water and contaminant movement) in an
aquifer. Monitoring water levels in nearby wells while pumping packed intervals can identify
Page 46 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
permeable intervals within the aquifer. Information from the packer tests should be used to properly
site the future location of monitoring wells.
Smaller packers designed to fit a submersible sampling pump can be used isolate the lower part of a
monitoring well. Isolation by the packer allows reduced water volumes to be purged prior to sampling.
This reduction can be beneficial because it can reduce purge times and may limit the handling and
disposal of contaminated water.
Methodology
• Develop entire length of borehole to ensure test intervals don’t contain water and fines from
drilling;
• Decontaminate packer equipment before use;
• Lower to test zone and inflate packer(s);

• Monitor pressures and water levels to ensure equilibration of pressures in test intervals and
leakage between intervals;
• Purge at 1-2 gal/min; Remove 3 well volumes and monitor field parameter stability;
• Pump at 0.25-0.5 gal/min to limit uptake of fine sediment, aeration, volatilization;
• Place pump intake above the level that would allow dewatering of the test interval;
• Monitor pump rate and water level.
Monitoring water level is very important as it may affect analytic chemistry and packer position if
drawdown is too great during purging and sampling
3.2.2.17 In-Situ Tests

Introduction
The objectives of any subsurface investigation are to determine the following:
• Nature and sequence of the subsurface strata (geologic regime);

• Groundwater conditions (hydrologic regime);
• Physical and mechanical properties of the subsurface strata.
The above requirements are a function of the proposed project and the associated risks. An ideal
investigation program should include a mix of field and laboratory tests depending on the risk of the
project.
Table 3.10 presents a partial list of the major in-situ tests and their perceived applicability for use in
different ground conditions.
Page 47 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
Table 3.10 – Applicability and usefulness of in-situ tests (Lunne, Robertson & Powell, 1997, updated by Robertson, 2012).
The following in-situ tests are deemed mandatory:
Standard-Penetration-Test (SPT)
In each soil boring location, a Standard Penetration Test (SPT) should be conducted continuously in
accordance with ASTM D1586 (i.e. a 24‐inch long, 2‐inch outside diameter split‐barrel sampler driven
by blows from a 140‐pound hammer falling freely from a height of 30 inches) up to refusal (i.e.
bedrock).
The number of blows required to drive the 24‐inch split‐barrel sampler every 6‐inch increment should
be recorded. The Standard Penetration Resistance (N‐value) should be determined as the sum of the
blows required to drive the sampler to the second and third 6‐inch increments. Before testing, the
borehole should be cleared of sludge. Results should be recorded and incorporated in drilling logs.
Static Cone Penetration Tests (CPT)
Cone Penetration Tests (CPT) should be conducted continuously in accordance with ASTM D3441 –
16. The spacing of CPT should be such as to give a true picture of the underlying soil, with regard to
any major changes in thickness, depth or properties of the strata over the base area of the structure
and in its immediate vicinity. Only a preliminary estimate of spacing is made first. This may be
decreased or increased depending upon the information revealed by borings, i.e. post drilling CPT to
confirm horizontal changes. The depth of CPT should be the depth of refusal.
The following specifications are laid down in this regard:
1. For a compact building site covering an area of about 0.4 hectare (i.e. 4000 m2), one CPT in
each corner and one in the center (i.e. five (5) CPT in all) should be adequate;
2. For smaller areas and less important buildings even one (1) CPT in the center should be
sufficient;
3. For very large areas covering industrial and residential colonies CPT may be performed at
every 100 meters in very uniform soils by dividing the area in a grid pattern, and every 100
m for average soil;
Page 48 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
4. Along pipeline routes, one (1) CPT every 500 m should be adequate in uniform soil, and
every 200 m in average soil.
For preliminary estimate, the spacing may be adopted as presented in the following Table 3.11:
Table 3.11– Number of CPT

route
Compact building site (4000 5 CPT 5 CPT

m2)
Small area 1 CPT 1 CPT
Standard Test Method for Field Vane Shear Test in Saturated Fine-Grained Soils.
Field Vane Shear Test (FVST) should be conducted continuously in accordance with ASTM D2573 /
D2573M – 15. This test method provides an indication of in-situ undrained shear strength of saturated
fine-grained soils (clays and silts) or other saturated fine-grained geomaterials, such as mine tailings
and organic muck. The test is applicable to soils with undrained strengths of less than 200 kPa [2 tsf].
Very sensitive soils can be remoulded during vane insertion. This method should be checked or
compared with other methods of measuring undrained shear strength, such as Cone Penetrometer
Tests (Test Method D5778) and Unconsolidated Undrained Triaxial Compression (D2850) tests.
The quantity and spacing may be adopted as presented in the following Table 3.12.
Table 3.12 – Number and Depth of Field Vane Shear Test

route
Compact building site (4000 1 FVST 2 FVST
m2)
Small area 1 FVST 2 FVST
Page 49 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
Pre-bored Pressuremeter Testing
In-situ testing of soils and rocks for strength and stiffness parameters should be carried out through
Pre-bored Pressuremeter Testing (PMT) following ASTM D4719-07 standards.
This test method covers pressuremeter testing of soils. A pressuremeter test is an in situ stress-strain
test performed on the wall of a borehole using a cylindrical probe that is expanded radially. To obtain
viable test results, disturbance to the borehole wall must be minimized.
The procedure for drilling the borehole, inserting the probe, and conducting pressuremeter tests in
both granular and cohesive soils should follow ASTM D4719-07 standards.
Note that the knowledge of the type of soil in which each pressuremeter test is to be made is necessary
for assessment of (1) the method of boring or probe placement, or both, (2) the interpretation of the
test data, and (3) the reasonableness of the test results.
The quantity and spacing may be adopted as presented in the following Table 3.13.
Table 3.13 – Number and Depth of Pre-bored Pressuremeter Testing

route
Compact building site (4000 m2) 5 PMT 5 PMT
Small area 1 PMT 1 PMT
Page 50 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
Dynamic Soil Parameter Estimation
The dynamic properties of soil are strain dependent, so their best estimates and ranges of variation
can be obtained only by carrying out various types of field and laboratory tests (see for Method for
Load Controlled Cyclic Triaxial Strength of Soil (ASTM D5311 / D5311M – 13 in the next section).
Therefore, low strain dynamic tests such as seismic cross hole survey or high strain dynamic tests such
as block resonance tests or cyclic plate load tests should be performed at the site.
The dynamic Soil parameters shall be addressed in the detailed geotechnical investigation report by
the Contractor which are:
• Cu = Soil Coefficient of Elastic Uniform Compression (KN/m³).

• Cr = Soil Coefficient of Elastic Uniform Shear (KN/m³).
• Cɸ = Soil Coefficient of Non‐Uniform Compression (KN/m³).
• Cs = Soil Coefficient of Non‐Uniform Shear (KN/m³).
3.2.2.18 Off-Shore and Near-Shore Investigation

Generalities
Site investigations for offshore structures, nearshore structures and dredging works are necessary to
acquire data that should facilitate successful foundation design, site or route selection, choice of
foundation type, dimensioning, installation and operational integrity of the proposed structure.
Success depends on a well-prepared budget, good planning, and attention to quality and safety to
develop an acceptable risk profile.
The data required include site-specific information on:
• Seabed topography and morphology such as rock outcrops and boulders;

• Nature of the soils and rocks, their stratification and variability;
• Soil strength, deformation and consolidation characteristics;
• The influence of specific factors such as cyclic loading, rate of loading, soil sensitivity and
thixotropy;
• The possibility of scouring.
Information may also be required on regional influencing factors such as:
• Slope instability;
• Earthquake susceptibility;
• Presence of shallow gas or hydrates.
The type and quantity of data required should depend upon factors that include:
• Type of structure planned;

• Installation/construction methods proposed;
• Water depth;
• Existing site data;
Page 51 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
• Project phase, e.g. feasibility study or final design;
• Acceptable risk to people and the environment;
• Type of foundation loads.
The range of modern geotechnical and geophysical instruments available to surveyors and engineers
is extensive and their capabilities manifold. Only the briefest treatment of the more common systems
is given here and the reader is referred to the many excellent textbooks and other sources of
information available.
The following methods should be applied as minimum requirement:
• Marine wave survey (Tide measurement for the duration of survey);
• Bathymetry survey
• Sidescan Sonar Survey
• Seabed profiling using sub-bottom profiler;
• Marine Geotechnical drilling and sampling, using grab sample and in-situ tests;
• Onshore geotechnical Boreholes;
• Marine EIA Survey.
For advanced studies, the following additional geophysical methods should be required:
• High-resolution reflection systems – using sound (acoustic energy);

• Seismic refraction systems – using sound energy;
• Electrical resistivity systems – using electrical energy.
Marine Wave Survey
Acoustic doppler current profilers (ADCPs) in the vicinity of the survey area should be deployed. The
precise locations of the ADCPs should be determined upon project award, based on the specific
requirements of the Client and the recommendations of Contractor’s marine hydrodynamic
specialists.
ADCPs should be deployed for a total of 30 days so as to ensure that the full wave and tidal cycles are
recorded over the course of an entire monthly cycle. The use of Teledyne RD Instruments ADCP with
waves options (Workhorse Sentinel) is preferred. This high frequency ADCP offers a number of
advantages including its light weight, precision and low power consumption. The wave’s option
provides the ability to obtain directional wave arrays. Teledyne WHS are the industry standard for
met-ocean monitoring. The ADCP is mounted in a frame that is deployed by divers, the frame sits on
the seafloor so that it is constantly orientated upwards to the sea surface. The unit should be
configured based on the depth of water with the following parameters being recorded and stored
internally: Current speed, Current Direction, Water Temperature, Water Depth, Wave Height, Wave
Period and Wave Direction. The current output should be every 10 minutes whilst wave data should
be output every 60 minutes.
Page 52 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
This deployment configuration should be suitable for measuring non-directional wave data (e.g.
significant wave height, peak period) for wave periods of approximately 2.2 to 12 sec. Directional wave
data should be suitable for wave periods of approximately 3.5 to 12 sec. Data analysis of all collected
data should be performed according to the EIA requirements, i.e. time series of speed and direction,
wave height, period and direction.
Bathymetry Survey
Minimum requirement includes a multibeam bathymetric survey, which should allow for 100% seabed
cover. For high resolution the R2Sonic 2024 Multibeam Echo sounder (MBES) is preferred.
The instrument for the multibeam bathymetric acquisition should be coupled with an industry
standard motion, heading and positioning solution. The MBES system maintains an excellent bottom
detection solution with clean data delivery in hand with tightly coupled inertial navigation solution
taking control of the motion, heading and positioning. All devices are to be 1PPS time stamped using
the TTL pulse and ZDA time stamp to eliminate latency.
If benchmarks are available, and within RTK range, the survey should be run using a fixed RTK GPS
solution providing near centimetric resolution positioning solution (x, y, z). The base station should
ideally be installed over a known/established BM in a suitable location with line-of-sight coverage of
the entire survey area. Survey lines should be run at approximately 4.5 times water depth parallel to
the breakwaters, or seabed contours to achieve 100% seabed coverage.
The survey should be done as close to high water as possible at shallow areas to maximize coverage.
In areas close to the breakwaters the beams should be focused to one side to allow data to be
collected on slopes or into the shallows.
In the event that any section of the survey area is beyond RTK range, data should be reduced to the
survey datum using tidal records.
An MBES Patch Test (PT) calibration should be conducted to industry standard before the start of the
survey. This should allow for the correction in the alignment for the primary and secondary (if used)
antenna base line computations, and MBES sonar head alignment (PT – roll, pitch and yaw
misalignment).
In addition to the initial static position GPS bench mark (BM) check for the rovers prior to
commencement of survey works, a dynamic position check over a known feature should be performed
daily, prior to commencement of all hydrographic survey works. Sound velocity profiles (SVP) should
be applied to the survey acquisition software for correction of the MBES ray-path tracing though the
water column. At least two (2) SVP casts should be performed on site during each survey day.
QPS QINSy8 survey software should be used for data acquisition. The software is an internationally
recognized software widely utilized in the hydrographic survey industry and has all the necessary
checks and balances in place to provide online QA/QC (including TPU/TPE).
Any areas considered too shallow for multibeam survey (3-5 m) should be covered by single beam
bathymetry at a line spacing of 25 m line spacing.
Sidescan Sonar Survey
A Geoacoustics or similar sidescan sonar should be used to scan the seabed within the survey
corridors. The sonar should be towed from the stern of the vessel at a constant speed. Layback
calculations from the GPS positioning system should also logged. Several sweeps should be made to
Page 53 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
ensure full coverage of the survey corridor, with overlap of data on each successive run. Data should
be processed using Coda Geokit or similar.
Sub-bottom Profiling
An Applied Acoustics towed array boomer should be used to gather geophysical data. Lines should be
run at 20 m intervals parallel to the corridor centerline. The acoustic source should be towed astern
of the vessel along with the hydrophone streamer. Data should be logged and processed using Coda
Geokit software or similar. Positioning should be supplied by Trimble DSM 232 single frequency dGPS
utilizing a free-to-air correction signal transmitted by MENAS.
Marine Geotechnical Techniques
Geotechnical investigations can be done in either seabed mode (where the sampler or in-situ testing
tool is deployed directly from the seabed) or in drilling mode (where the tool is deployed from the
bottom of a borehole). In seabed mode, penetration depths are normally limited between 20 m and
60 m, depending on type of soil and capacity of rig. In drilling mode, great depths are achievable.
Drilling is normally done from vessels or platforms in which case all penetration depths of geotechnical
interest can be investigated.
The following geotechnical investigation should be understood as minimum requirement and

following ASTM Standards (STP923: Sampling and In-Situ Geotechnical Investigations Offshore):
• Mobilizing and demobilizing marine self-elevating platform (SEP) that can operate in water
depth up to 8 m or boring vessel that can operate with unlimited water depth;(ref. Table 3.14
is presenting recommended drilling systems):
• Drilling one (1) marine near shore borehole every 1000 m up to 10 m below seabed level along
the pipeline route, including SPT/sampling in soil and continuous coring rock;
• in-situ testing methods include (piezo) cone penetration tests ((P)CPT) with pore pressure
measurements;
• Field vane Tests, T-bar and ball probe tests in soft clays;
• Performing physical, mechanical and chemical laboratory testing of soil and/or rock;
• Factual reporting.
Table 3.14 – Water depth and penetration capabilities drilling, sampling and coring systems
Equipment Description Maximum Water Depth Penetration

(m)*
Drill mode borings from vessels Unlimited** Unlimited**
Rock corer (seabed unit) 200 m 2 m to 6 m
PROD TM seabed drilling/coring 20 m to 2,000 m 2 m to 100 m
Basic gravity corer Unlimited** 1 m to 8 m
Piston corer Unlimited** 3 m to 30 m
Vibrocorer 1000 m 3 m to 8 m
Box Corer Unlimited** 0.3 m to 0.5 m
Page 54 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
Seabed Push-in Sampler 250 m 1 m to 2 m
Grab Sampler (mechanical) Unlimited** 0.1 m to 0.5 m
Grab Sampler (hydraulic) 200 m 0.3 m to 0.5 m

* These figures should be used for general guidance only.
** Water depth is limited by the deployment winch and handling capabilities.
Some coring and drilling equipment exists which operate from the seabed. These allow investigations
up to 100 m below seabed.
For undertaking of the marine geotechnical scope of work, a rotary drilling rig, mounted on a Jack-up
Amphibious Pontoon or similar should be mobilized to the survey site. The rig should be equipped
with all attachments and accessories necessary for drilling, sampling and testing.
All collected samples should be taken to the mobile lab on board the jack-up rig, where the following
should be performed:
• Disturbed samples should be taken one (1) for each type of soil;
• Rock core samples should be taken one (1) for each type of rock;
• Groundwater samples should be collected; and
• General soil characteristics descriptions should be made and noted onto a field sheet.
In soft to stiff clays, soil sampling should preferably be performed with piston samplers. When piston
samplers are impractical, thin walled push-samplers should be tried or, in dense sand, hammer
samplers may have to be used. In some cases, such as in boulder clays and cemented soils, rock coring
techniques may be necessary.
Once field work is complete, all samples should be securely transported to the analytical laboratory
along with full CoC documentation. If there is any concern that contamination has occurred, the
sample and container should be discarded and a fresh sample should be collected. Once at the
analytical laboratory, the borehole sample sets should be analyzed for the following parameters
following the ASTM Standards for soil/rock analyses and geological description, see also Laboratory
tests for borehole Section for the details about all methods:
• Natural moisture content;

• Bulk density test;
• Grain size distribution;
• Direct shear test;
• Consolidation test;
• Unconfined compressive strength test;
• Tri-axial test of undisturbed soil samples;
• Test on rock core samples from different depth strata for core recovery ratio, RQD and
unconfined compressive strength;
• Tests on rock samples for petrography; and
Page 55 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
• Chemical tests:
o pH;
o Hydrocarbon;
o Sulphate, Calcium, Sodium, Nitrate, Potassium and Chloride;
o Total dissolved solids; and
o Organic materials.
These tests are intended to be minimum requirements for marine geotechnical investigations,
additional tests should be added depending on project specifics.
Marine EIA Survey
Environmental baseline survey includes:
• Desktop study
• Water physico-chemical sampling;

• Zooplanckton analysis;
• Sediment physico-chemical analysis;

• Sediment in-situ analysis;
• Benthic fauna analysis;
• Drop down video survey
• Habitat map (assumes geophysical data is available).
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) includes:
• Hydrodynamic modelling;
• Air pollution modelling;

• Airborne sound modelling
A complete description of the relevant scope of work is given in Appendix D.
3.2.3 Laboratory Tests

3.2.3.1 Laboratory Tests for Soils and Water in Trial Test Pits (TP)
The following laboratory test should be carried out in accordance with BS 1377:1990 "Method of Test
for Soils for Civil Engineering Purposes" and related ASTM Standards in accordance with project
specification. One (1) test per soil type and per TP.
• Moisture Content; carried out by standard oven drying method in accordance with BS1377:
part 2: clause 3:1990;
• Atterberg Limits; carried out in accordance with standard procedures of BS 1377-Part 2-
o 1990. Cone penetrometer method adopted for determination of liquid limit in

accordance with BS1377: part 2: clause 4.3:1990. The plastic limit carried out by using
BS 1377: part 2: clause 5.3:1990;
Page 56 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
• Particle Size Distribution with Hydrometer Analysis; the wet sieving plus hydrometer method
used in accordance with BS 1377: part2: clause 9.2, 9.4 & 9.5: 1990. To obtain an accurate
determination of the particle size distribution of the smallest fractions, hydrometer tests
should be conducted on every sample with fines >5% and d10, d30, d50 and d60 should be
reported;
• Standard Chemical Tests of Soil and Water. These tests should include T, pH, dissolved oxygen,
Sulfate as SO 3 and as Chloride Cl- as per BS1377: part3: clause 5.5/9.5:1990 and 8:1990 and
Total Water Soluble Salts for soil tests as per BS1377:Part3 Clause 8:1990;
• Standard Test Method for Load Controlled Cyclic Triaxial Strength of Soil (ASTM D5311 /
D5311M – 13). Cyclic triaxial strength test is a commonly used technique for determining cyclic
soil strength. Results are used for evaluating the ability of a soil to resist the shear stresses
induced in a soil mass due to earthquake or other cyclic loading;
• Standard Test Methods for One-Dimensional Swell or Collapse of Soils ASTM D4546 - 14. This
standard covers two laboratory test methods for measuring the magnitude of one-dimensional
wetting-induced swell or collapse of unsaturated soils and one method for measuring load-
induced compression subsequent to wetting-induced deformation.
In the case where new carriageway construction are planned, the following tests should be carried
out to evaluate the mechanical strength of natural ground, subgrades and base courses beneath:
• Unsoaked and 4-day soaked California bearing ratio (CBR) on specimens compacted at three
(3) levels of compaction (15, 31 and 62 blows). The CBR (soaked & unsoaked) tests performed
in accordance to BS1377: part4: clause 7.2.4.2 using 4.5 kg rammer. The period of soaking was
4 days;
3.2.3.2 Laboratory Tests for Soils and Water in Boreholes (BH)

Laboratory tests should be performed on soils and rock to measure a wide variety of soil, core and
water properties. Some soil properties are intrinsic to the composition of the soil matrix and are not
affected by sample disturbance, while other properties depend on the structure of the soil as well as
its composition, and can only be effectively tested on relatively undisturbed samples.
The following laboratory test should be carried out in accordance with BS 1377:1990 "Method of Test
for Soils for Civil Engineering Purposes" in accordance with project specification, and with ASTM
standards.
One (1) test per soil/rock type and per BH.
• Moisture Content; carried out by standard oven drying method in accordance with BS1377:
part 2: clause 3:1990 or Based on ASTM D2216 – 10;
• Atterberg Limits; carried out in accordance with standard procedures of BS 1377-Part 2-
o 1990. Cone penetrometer method adopted for determination of liquid limit in

accordance with BS1377: part 2: clause 4.3:1990. The plastic limit carried out by using
BS 1377: part 2: clause 5.3:1990;
• Particle Size Distribution with Hydrometer Analysis; the wet sieving plus hydrometer method
used in accordance with BS 1377: part2: clause 9.2, 9.4 & 9.5: 1990.To obtain an accurate
determination of the particle size distribution of the smallest fractions, hydrometer tests
Page 57 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
should be conducted on every sample with fines >5% and d10, d30, d50 and d60 should be
reported;
• Cerchar Scratch Test and Determination of Cerchar Abrasivity Index; In order to choose the
excavation method and estimate the excavation rates and wear costs, Cerchar scratch tests
should be performed for different lithologies within structure range or on remarkable abrasive
sample (i.e. chert) in accordance with ASTM D7625 : 2010;
• Method A (ASTM D7012 – 14) - Triaxial Compressive Strength of Undrained Rock Core
Specimens Without Pore Pressure Measurements; Methods A determine the triaxial
compressive strength at different pressures and can be used to determine the angle of internal
friction, angle of shearing resistance and cohesion intercept;
• Method B (ASTM D7012 – 14) – Elastic Moduli of Undrained Rock Core Specimens in Triaxial
Compression without Pore Pressure Measurements; Methods B determine the triaxial
compressive strength at different pressures (as per method A) and can be used to determine
the angle of internal friction, angle of shearing resistance and cohesion intercept. In addition,
Methods B specify the apparatus, instrumentation, and procedures for determining the stress-
axial strain and the stress-lateral strain curves, as well as Young’s modulus and Poisson’s ratio
(as per following method D);
• Method C (ASTM D7012 – 14) – Unconfined Compressive Strength of Intact Rock Core
Specimens; Methods C (Unconfined Compressive Strength (UCS)) determines the unconfined,
uniaxial strength (as per following method D), and is one of the most basic parameters of rock
strength, and the most common determination performed for boreability predictions. It is
measured in accordance with the procedures given in ASTM D7012 – 14 and very important
assessment in mechanical excavation by tunnel boring;
• Method D (ASTM D7012 – 14) - Elastic Moduli of Intact Rock Core Specimens in Uniaxial
Compression; and Option A - Elevated Temperatures. Method D determine the unconfined,
uniaxial strength (as per Method C), and specifies the apparatus, instrumentation, and
procedures for determining the stress-axial strain and the stress-lateral strain curves, as well
as Young’s modulus and Poisson’s ratio (as per method B);
• Direct Shear Test of Soils under Consolidated Drained Conditions (ASTM D3080 / D3080M –
11); this test method covers the determination of the consolidated drained shear strength of a
soil material in direct shear. Generally, three or more specimens are tested, each under a
different normal load, to determine the effects upon shear resistance and displacement, and
strength properties such as Mohr strength envelopes.
• Standard Chemical Tests of Soil and Water; these tests should include T, pH, dissolved oxygen,
Sulfate as SO 3 and as Chloride Cl- as per BS1377: part3: clause 5.5/9.5:1990 and 8:1990 and
Total Water Soluble Salts for soil tests as per BS1377:Part3 Clause 8:1990;
• Packer testing in rock; should be performed in the rock unit mainly for dewatering design, at
the desired depth (i.e. depth of planed foundation or pipeline level). It is suggested that a
revised specification should be adopted (as described in Walthall, Packer testing in
geotechnical engineering, Geological Society, London, Engineering Geology Special
Publications 1990, v. 6, p. 345-350 doi: 10.1144/GSL.ENG.1990.006.01.38), other than that
given in BS 5930 and other standards, in order to improve the quality of the test and the
information obtained. In particular, it is suggested that, wherever possible, outflow testing
Page 58 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
should be used and, under normal conditions, a testing pressure not exceeding 25% of the
hydrostatic head, or 10 m head for deep wells, should be used for reliable measurements. Large
differential heads only should be used to investigate hydraulic fracturing and associated
problems;
• Standard Test Method for Load Controlled Cyclic Triaxial Strength of Soil (ASTM D5311 /
D5311M – 13). Cyclic triaxial strength test is a commonly used technique for determining cyclic
soil strength. Results are used for evaluating the ability of a soil to resist the shear stresses
induced in a soil mass due to earthquake or other cyclic loading;
• Standard Test Methods for One-Dimensional Swell or Collapse of Soils ASTM D4546 - 14. This
standard covers two laboratory test methods for measuring the magnitude of one-dimensional
wetting-induced swell or collapse of unsaturated soils and one method for measuring load-
induced compression subsequent to wetting-induced deformation.
Note: The Standard Test Method for Determination of the Point Load Strength Index of Rock and
Application to Rock Strength Classifications (ASTM D5731 – 08) can be required in some cases. This
test is only used to determine compressive strength of rock specimens. However, it should not be
considered as a priority test, since it is a time-consuming and expensive test that requires significant
specimen preparation, the results may not be available for a long time after the samples are collected,
and the test results should not be used for design or analytical purposes.
3.2.4 Required Geotechnical Engineering Analysis

The following parameters should be defined, but not limited to:
• Cohesion;
• Density;
• Friction Angle;
• UCS;
• Elastic Modulus;
• RQD (Rock Quality Designation).
In addition, the following foundation discussion and recommendations should be included, but not
limited to:
• Allowable bearing capacity and level of formation;

• Recommended foundation types and options;
• Bearing capacity and settlement sample calculation.

For particular sensitive cases such as embankment, cut slopes, structure foundation, bridges and
retaining structures, Tables in Appendix F should be used as guidance.
The work described herein should include review and correlation of various test results as to
embankment stability, material placement, and other geotechnical engineering considerations.
Sketches, assumptions, calculations, etc., (where applicable) of all final engineering analyses should
be included in the appendix of the report. The source of the analysis, the input and output data
(properly labeled) all should be provided if computerized analysis methods are utilized. The
Page 59 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
geotechnical engineer should also attend all field checks. Methods of analysis should be approved in
the proposed work plan.
3.2.4.1 Settlement Analysis

This work should consist of performing settlement analysis at a specific cross section based on
consolidation test results in fine grained soils or based on blow count and the soil gradation in granular
soils. The geotechnical engineer should furnish computations for total estimated settlement, a plot of
percent total estimated settlements vs. time assuming the most likely drainage conditions, etc. The
analysis can be for a proposed structure, or an existing structure as well.
3.2.4.2 Shallow Foundation

This item should include all analyses and computations required to make complete recommendations
for a satisfactory shallow foundation to support the proposed loading conditions at each section.
Shallow foundations are defined as spread footings, reinforced concrete mats, etc.
3.2.4.3 Deep Foundation

This item should include all analyses and computations required to make complete recommendations
for a satisfactory deep foundation to support the proposed loading conditions at each section. Deep
foundations are defined as piles, drilled-in piers, tie-back systems, etc.
Where deep foundations will be used, a geotechnical investigation shall be conducted and shall
include all of the following, unless sufficient data upon which to base the design and installation is
otherwise available:
1. Recommended deep foundation types and installed capacities.
2. Recommended center‐to‐center spacing of deep foundation elements.
3. Driving criteria.
4. Installation procedures.
5. Field inspection and reporting procedures (to include procedures for verification of the installed
bearing capacity where required).
6. Load test requirements.
7. Suitability of deep foundation materials for the intended environment.
8. Designation of bearing stratum or strata.
9. Reductions for group action, where necessary.
3.2.5 Specific Recommendation for Engineering Fill, Soil Replacement & Soil Improvement
Soil replacement is when existing poor quality soil is removed and fresh soil is backfilled and brought
up to grade. Soil improvement on the other hand, is alteration of existing soil properties in order to
improve its engineering characteristics.
Recommendations should be provided on engineering fill, soil replacement and soil improvement and
the following should be undertaken as a minimum:
The suitable engineering materials should be in accordance with the minimum required approved
specifications, degree of compaction, density and moisture content (ASTM D 1557).
Page 60 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
Earth filling under floors should be done in layers not more than 150 mm in thickness. The layer should
be compacted properly. Further, the earth used for filling should be free from grass, roots, leaves and
other foreign material. It should be also slightly moist which should help to achieve optimum
compaction.
Compaction should be undertaken by using a roller. As a rule of thumb to obtain the required
compaction effort, the following should be carried out as a minimum:
• The fill material must be homogeneous and isotropic; that is, the soil must be all of same
composition, and the engineering properties must be the same in all directions;
• Where several different types of fill material (all meeting the requirements of Section 2 of this
specification) are to be used, they should be deposited in such a way that all parts or particular
sections of the site receive roughly equal amounts of a given material, in roughly the same
sequence, thus ensuring a uniform distribution of fill types over the whole fill thickness.
• Cobbles, boulders, rock or waste fragments, the largest dimension of which is greater than
two-thirds of the compacted layer thickness (i.e. 150 mm), should not be incorporated into
the fill;
• All fill material should be placed in layers (or lifts) no greater than 150 mm thick;
• The following type is recommended as per Figure 6.1, specification are given in Table 3.15 5.
o 1.5 m of granular fill material.
o 1 m of special fill material.
Table 3.15 – Particle size distribution of fill material
Type of fill material Percentage by mass passing

Size BS test sieve
400 mm 200 mm 75 mm 20 mm 600 µm 63 µm
Fine fill material - - 100 - - -
General fill material - 100 75-100 - - -
Special fill material - - 100 - - 0-45
Granular fill material - - 100 - 0-5 -
Rock fill material - 100 20-75 0-50 - -

(Grade 200)
Rock fill material 100 20-75 10-30 0-25 - -
(Grade 400)
• As guideline, the largest size particle should not be greater than 1/3rd the height of the lift,
that is, 50mm. Each layer should be thoroughly compacted before the next layer is placed. A
minimum of 6 passes to achieve the required compaction effort is generally required by a
suitable machine. Table 3.36 below provides the recommended requirements:
Page 61 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
Table 3.36 – Compaction requirements
Type of compaction Category Maximum depth of Minimum no. of

plant compacted layer passes
(mm)
Smooth-wheel roller Force per
100 mm width
2.1 – 2.6 kN 125 10
2.61 – 5.2 kN 125 8
More than 5.2 kN 150 8
Grid-roller Force per
100 mm width
5.3 – 7.8 kN 125 12
More than 7.8 kN 150 12
Pneumatic-tyre roller Wheel load
2 – 2.5 tonnes 125 12
2.6 – 4 tonnes 125 10
4 – 6 tonnes 125 10
6 – 8 tonnes 150 8
8 – 12 tonnes 150 8
More than 12 tonnes 175 6
Vibratory roller Force per
100 mm width
0.71 – 1.25 kN 100 12
1.26 – 1.75 kN 125 8
1.76 – 2.3 kN 150 4
2.31 – 2.8 kN 175 4
2.81 – 3.5 kN 200 4
3.51 – 4.2 kN 225 4
4.21 – 4.9 kN 250 4
Vibratory-plate Static pressure under
compactor base plate (kN/m²)
13.8 – 17.2 100 6
17.3 – 20.7 150 6
More than 20.7 200 6
Vibro-tamper Mass (kg)
50 – 65 100 3
66 – 75 125 3
More than 75 150 3
Power rammer Mass (kg)
100 150 6
More than 500 275 12
• The compaction effort achieved should be on average 98% Standard Maximum Dry Density
(MDD) (non-structural fill), for any building constructed on the fill, the compaction should be
95% of ASTM d1587-modified compaction (structural fill). If the range of compaction effort
varies, then it can lead to differential settlements;
• The material should be placed with sufficient moisture to ensure proper compaction. The
moisture content should be in the range of around 11%. If the material is too dry, water
Page 62 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
should be added. If the material is too wet it should be spread and mixed. Compaction test
should have to be performed on the fill material
To determine if proper soil compaction is achieved for any specific construction application,
several methods are used. The most prominent by far is soil density.
Soil density testing accomplishes the following:
o Measures density of soil for comparing the degree of compaction vs specs
o Measures the effect of moisture on soil density vs specs
o Provides a moisture density curve identifying optimum moisture
Figure 3.5 – Moisture vs Soil Density Curve.
• Before each additional 150mm lift, the preceding lift should be scarified to ensure that the
two lifts are properly joined;
• Vehicles with crawler tracks are not suitable, as high compaction levels are not achieved.
Likewise, compaction using a scraper tyre should not be used as the required compaction
effort should not be achieved.
Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort
(56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)) ASTM D1557 - 12e1 should be used to test the degree of soil
compaction achieved.
The material to be used as Structural Fill shall be granular materials, suitable for use as construction
fill with the following mechanical and chemical properties:
• The material shall be free from organic matters or other deleterious substances.
• The material shall be well graded granular borrow pit mixture with structural quality.
• At least 85 % of material shall be smaller than 38.1 mm in size.
• The percentage passing from sieve size 0.425 mm shall be ranged between 10 % and 60%.
• The material passing sieve size 0.075 mm (# 200) shall be less than 15 %.
• Liquid limit (LL) shall be not more than 20 %
• Maximum Plasticity Index (PI) of 6 % (preferable to be Non‐Plastic).
Page 63 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
• The coefficient of curvature “Cc” regarded as the ratio of the square of 30‐percent‐finer than
size (D30) to the product of (D60) by (D10) shall be between 1 and 3.
• The coefficient of uniformity “Cu” regarded as the ratio of the 60‐percent‐finer than size
(D60) to the 10‐percent‐finer than size (D10) shall be greater than 4.
• Maximum Chloride content expressed as Cl shall not excess 0.05 %.
• Maximum Sulphate content expressed as SO3 in 2:1 water: soil extract shall not exceed 1
grams/liter in 2:1 soil water extract.
• Sulphate and Chloride contents shall be determined in accordance with BS 1377.
3.2.6 Specific Recommendation for Deep Structures, Piling, & Stone Columns
If deep foundation are most likely required, recommendations should be provided. Some of the
specifics are given in the following sections.
3.2.6.1 Stone Columns

Stone columns consists of driving a hollow steel pipe with the bottom closed with a collapsible plate
down to the required depth; filling it with stones. The size of the stones used for this purpose range
from about 6 to 40 mm. Stone columns have particular application in soft inorganic, cohesive soils and
are generally inserted on a volume displacement basis. Stone columns are placed 1 to 3 m apart over
the whole area. There is no theoretical procedure for predicting the combined improvement obtained,
so it is usual to assume the foundation loads are carried only by the several stone columns with no
contribution from the intermediate ground (Bowles, 1996). Bowles (1996) gives an approximate
formula for the allowable bearing capacity of stone columns as:
Figure 3.6 – Approximate formula for the allowable bearing capacity of stone columns (Bowles 1996).
Stone columns should extend through the sand layers of stratum 1 and 2 to the firmest stratum 3 to
control settlements. There is no end bearing in Eq. (21.11) (Figure 3.6) because the principal load
carrying mechanism is local perimeter shear. Settlement is usually the principal concern with stone
columns since bearing capacity is usually quite adequate (Bowles, 1996). There is no method currently
available to compute settlement on a theoretical basis.
3.2.6.2 Piled Foundation

Steel pipe piles foundation can also be applied. The pile design should be based on the unified method
of analysis (Fellenius, 1999) which considers pile capacity for dead and live loads, pile structural
strength for dead and drag loads, and pile settlement from pile loads and construction loads
(downdrag). To implement this analysis, the minimum pile lengths to meet the ultimate capacity
requirements have to be determined. Then, by considering dead loads and potential drag loads, the
Page 64 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
depth to the neutral plane should be estimated and compared to the estimated settlement profile to
consider pile settlement (downdrag).
3.2.6.3 Loading test

Once the piles are designed, at first a testing pile has to be drilled and tested with a static loading test
up to failure. Note that after the test, this pile should not be used in the final pile design. A full scale
pile load test for each diameter of pile adopted has to be undertaken.
3.2.7 Specific Recommendation for Rock Characteristics for Micro-Tunnelling

For NDM geotechnical site investigation including ground water level monitoring, should be carried
out as necessary and as minimum at the proposed pits/shafts locations and along the proposed
tunnelling route as necessary. Geophysical survey will be carried out on a 10 metres wide strip along
the proposed tunnelling route covering a depth range between ground level and up to 5 metres
below the invert of the proposed tunnel. The soil investigation shall be carried out by approved Third
Party Contractors specializing in this field of work, and shall be approved by ADWEA/ENGINEER. The
objective of this survey is to detect any cavities or broken or collapsed subsurface strata, so that any
such cavities or strata can be treated to allow tunnel construction. The geophysical survey technique
to be used is that of resistivity imaging, and shall be generally conducted as follows:
• Establish benchmarks and topographically survey and inspect routes for interference.
• Provide the preliminary resistivity section and preliminary interpretation result and undertake
drilling of boreholes required for the calibration of the resistivity results.
• Provide precise interpretation of resistivity anomalies, supplement interpretation with

physical evidences, drilling of boreholes, borehole logs and core photographs.
• Provide a survey report with the final interpreted sections, colour scale of sections should be
standardised.
One borehole will be established in accordance with BS 5930 and BS 1377 for each 50 survey stations
as included in the scope of geophysical survey in order to be used by the Contractor for calibration /
interpretation of the survey results. Each borehole shall incorporate SPT at 1m intervals, groundwater
level, rotary drilled coring of solid strata and photographs of cores. All basic data recording,
preliminary and final interpretation and borehole records shall be included in the NDM design report.
3.2.7.1 Determination of Rock Quality Designation Index (RQD)

RQD is a rough measure of the degree of jointing or fracture in a rock mass, measured as a percentage
of the drill core in lengths of 10 cm or more. RQD results should be recorded and incorporated in
drilling logs along with TCR and SCR.
3.2.7.2 Poisson’s Ratio

The Poisson’s ratio, is the ratio, when a sample object is stretched, of the contraction or transverse
strain (perpendicular to the applied load), to the extension or axial strain (in the direction of the
applied load).
3.2.7.3 Young’s Modulus

The Young’s modulus predicts how much a material sample extends under tension or shortens under
compression. Young modulus for soils can be estimated from laboratory or in-situ tests or based on
correlation with other soil properties. In laboratory, it can be determined from undisturbed specimens
using triaxial test. On field, it can be estimated from Standard penetration test, Cone penetration test,
or pressuremeter test.
Page 65 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
The determination of elastic parameters such as Young’s modulus and Poisson’s ratio are significant
to demarcate the damage zone around circular opening of tunnels or micro-tunneling, horizontal
directional drilling or other non-disruptive methods.
3.2.8 Seismic Site Class

Seismic site class based on AWWA 0100-11 should be defined. Classes in the following Table 3.17
should be considered.
Table 3.17 – Seismic site class definition.
Site Soil Profile Average Properties in Top 30 m

Class Name Shear Wave Velocity Standard Undrained Shear
Vs Penetration Strength, S u
(m/s) Resistance, N 60
A Hard Rock V s ˃ 1500 Not Applicable
B Rock 750 ˂ V s ˂ 1500 Not Applicable
C Very Dense Soil 360 ˂ V s ˂ 760 N 60 ˃ 50 S u ˃ 100 kPa

and Soft Rock
D Stiff Soil 180 ˂ V s ˂ 360 15 ≤ N 60 ≤ 50 50 ˂ S u ≤ 100 kPa
E Soft Soil V s ˂ 180 N 60 ˂ 15 S u ˂ 50 kPa
E Soft Soil Any profile with more than 3 m of soil with the following
characteristics:
• Plastic Index PI ˃20
• Moisture content w ≥ 40%, and
• Undrained shear strength su ˂ 25 kPa
F Others Site specific evaluation required
3.2.9 Reporting
3.2.9.1 General Requirements
All methodology, progress and results of the field investigations and laboratory analysis should be
documented and used to develop comprehensive factual reports.
Ultimately, a geotechnical interpretative report should be created based on data that were collected
in the course of the various site investigations campaign. The geotechnical interpretative report
should contain an assessment on the results of the field works, field and laboratory tests and include
recommendations.
The complete Geotechnical Report (in min. 3 copies), stamped and signed by a Professional Engineer,
must include the following as a minimum:
• Project Description
• Site Conditions (Topographic, Geological, Hydrogeological Setting)
• Geotechnical Surveys Description (scope of work)
• Geotechnical Investigation Results
Page 66 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
• Geotechnical Engineering Analysis
• Recommendation
• Summary and Conclusion
• Attachments (samples and templates in Appendix)
o Attachment A ‐ Boring Plan Map
o Attachment B ‐ Historical Boring Logs
o Attachment C ‐ Geotechnical Report Summary Table
o Attachment D ‐ Soil Boring Logs (with stratigraphy, SPT, UCS, Shear tests and water
levels, see Appendix C for a Borehole log sample)
o Attachment E ‐ Photographic core documentation
o Attachment F ‐ Geological profile and Long- and cross-sections along the pipeline
alignment
o Attachment G ‐ CPT Logs
o Attachment H ‐ Laboratory Test Results
o Attachment I ‐ Permeability Test Logs
3.2.9.2 Electronic Data Requirements

Electronic versions of the Geotechnical Report should be submitted in pdf format, along with the
following:
• Excel versions of Attachment C ‐ Geotechnical Report Summary Table

• Geospatial data of all GI practices and geotechnical investigation locations in shapefile format.
• Points representing all soil boring and PT locations should have the following attribute fields:
‘Contract_No’, ‘Phase_No’, ‘B_PT_ID’, and ‘Geo_Type’ (either ‘B’ or ‘PT’ to differentiate the
tests)
All pertinent data submitted in the Geotechnical Report must be transferred to the Project Tracking
Spreadsheet and submitted with the Geotechnical Report.
3.2.9.3 Geotechnical Profile

(1) The geotechnical profile should consist of the following:
(a) Sheet 1 — Title Sheet. This may be a reproducible of the title sheet used by the design
Consultant for the design plans, modified as necessary.
(b) Sheet 2 — Legend Sheet.
(c) Sheet 3 — Tabulation of Classification Test Data
Classification test data should be tabulated on a separate sheet of the geotechnical

profile. Such tabulation should include laboratory sample number, field sample
number, boring number, station, offset, depth of sample, colour, textural or grain-size
classification, ASTM classification and the test results obtained from mechanical
analysis, liquid limit, plastic limit, plasticity index, and shrinkage limits.
Page 67 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
(d) The geotechnical profile plan and profile sheets with the borings and data should be
plotted to a vertical scale of not more than 1" = 10', and to a horizontal scale of not more than
1" = 100'. Each sheet should be identified by control section, structure number, and project
and route number, and the scale to which it is drawn.
(e) Elevation of subsurface water levels recorded during the boring, at completion of boring,
and 24 hours later, should be indicated by suitable symbols. The use of colour as a symbol will
not be permitted.
(f) Additional sheets as required should be used to plot soil or rock cross sections, peat or
unstable soil profiles, rock profiles, etc.
(2) The geotechnical profile should be prepared in ink on linen, mylar, or other material with prior
approval, to provide permanent originals which will not deteriorate or fade with age.
3.2.10 Supervision
3.2.10.1 General
All phases of the geotechnical investigation, including boring and sampling, laboratory testing,
analyses, and preparation of the geotechnical report, should be under the direct supervision of a
qualified geotechnical engineer.
3.2.10.2 Scheduling
After the preliminary field check, as previously mentioned, the scope of work for the project should
be defined on a tentative basis. The Contractor geotechnical engineer will send in writing a work plan
for the completion of the field work and the date when the complete geotechnical report and profile
will be transmitted to TRANSCO foundation analysis engineer. This will be done immediately after the
preliminary boring location plan is approved. If it appears that the aforementioned schedule has to be
changed during the progress of work, the Contractor geotechnical engineer should send in writing the
revised schedule and a statement explaining the reasons for the schedule change.
3.2.10.3 Field Supervision

During the boring and sampling phase, the Contractor geotechnical engineer should organize the work
so that he/she can spend at least one day per week per rig (minimum) with the drilling crews. If more
than one drill crew is used, they should be operated in a way so that the Contractor field geotechnical
engineer can supervise them with a minimum of travel from one crew to another. Prior authorization
should be obtained regarding field supervision in excess of one day per week per rig.
3.2.10.4 Maintaining Cost Records

The Contractor geotechnical engineer should maintain records to reflect the total running work
accomplished for all items of work, including testing, as the work progresses. These records should be
up to date and available for inspection at all times. As the work progresses, it may be advantageous
for the Contractor geotechnical engineer to consult with the TRANSCO foundation analysis engineer
prior to executing certain laboratory tests and/or engineering analyses. The Contractor geotechnical
engineer may decide to proceed with the work using reasonable engineering judgment without
consulting with the TRANSCO foundation analysis engineer, as long as the actual quantities used do
not exceed the estimated agreement quantities. If at any time, it appears that an overrun will be
necessary, the Contractor geotechnical engineer should obtain approval prior to performing work
which will be in excess of the estimated amounts.
Page 68 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
3.3 Environmental Studies

3.3.1 Environmental Permits and Studies
Federal Environmental Law 24/1999 requires that all projects or establishments in UAE shall obtain a
license (i.e. No Objection Certificate (NOC) or permit) prior to starting an activity. To receive such NOC
for TRANSCO projects, TRANSCO must assess the environmental impacts of its proposed activities
pertaining to construction and operation of new infrastructure in Abu Dhabi.
As a first step for obtaining the NOC from EAD, an environmental permit application shall be
completed by the design Consultant for the proposed project and submitted to EAD (Refer Technical
Guidelines for Permit Application on www.ead.ae). The environmental permit application should be
submitted during the preliminary design phase of the project to ensure that alternatives can be
considered and that all the required environmental studies can be completed and approved in a timely
manner without affecting the project schedule.
If an environmental study is requested then EAD requires that the study be carried out by an EAD-
approved and registered Consultant operating within Abu Dhabi Emirate and be independent of the
design Consultant. The EAD approved environmental Consultant shall prepare the environmental
studies (either PER, EIA or SEA) as per EAD technical guidelines prescribed for the specific
environmental study.
The permitting of infrastructure projects shall also comply with the requirements of Abu Dhabi
Occupational Safety and Health System Framework (OSHAD-SF).
3.3.2 Environmental Requirements in the Tender Documents (The Construction

Environmental Management Plan)
Prior to receiving approval of any required environmental assessments and before any construction
activities begin, the Contractor on behalf of TRANSCO may be required to submit a Construction
Environmental Management Plan (CEMP) to EAD so that it can issue an NOC for construction.
Accordingly the design Consultant needs to include in the tender document the following
requirements for the Contractor.
The Contractor is to appoint an EAD-approved and registered Consultant to prepare the CEMP. The
CEMP shall be prepared in accordance with EAD’s Technical Guidance Document for CEMP and should
be referenced in Tender Documents.
If an operating permit is required by EAD, then Operation Environmental Management Plan (OEMP)
shall be prepared by an EAD-approved and registered Consultant appointed by the Contractor. For
many infrastructure projects, an OEMP may not be required. If required, the OEMP shall be prepared
in accordance with EAD’s Technical Guidance Document for OEMP.
If a project requires plans to decommissioning of any infrastructure project (or a portion of a project),
the Contractor should submit an environmental permit application to notify EAD of the planned
activities. EAD will likely request a Decommissioning Environmental Management Plan (DEMP).
Additional guidance about the DEMP’s contents can be found in EAD’s document, Technical Guidance
Document for DEMP. All waste generated from decommissioning activities shall be disposed as per
Centre for Waste Management, Abu Dhabi (CWM-AD) requirements.
Page 69 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
3.3.3 Environmental Issues to be covered in the CEMP
The CEMP prepared by Contractors Environmental Consultant should cover management of
discharges from construction activities. Construction projects will generally include construction of
pipeline networks, pump stations and reservoirs. These activities during construction are expected to
generate large amounts of waste and wastewater. Construction activities are expected to generate
waste from dewatering, excavation, land clearing, vehicle and equipment maintenance, demolition,
concrete washout, general sanitary wastes, chemical wastes and other hazardous wastes, etc. The
Contractors Environmental Consultant prior to the commencement of construction phase shall
identify all sources of wastes expected from the construction activities and develop the CEMP and
corresponding environmental control plans including best management practices to avoid any
environmental impacts from construction activities. The CEMP shall also identify pollution prevention
measures to ensure pollutants are not discharged into the environment. As a minimum requirement,
EAD’s ‘BMP Technical Guidance Document for Discharges from Construction Activities’, April 2014
shall be complied by the Contractors.
Page 70 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
3.4 Pipe Wall Thickness Determination
3.4.1 Applicable Codes and Standards

The following codes and standards are applicable to this section on determining pipe wall thickness:
EN 545 -Ductile iron Pipes and Fittings
AWWA M41 –Ductile Iron Pipes and Fittings
AWWA M11 - Steel Water pipe – A guide to design and Installation
ASME 31.3 Process Piping
ASME 31.4 Pipeline Transportation Systems
AWWA M55 Polyethylene Pipeline Design and Installation
ISO 4427 –Polyethylene Pipes and Fittings for Water Supply
3.4.2 Pipe Wall thickness Calculations

For buried (and above ground) pipelines and the normal range of internal pressure, trench depth,
traffic loading etc. pipe loading tables are provided by pipe manufacturers. These can be used as a
guide to pipe wall thickness, particularly at preliminary design stage but need to be verified at final
design stage prior to tendering and at contract detailed design stage.
The requirements for determining pipe wall thickness in steel pipe are set out below.
3.4.2.1 Minimum Wall Thickness

Pipe wall thickness for carbon steel pipes shall be greater than Outside Diameter divided by 130.
3.4.2.2 Design for Internal Pressure

The calculation for determining carbon steel pipe wall thickness is given in ASME B31.4 for Line
Piping and ASME B31.3 for Station Piping.
Line Piping
Pipe thickness is determined by equation t=PD/2S
Where
t = pipe wall thickness in millimetres
P = Internal Design gauge pressure
D = Outside diameter of pipe
S = Allowable stress.
Allowable Stress is defined as 0.72 x E x Minimum Specified Yield Stress of Pipe
Where
0.72 = Design Factor
E = Weld joint factor (from 0.6 to 1) given in ASME B31.4 Table 402.4.3
Station Piping
Page 71 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
Pipe Thickness is determined from the equation
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
𝑡𝑡 =
2(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 + 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃)
Where:
S = Stress value for material from ASME B31.3 Table A1
E = Quality factor from ASME Table A-1B
W = Weld Joint Strength reduction factor as per para. 302.3.5e from ASME B31.3
Y = Coefficient from ASME B31.3 table 304.1.1 valid for t<D/6
For Ductile Iron Pipes the wall thickness is defined in EN545 by pressure class
For HDPE Pipes the wall thickness is defined in ISO 4427 by pressure class
3.4.2.3 Design for Buckling

Buckling analysis needs to be carried out for pipe empty conditions and should be checked against 2
conditions –internal vacuum and external load (trench or embankment condition plus traffic live load).
The allowable buckling pressure for carbon steel pipe is determined as per AWWA M11 Section 6 using
the following equation:
Where:
q a =Allowable Buckling Pressure (kPa)
FS = Factor of safety =2
R w =Water Buoyancy factor (1-.33 xh w /h)
h w is height of water surface above top of pipe
h is height of ground surface above pipe
B’ =Empirical coefficient of elastic support
E’ =Modulus of soil reaction(refer AWWA M11 Table 6-1 )
EI = pipe stiffness
D = diameterof pipe mm
For HDPE pipe design for buckling is determined from AWWA M55 Section 5, using the following
equations .
For constrained buckling (pipe supported by surrounding soil)
Page 72 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
For unconstrained buckling (vacuum conditions in pipe)
Page 73 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
3.4.2.4 Design for Deflection
Pipeline deflection for steel pipe due to earth loading and traffic loading is calculated as per the
method set out in AWWA M11 Chapter 6. The following equation sets out the calculation method
which is based on the interaction between the deformed pipe and surrounding soil.
Where:
= horizontal deflection of the pipe (mm)
D l = deflection lag factor (1 for pressure pipes)
K = Bedding Constant (0.1)
W =load per unit pipe length
R = Radius mm
EI =Pipe wall stiffness
E’ =Modulus of Reaction (kPa)
Deflection is to be limited to 3% of pipe diameter
Deflection methodology for ductile iron pipe is covered in both EN545 and AWWA M41. Acceptable
depths of cover are presented for the range of pipe diameter, pressure class and trench conditions.
Deflection methodology for HDPE Pipe is set out in AWWA M55 and the relevant equations given
below.
Page 74 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
3.5 Pipe Stress Analysis

This section discusses the requirements for Pipe Stress Analysis, including:
• Normal pipeline conditions (buried line piping) where detailed stress analysis may not be
required;
• Specific cases (station piping and non-buried pipelines on supports) where detailed stress
analysis has to be considered.
Much of the content of this section relates to carbon steel pipes and therefore reference should also
be made to ADWEA Standard Specification w-p-ss-002 and the following codes and standards.
Pipelines are classified as either station piping or line piping. Station Piping is defined as pipework
commencing at the pump station site upstream boundary and finishing at the point where the
discharge header exits the pump station site. Line piping is defined as the pipework extending from
the pump station discharge point to the downstream storage tank/reservoir or customer take off
point. This guideline section on pipe stress analysis applies to both line and station piping.
Engineering attributes such as HSE, Quality management, Meteorological and Ambient Conditions etc.
are discussed in Section 4 General Design requirements.
3.5.1 Applicable Codes and Standards

The following codes and standards are applicable to this section on pipe stress analysis:
EN 545 -Ductile iron Pipes and Fittings
AWWA M41 –Ductile Iron Pipes and Fittings
AWWA M11 - Steel Water pipe – A guide to design and Installation
ASME 31.3 Process Piping
ASME 31.4 Pipeline Transportation Systems
AWWA M55 Polyethylene Pipeline Design and Installation
ISO 4427 –Polyethylene Pipes and Fittings for Water Supply
3.5.2 Objective of the Stress Analysis

Stress analysis shall be carried out by the Contractor, which address the static and dynamic loading
resulting from the effects of gravity, temperature changes, internal and external pressures, changes
in fluid flow rate and seismic activity. Codes and standards establish the minimum requirements of
stress analysis in order:
To confirm that piping system stresses and section loads, e.g. at new flange connections are within
the limits allowed by the applicable codes and standards.
To confirm that piping deflections and slopes are within the limits allowed or prescribed by the
applicable codes and standards.
To provide for the piping reaction loads at each support to check the integrity of the structure and to
enable the design of supports, anchors, guides and line stops, etc.;
To confirm that piping loads at connection to existing lines comply with specification requirement.
Page 75 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
To ensure that nozzles loadings on the attached new equipment are within allowable limits specified
by manufacturers or recognized standards.
The stress analysis shall be carried out using a recognized pipe stress analysis software package, such
as CAESAR II, Auto Pipe or equivalent. A stress analysis need to be carried out for piping with
pressure restrained joints only, i.e. welded joints, flanged joints. The piping system should have
sufficient flexibility to prevent thermal expansion or contraction from causing:
(1) Failure of piping or supports from overstress or fatigue.
(2) Excessive forces and moments on connected equipment.
(3) Leakage at joints.
(4) Detrimental stresses or distortion in piping and valves or in connected equipment.
(5) Unintentional disengagement of piping from its supports.
The following shall be considered where applicable when analyzing stresses and external loads on
the piping systems.
(1) Loads on connected equipment, support points, anchors and guides.
(2) Line design conditions.
(3) Self‐weight including pipe content, imposed loads, etc.
(4) Hydrostatic test.
(5) Thermal changes.
(6) Frictional loads.
(7) Environmental conditions, wind and seismic as applicable.
(8) Vibration in the system.
(9) Differential settlements.
(10) Thrust loads / Spring force due to bellows.
(11) Pressure relief valves reaction forces.
(12) Water hammer or pressure surges.
(13) Solar radiation temperature in combination with an empty pipe (for aboveground piping only).
For support design, combinations of the above loading conditions as applicable shall be considered.
The design/routing of the piping system shall take into account different conditions expected during
operation such as dry‐out, start up, shut down, cold branch etc. When the routing of a piping system
does not inherently provide adequate flexibility, the needed flexibility must be provided by
additional bends, offsets or expansion joints.
The stress analysis model should include all pipes, valves, bends, tees, reducers, nozzles, couplings,
expansion joints and other fittings. This will require the Contractor to obtain the necessary
properties of fittings including basic geometry, wall thickness, end joint details, material properties
and details seam welds, mitres etc.
Page 76 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
3.5.3 Design Loads
Pipeline design should take into account the following loads where applicable with pipe wall thickness
based on the most severe combination of loads:
a) Internal Pressure
• Maximum working pressure
• Test pressure
• Surge pressure
• Vacuum condition
b) External Pressure
• Trench loading
• Earth Fill(embankment) loading
• Uniform collapse pressure (submerged pipe)
• Traffic Loading –AASHO HS20 Truck Loading
c) Friction Loading
The effect of friction shall be calculated based on the following:
• Coefficient of friction between soil and pipe TAN ɸ where ɸ is the soil angle of internal
friction.
• Coefficient of friction between Carbon Steel to Carbon Steel with using PTFE is 0.10
• Coefficient of friction between Carbon Steel to Carbon Steel is 0.30
d) Physical loading of Saddle and ring girder supports
e) Temperature Stress in restrained pipelines (refer also to Section 4.1 for meteorological
and Ambient Conditions)
• Min atmospheric temperature 1°C
• Min pipe design temperature 21°C
• Max design temperature in buried pipelines 45°C
• Max design temperature indoor pipes above ground 55°C
• Max design temperature outdoor pipes above ground 85°C
• Temperature for flexibility calculation shall be design temperature for in service/

operating condition.
• In case of empty pipe condition, solar radiation temperature shall be used as
temperature for flexibility calculation
f) Dead loads arising from the weight of pipes, valves, service fluid, insulation and any other
permanent loads.
Page 77 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
g) Seismic Effects
Seismic load shall be calculated as per Abu Dhabi International Building Code (ADIBC) and
the related ACI/AISC/ASCE/SDPS. The seismic zone for UAE shall be taken as per the
guidelines of the subject Code and the Contractor shall reconfirm with the concerned
Municipality based on their latest circular in respect of the above.
3.5.4 Formulation of Load Cases

3.5.4.1 Operating Load Cases:
For operating load cases the design temperature, design pressure and contents Specific weight at
design conditions should be used. Installation temperature shall be specified. Both maximum and
minimum design temperature case should be considered.
Therefore the temperature ranges between the installation temperature and both maximum and
minimum temperature will be considered.
3.5.4.2 Sustained Load Cases

Sustained load cases at design pressure shall be considered at ambient temperature. The pressure
test case is to be considered at ambient temperature but resulting stresses shall be assessed in
accordance with the occasional allowable stress.
3.5.4.3 Occasional Load Cases:

Occasional loads shall be superimposed on sustained conditions. The severity of loading in all four
horizontal directions as a minimum shall be assessed. Only the critical loading direction needs to be
recorded fully. Hydro test, Wind and seismic loading shall be considered as an occasional load case.
3.5.5 Acceptance Criteria

3.5.5.1 Stresses in the Pipework
Stresses in the pipe work shall not exceed the allowable limits as specified in the relevant codes and
by equipment manufacturers.
3.5.5.2 Loads on Existing Piping

Loads shall be evaluated with the manufacturer’s recommendation and applicable codes and
standards. Loads at connection to existing piping system done by others shall be equal to zero (0). If
proved, technically not achievable, then the Contractor shall ensure with adequate
analysis/calculation that there is no impact on the existing system.
3.5.6 Specific Design Cases

3.5.6.1 Buried Welded steel pipeline
Ordinarily a buried pipeline under operating conditions will not experience large changes in
temperature and thermal stresses will not be excessive. However during construction and prior to
completion of backfilling large changes in temperature may cause excessive expansion and
contraction of the pipe. These changes can be largely avoided by backfilling as construction
progresses. The construction method and welding procedure is described separately in the pipelines
section of this guideline. The actual stress induced in a restrained pipeline due to temperature change
is calculated by the following formula:
Page 78 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
Where:
=change in pipe stress

E = Modulus of Elasticity for Steel
=Coefficient of expansion of steel =11.7 x 10-6m/m/degree Celcius
=change in temperature.
The calculated stress level should be taken into account in construction methodology particularly
in relation to pipe buckling. Also forces induced by expansion and contraction should not be
allowed to reach valves and other appurtenances. These can be protected by either expansion
joints or by thrust restraint at valve box walls or separate thrust blocks.
3.5.6.2 Pipework Supported on Saddles

Saddle supports cause local stresses both longitudinally and circumferentially in unstiffened and
comparatively thin walled pipe at the edges of the saddles. The highest local stresses are
circumferential bending stress at the saddle tips. Stresses vary with load, the diameter to wall
thickness ratio and angle of saddle support. In practice the saddle angle normally varies from 90 to
120 degrees. The critical condition is normally circumferential saddle stress with pipe full but at zero
pressure. Longitudinally the pipe behaves as a beam and so total pipe stresses are calculated from
combination of longitudinal beam stress and circumferential saddle stress. The calculations are
determined by the formulae 7-1 to 7-4 in AWWA M11 Chapter 7 and briefly described below.
If a longitudinal stress 𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 exists near the saddle tips, such as a thermal stress or the beam bending
stress at that depth on the pipe. Then calculate the effective stress, 𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒 :
𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒 = (𝑆𝑆 2 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 + 𝑆𝑆 2 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 − 𝑆𝑆𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 )1/2

This stress (𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒 ) must not exceed the yield point.
The bending stress when the pipe is under pressure is calculated by multiplying 𝑆𝑆𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 by a reduction
factor (RF) calculated from
(𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡ℎ𝐴𝐴)
RF =
𝐴𝐴
Where:
A= 1.1(R/t) (𝑆𝑆ℎ /𝐸𝐸)1/2
𝑆𝑆ℎ = hoop stress (psi)
E= modulus of elasticity (psi) (30,000,000 for steel)
tanh denotes hyperbolic tangent
Page 79 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
If the pipe is under pressure and the ends are restrained, the Poisson’s ratio effect of the hoop stress
(0.30𝑆𝑆ℎ ) must be added to the beam flexure stress. The total longitudinal stress (𝑆𝑆𝑡𝑡 ) is calculated as
𝑆𝑆𝑡𝑡 = 𝑆𝑆𝑓𝑓 + 0.30𝑆𝑆ℎ
Longitudinal beam deflection is calculated by conventional beam deflection formulae. Foe a single
span the formula is:
Deflection (y) = (5/384) x WL3/EI.
For multiple spans of a continuous welded pipe the deflection should be calculated by conventional
structural analysis software.
Page 80 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
3.6 Power Supply

This guideline covers the initial assessment of available power supply to a pump station facility.
For installations where the power supply is at low voltage, the Consultant will follow ADDC/AADC
standard connection procedures
There are two scenarios to consider, a new greenfield site and an expansion of an existing site.
3.6.1 New Installation

During the concept phase the Consultant will have estimated the maximum demand for the site and
determined the optimum location of the main switchboard and location of the transformers and any
required HV switchgear.
The next step would be to determine the requirements of the distribution company (DISCO) for the
provision of power to the site.
The Consultant would initially write to the distribution company informing them of the project intent
and the estimated maximum power demand and would arrange a meeting with Transco, the
distribution company and the Consultant to discuss the following items.
• Confirm the location of the point of supply to the plant

• Confirm the voltage level that will be required
• Determine location of the distribution company sub station
• The existing capacity of the network, and the extent of any upgrade that would be required.
• Any constraints that could affect the supply of power.
• Any communication requirement
Following the meeting the Consultant shall request the distribution company to provide an initial
estimate for both cost and time frame to supply power to the site and to provide an indication of
any items with long delivery times.
3.6.2 Extension of an Existing Installation

Once the additional maximum demand has been estimated the Consultant needs to confirm whether
there is sufficient capacity on the existing plant infrastructure for the increased load.
In addition the Consultant needs to inform the distribution company what the expected increase in
demand is. This will be required even if the existing infrastructure has sufficient capacity as the
increased load could still affect the network capability and will assist the distribution company in in
their network planning.
If the power supply to the site needs to be increased a discussion with the distribution company will
be required and if necessary a meeting should be held to confirm any requirements for expansion of
the existing substation, additional cabling requirements and any other requirements. Following the
meeting an estimate as described above should be requested.
Page 81 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
4 General Design Requirements

4.1 Design Life Cycle
Designs for all components of TRANSCO assets shall take into consideration the full asset lifecycle from
commissioning to decommissioning, removal / replacement, and disposal. This consideration extends
to all technical, economic, socio-environmental, and health & safety aspects. The design working life
should be as per Table #2.1-Section 2.3 of Eurocode “0”- Ref EN - 1990:2002- Basis of Structural
Design, or as otherwise advised by TRANSCO Engineer on a particular project.Meteorological and
Ambient Conditions.
The weather conditions of the United Arab Emirates comprise of relatively mild (November to April)
and hot with relatively high humidity (May to October). For that, corrosion precautions need to be
highly considered. UAE has low annual precipitation; however, occurrence of sudden thunderstorms
of short durations is a potential and the Contractor needs to be prepared for such incidents. Moreover,
outdoor equipment need to be protected against dust and sand. For more about climatic condition,
refer to section W-G-SS-001 “Specification for General Technical Requirements” of ADWEA
specifications.
Meteorological and ambient conditions shall be identified as per the location of the project from the
concerned Authorities and subject to TRANSCO/Engineer approval, otherwise the standard conditions
contained in W-G-SS-001 will apply, including minimum ambient temperature of 10 C.
4.2 Demand Calculations

Generally, water transmission pipelines and facilities are designed in relation to the water
transmission capacity. Design flows through the TRANSCO system are a function of projected
demands. Demands are to be projected for a designated design horizon (typically 15 years), as dictated
by TRANSCO. Demand projections are to be developed based on the following general process:
1. Current demand projections for individual areas / developments / bulk consumers are to
be obtained from the Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Company (ADWEC);
2. ADWEC demands for developments and bulk consumers are to be independently verified
with developers and bulk consumers through official correspondence;
3. New projects and developments within the project coverage area are to be identified, and
demand projections collected from developers and bulk consumers through official
correspondence;
4. Any component of the projections that does not extend up to the design horizon is to be
analysed to determine if it is a build out projection. If not, projections are to be
extrapolated up to the design horizon.
4.3 Material Selection

Material selection is specific to individual components of the TRANSCO system. For each component,
materials permitted by the specification shall be compared based on a Techno-Economical
comparison and applicable to the intended use, taking into consideration the costs and performance
over the full asset lifecycle, including O&M costs, spare parts, and eventual replacement / disposal.
Design and choice of construction materials shall consider and ensure minimizing maintenance works,
and therefore, all elements shall be designed to result in a durable construction considering the
sustainable developments.
Page 82 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
4.4 Design Loads

Design Loads and factors of safety are specific to individual components of the TRANSCO system, in
accordance with these design guidelines and applicable codes and standards referenced. The
individual sections by discipline provide detail for the derivation of design loads of individual
components (i.e. structures, pipelines, etc.).
4.5 Drawing Requirements

All design drawings are to be produced in a Computer Aided Design (CAD) software package,
compatible with the latest version of AutoCAD by AutoDESK. Drawings are to be provided in the
following formats for every submission:
1. Colour A1 Hard Copies;

2. Colour, High & Normal Resolution A1 PDF Soft Copies;
3. AutoCAD *.dwg compatible with the latest version of AutoCAD by AutoDESK.
The number of hardcopies for each submission shall be dictated as per the project contract
documents. The Hard Copies and soft copies shall be matching. In the event of any discrepancy
between hard copy and soft copies, the Consultant / Contractor will be required to reconcile all three
versions and re-submit.
Drawing requirements are subject to the project stage, as summarized in the following Table 4.1.
Table 4.1 – Drawing Requirements for Various Project Phases.
Drawing Type Concept Design Preliminary Design Detailed Design / Shop Drawings / As-
Tender Drawings Built Drawings
General Layout
Sheet Plan
Network Plans
Network Profiles
Facility Layouts
Facility Profiles &

Sections
Standard Details To be decided
Particular Details To be decided
In addition to the above drawing requirements, the Consultant / Contractor will be required to submit
a cover page and drawing list for each individual drawing package submitted. In case of EPC Contractor
/ Consultant, the list of drawings will be project specific and decided by TRANSDCO. The drawing list
will be presented in the same title block as the drawings, and appropriately numbered. The cover page
and drawing lists will also be included in the soft copy submissions. The drawing list will be presented
in soft copy as both a spreadsheet file (MS Excel compatible) and a *.dwg file(s) (AutoCAD compatible).
Page 83 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
4.5.1 PDF Requirements
PDF soft copies shall be an exact reproduction of the hard copy prints, such that TRANSCO can
reproduce identical hardcopies by the PDF with no loss in quality. PDF prints will be electronic prints
(not scanned), in the correct A1 file page size. Each drawing shall be submitted with one (1) normal
resolution “For Viewing” copy, and one (1) high resolution “For Print” copy.
4.5.2 Drafting Requirements
AutoCAD drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the following minimum requirements, in
addition to requirements as stated in contract documents and the specifications:
1. Each sheet shall be submitted as an individual CAD (*.dwg) drawing file;
2. Drawing of all features in plan shall be to scale and geo-referenced;
3. Coordinates shall be presented in Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM), WGS 84

(ITRF2000.0) Zones 39N and / or 40N (depending on location of survey);
4. Elevations shall be presented in accordance with the Ras Ghumays height datum in meters;
5. All Title Blocks, External Reference files, and images (including logos), shall be provided with
the electronic submission with the correct file names as referenced;
6. All elements in the drawing shall be flattened (i.e. have no “Z” coordinate) such that all
drawings are 2-Dimensional;
7. Connecting elements shall be spatially “snapped” where joining in intended, and

overlapping or duplicate elements shall be corrected, even if these are not visible;
8. An “exploded” copy (complete independent file with no external referencing) of each sheet
shall be provided as an individual CAD (*.dwg) drawing file;
4.5.3 General Drawing Content

Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the following minimum requirements, in addition to
requirements as stated in contract documents and the specifications:
1. All drawings shall be in A1 Landscape Orientation;

2. All drawings shall have a border line, and title block on the right hand side. The border shall
be 5mm from the edge of a standard A1 page. The title block shall not exceed 1/10th of the
total drawing width between borders;
3. The title block shall include drawing notes and legend in the upper 2/3 of the title block;
4. The bottom 1/3 of the title block shall include drawing number, title, version, date, scale,
project number, Contractor / Consultant name, logos of TRANSCO and the Contractor /
Consultant, the name of the originator and space for a signature;
5. All drawings shall contain Easting and Northing Grid Lines, with text on the edges of the
drawing identifying each grid line. Grid lines shall be of minimal thickness to avoid obstruction
of drawing details. Grid lines shall be equally spaced on both axes and their spacing shall
depend upon the drawing scale. Spacing should be adjusted such that 5 to 7 grid lines span
the drawing across its width, and 3 to 5 along its height. The same shall apply if the orientation
is away from North to top of page;
6. The drawing shall include a North Arrow;
Page 84 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
7. Drawings shall indicate dimensions, elevations, coordinates and labels as applicable;
8. Variable dimensions shall be presented as tables within the drawing;
9. Symbols, hatchings, and line types shall be used such that, to the extent possible, the drawing
can be correctly interpreted in black and white print.
4.5.4 As Built Drawings
As built drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor for the whole WORKS and shall progress with
time at all project stages. These drawings shall follow the standard format and be accurately scaled.
For record, two sets of As-Built Mark-up Prints shall be kept at site and marked with different colouring
to illustrate whether the component has been constructed according to design drawings, constructed
differently, or deleted. The final As Built Drawings shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval
and shall be stamped and initialled before being distributed. The submittal of these drawings shall be
using compact disks in DXF/DWG format AutoCAD release 14 or latest.
Refer to section W-G-SS-002 “Specification for Design, Shop & As Built Drawings”.
4.5.5 Project Record Book

As part of the built documentation, a soft copy of Project Record Book (PRB) shall be submitted by the
Contractor. The content of Project Record Book is composed of the following sections and subsections:
1 Design, Engineering
1.1 List of Project Drawings

(Identified with Drawing Numbers and Titles; sorted by ADWEA Discipline Codes.)
1.1.1 Engineering (General)
1.1.2 Process Engineering (include Environmental)
1.1.3 Pipelines
1.1.4 Civil/ Structural Engineering (Excl. Tanks)
1.1.5 Piping Engineering
1.1.6 Vessel / Heat Transfer Engineering (Incl. Tanks)
1.1.7 Plot Plans
1.1.8 Rotating Machinery Engineering
1.1.9 Electrical Engineering
1.1.10 Instrumentation & Control Engineering
1.1.11 Materials / Corrosion / Coatings
1.1.12 HVAC Engineering
1.1.13 Operation & Maintenance
1.1.14 Fire Fighting and Safety
1.1.15 Chlorination System
1.1.16 Security Systems including CCTV
1.1.17 Architectural Drawings
1.2 List or Project Documents/ Submittals
1.2.1 Design Calculations

1.2.2 Material Submittals
1.2.3 Construction, Pre-commissioning & Commissioning Method Statements
1.2.4 Quality Assurance Procedures
1.2.5 Quality Control Procedures
Page 85 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
1.2.6 Inspection and Test Plans (ITP's)
1.2.7 Factory Inspection Record Dossiers (FIRD's)
1.2.8 Non-Conformance Reports
1.2.9 Project Risk Register
1.3 List of Applicable Standards

(Identified with Title, Numbers and Revisions-used for Design, Materials Testing)
1.3.1 Civil and Structures

1.3.2 Buildings including HVAC
1.3.3 Pipelines
1.3.4 Mechanical Including Tanks. Vessels and Equipment
1.3.5 Electrical
1.3.6 Instrumentation and Controls
1.3.7 Fire Fighting
1.3.8 Pre-commissioning & Commissioning
1.3.9 Telemetry & Communications
1.3.10 Corrosions / Painting
1.4 List of Site Conditions & Design Conditions
1.4.1 Topographical along with the Project Topographical report

1.4.2 Geotechnical along with the Project Geo technical report
1.5 Design & Engineering Calculation carried out from Project

(Arranged by ADWEA Discipline Codes & showing the revision cycles)
1.5.1 Engineering (General)

1.5.2 Process Engineering {include Environmental)
1.5.3 Pipelines
1.5.4 Civil/ Structural Engineering (Excl. Tanks)
1.5.5 Piping Engineering
1.5.6 Vessel / Heat Transfer Engineering (Incl. Tanks)
1.5.7 Plot Plans
1.5.8 Rotating Machinery Engineering
1.5.9 Electrical Engineering
1.5.10 Instrumentation & Control Engineering
1.5.11 Telemetry & Communications Engineering
1.5.12 Material / Corrosion / Coatings
1.5.13 HVAC Engineering
1.5.14 Operation & Maintenance
1.5.15 Fire Fighting and Safety
2 Production, Inspection & Delivery of Material & Equipment
2.1 List of Equipment

(Identified with Material Submittal Number)
Page 86 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
2.1.1 Water Transmission lines
2.1.2 Building Equipment
2.1.3 Mechanical Equipment
2.1.4 Electrical Equipment
2.1.5 Instrumentation & Control Equipment
2.1.6 HVAC
2.1.7 Hypo-chlorination
2.1.8 Fire Fighting
2.2 Specifications & Data Sheets of Equip. and Materials

(Items covered in the section 1.5 above, shall be supported with Specification & Data Sheets)
Material Submittal in PDF Format
2.2.1 Piping, Fittings, etc.

2.2.2 Civil & Allied Materials / Equipment
2.2.3 Mechanical Materials/ Equipment
2.2.4 Electrical Materials / Equipment
2.2.5 Building Materials/ Equipment
2.2.6 Instrumentation Materials / Equipment
2.3 List of Equipment/ Material Receiving and Damage Inspection Reports (RCDR)
(Identified with reference to RCDR ref., Material/ Equipment Description, Total Numbers and
BOQ Reference)
2.3.1 D.I. Pipes and Fittings

2.3.2 C.S. Pipes and Fittings
2.3.3 Tied Dismantling Joints
2.3.4 Valves including MOV (Air Release, Gate, Butterfly, Flow Control, Check Valves)
2.3.5 Tanks Steel Plate Materials
2.3.6 Strainers
2.3.7 Pumps
2.3.8 Generators
2.3.9 Rubber Expansion Bellows
2.3.10 Chlorination Equipment
2.3.11 Fire Fighting Equipment
2.3.12 Motors
2.3.13 Phase Shift Transformers
2.3.14 Switchgears & Protection Panels
2.3.15 Cables & cable trays
2.3.16 Transformers
2.3.17 DC Batteries and Chargers
2.3.18 Bus Duct
2.3.19 Frequency Converters
2.3.20 Control System and Local Control Panels
2.3.21 Solar Panels and accessories
3 Construction QCR
Page 87 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
All quality Records maintained & signed off by the Engineer & the Contractor for every
component of the Work as listed in the various sections herein. These documents will be
separated by Lot.
4 Pre-commissioning & Commissioning Records

(Identified with reference to Area / Equipment, Building, System I Sub-System, etc.)
4.1 Pre-commissioning & Commissioning Records

4.1.1 Pipelines Hydro Testing, Flushing and Disinfection.
4.1.2 MCC, RFC, RFSU documentation complete with Punch list item
4.2 Pre-commissioning Tests Records
4.2.1 Pre-commissioning Tests Records
4.3 Commissioning Records
4.3.1 Performance Test Report
4.4 Initial Operation Records

(Identified with reference to Area I Equipment, Building, System/ Sub-System,)
4.4.1 Records generated during plant and pipe lines initial operations
4.4.2 Acceptance/ Performance Tests
5 Handing Over
(List of below documents to be included)
5.1 Training Documents

5.2 Quality Control Record for the Training
5.3 PDS Training Dossiers
5.4 Operation & Maintenance Manuals (Submitted Separately)
5.5 List of Lubricants & Consumables (Submitted Separately)
5.6 List of Spare Parts (Submitted Separately)
5.7 Surplus Materials
5.8 Non-Toxicity Certificates
5.9 Guarantee Certificates
5.10 Surge Analysis Report
6 Project Close Out
6.1 Project Cost report (Summary table of Payment Invoices)

6.2 Project Schedule report (Copy of Final Construction Schedule)
6.3 Project Performance report (Copy of Project Progress Measurement & Performance
Curve)
7 Provisional Acceptance Certificate
Page 88 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
7.1 PAC-Exception to Completion
7.2 Committee Inspection Report
7.3 PAC-Signed Punch List
4.6 Approvals
Approvals for the design and construction of proposed works are to be undertaken in the following
stages:
• STEP 1 – Coordination with Utilities & Authorities:

o Permission from utilities and authorities to pass through unused corridors / plots
(where applicable);
o Furnishing information for submission of an expropriation application by TRANSCO
(where applicable);
• STEP 2 – TPD Route Approvals:
o Make application to Town Planning Department (TPD) of the relevant Municipality(s);
• STEP 3 – Utility, Authority, and Stakeholder NOCs:
o Obtain the No Objection Certificates for the TPD approved route from the relevant
utilities and authorities;
• STEP 4 – TPD Design Approval:
o Submit Detailed Design and NOCs to the (TPD) of the relevant Municipality(s);
• STEP 5 – Building Permit:
o Submit application to the relevant Municipality(s);
Stakeholder NOCs may include, but not be limited to, the following:
o Other ADWEA group companies;

o Etisalat;
o Abu Dhabi Sewerage Services Company (ADSSC);
o Environmental Agency of Abu Dhabi (EAD);
o Department of Transportation (DOT);
o Abu Dhabi Urban Planning Council (UPC);
o Oil & Gas (ADNOC, TAKREER);
o Tourism Development & Investment Company (TDIC);
o Developers;
o Contractors;
o Consultants.
The minimum NOC requirements may be defined by the TPD as part of the approval process.
Approvals may also require that Trial pits and Ground Penetration Radar (GPR) surveys be required
prior to construction.
4.7 Health Safety Environment & Quality (HSEQ)

All activities undertaken by the design Consultant directly and indirectly related to the execution of
the works shall be in full compliance with the TRANSCO HSEQ Policy and procedures, Abu Dhabi
Occupational Safety and Health System Framework (OSHAD SF) mandatory requirements, UAE labour
law requirement, UAE Ministerial Order 32 or 1982 and Consultants’ own Health & Safety Policy and
Plans.
Page 89 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
In addition the Consultant shall take into account the safety requirements of his design. The design
shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Provision of proper illumination and ventilation;

• Provision of emergency exists and access for emergency services;
• First aid and safety facilities e.g. plunge showers, eye washes;
• Proper access, hand rails, stairs and landings etc. at all facilities
• Design for safe operation and maintenance of facilities
Management of Health and Safety in Design
The design Consultant team must integrate Safety in Design requirements into their project lifecycle
from concept through design and construction, to operation, maintenance and decommissioning.
Safety in Design is a strategy for preventing injuries and incidents by integrating hazard identification
and risk assessment methods early in the design process.
The designer must ensure that the project is capable of being constructed to be safe, can be
maintained safely and complies with all relevant occupational safety and health legislation. The
designers and Contractors should refer to the https://www.oshad.ae for the latest updates and
information guidelines. OSHAD-SF- Code of Practice CoP 20.0 - Safety in Design (Construction) should
be referred for safety considerations in design.
A systematic risk based approach should be used to determine the right solution and reduce the risks
as low as reasonably practicable while ensuring that TRANSCO is aware of the residual risks. Hence
the designer has to liaise and sought advice and input from the principal Contractor/Contractor.
Information required by other designers, the principal Contractor, or other Contractors shall be
provided and communicated appropriately. A written workplace hazard control program as per
OSHAD-SF – Element 2 - Risk Management should outline which methods are being used to control
the exposure and how these controls will be monitored for effectiveness.
Managing Health and Safety during Construction
Prior to receiving approval of any required OSH assessments and before any construction activities
begin, the Contractor on behalf of TRANSCO may be required to submit an OSH-CMP Construction
Management Plan as per OSHAD-SF- Codes of Practice CoP 53.1 - OSH Construction Management Plan
to their respective SRA so that they can issue an NOC/permits for construction. Additional guidance
about the OSH-CMP’s contents can be found in OSHAD-SF- Codes of Practice CoP 53.1 - OSH
Construction Management Plan and should be referenced in Tender Documents. Potential hazards
encountered in such construction activities include but not limited to work at height, falls (from
heights), trench collapse, vehicles and traffic routes, scaffold collapse, electric shock and arc flash/arc
blast, fire and other emergencies, failure to use proper personal protective equipment, plant and
lifting equipment, welfare facilities, health hazards and repetitive motion injuries. The Contractor is
required to comply with TRANSCO System Safety rule in addition to the OSHAD-SF laws, regulations,
mechanisms, standards, Code of Practices and Elements that are relevant to the contract operations.
Managing Health and Safety during Demolition and Decommissioning
If a project requires plans to decommissioning of any infrastructure project (or a portion of a project),
the Contractor should submit an OHS permit application to notify DMA of the planned activities as per
Section 5.22 Demolition and Decommissioning of OSHAD-SF- Codes of Practice CoP 53.1 - OSH
Construction Management Plan. Following approval of the DEMP and issuance of the NOCs for
decommissioning, the Contractor may begin related decommissioning activities. All waste generated
Page 90 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
from demolition and decommissioning activities shall be disposed as per Centre for Waste
Management (CWM), Abu Dhabi requirements and OSHAD-SF- CoP 54.0 - Waste Management.
4.8 HAZID / HAZOP

A Hazard Identified Study (HAZID) is to be undertaken at the Preliminary Design Stage. A Hazard
Operability Study (HAZOP) is to be undertaken by the appointed Contractor prior to Design Approval
and Materials approval, and prior to construction. The purpose of the HAZID will be determine during
the design stage any hazards that can be mitigated through design. The purpose of the HAZOP will be
to conduct a full and thorough hazard assessment to determine whether any operational hazards may
be mitigated through the selection of materials.
Both the HAZID and HAZOP shall be undertaken as workshops with participation from the following
parties:
• The Design Consultant;

• Specialist Sub-Consultants (e.g. Surge Analysis) where applicable;
• The Contractor (if appointed);
• TRANSCO Water Network Development Department (WNDD);
• Water Engineering & Commissioning Department (WE&CD);
• Network Management Division (NMD).
The basic HAZID / HAZOP process is summarized as follows:
1. Identify Hazards;
2. Quantify / Classify the Risks emanating from each Hazard;
3. Propose Mitigation for each Hazard;
4. Quantify Residual Risk emanating from each Mitigated Hazard.
4.9 Operation & Control Philosophy (OCP)

A document describing the Operation and Control Philosophy (OCP) of the project needs to be
provided prior to construction of new facilities. This document should describe the general operational
principles that the end user will want to apply to the project. It should define in the function of the
various components, the information and system required for their management and the operational
requirements for various conditions. These typically describe critical components for operation, the
control system functions, actions on high and low readings i.e. scenarios, equipment protection
functions or maintenance philosophy, operational indicators and their interpretation etc.
There are various operational indicators like pressure, flow etc. which can be measured by system
components. The management of these system components using instruments like alarm, data
recorders or any other electro mechanical devices should be described. It’s important to include the
management apparatuses and adequately describe their function as well as management for
operation of the system. The interpretation of these information has to be explained so that end user
can understand during operation.
The OCP needs to be developed in three stages:
• At the completion of the hydraulic studies a high level OCP shall be developed by the design
Consultant as part of the preliminary design
Page 91 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
• At the final design stage the Consultant shall further develop the OCP (including P&IDs) for
incorporation into the tender documents so that the EPC Contractors can fully understand
how the system is to work when they submit tenders
• The Contractor then will expand the OCP at detailed design stage and obtain TRANSCO
approval prior to ordering major equipment. He will finalise the OCP at the commissioning
stage of the contract
4.9.1 General Description of the Project

A good description of the project and its scope of operation (or any sub-section that is within scope of
operation) has to be provided in the OCP. This will give idea to the end-user the background of the
project, an overview of the major components or tasks involved. It will provide the goal or any other
objective the client is willing to achieve during operation of the project.
4.9.2 Hydraulic Analysis

The Consultant will perform a hydraulic analysis of the system during conceptual design phase. Based
on the hydraulic assessment the Consultant would develop the basis of design and configuration of
the system. It should be based on the scope of work and the clients need during operation. It’s
important to comprehend how the system will perform after project installation. Based on the
hydraulic analysis the Consultant will suggest the important components critical for operation of the
system.
The Consultant may also suggest some general practices and established standards for operation. It’s
important to restate the client’s operational intention or any other specific concern in the operational
philosophy, this may include:
• Providing specific services.
• Improving the system.
• Address specific operation conditions.
• Management during emergency conditions.
4.9.3 Identification of Critical Operational Components

One of the major tasks during initial hydraulic analysis is to identify the critical operational
components for the project and their staging requirements. This will provide the basis to develop the
preliminary operation control philosophy by the Consultant. Based on the scope of the project the
operation control may include the following components:
• Pump capacity / head as well as flow.
• Control system.
• Mechanical features.
• Electrical features.
• Valves.
Specifics of the various components may not be evident during conceptual phase. As the project
progresses through the phases of detail design, construction and then operation more information
will become available which needs to be detailed out in the OCP. For example the actual settings and
performance of the surge vessel will be possible to specify after construction of the project. Examples
Page 92 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
of more operational features that can be considered for OCP after detail design may include the
number of valves, their location and their settings pump controls, chlorine dozing etc.
4.9.4 Operation Scenarios

It’s very important to develop various scenarios where the critical components are assessed and their
operation is determined. Based on these scenarios the overall synchronization of different
components are established. Following are some potential scenarios:
• Typical operation condition.
• Any major change in operation in the future.
• Specific operational conditions.
• Emergency – example of some emergency scenarios.
• Failure scenarios and the back-up operation.
• Different stages of operation – On start-up / while running / shutdown.
Typically the components of the project is connected to a larger network. In addition to the operation
of the project components, the document should also contain how it will operate given the overall
system connectivity and its interaction or influence by the overall system.
For each of these scenarios there should be details of the operational setup considered for different
components. During preliminary assessment the operation of the major components can be identified
from these scenarios. After detail design and construction more specifics are finalized regarding the
system and based on that additional scenarios can be analysed to develop the operation of smaller
components. The OCP needs to be updated accordingly.
Details some specific components which can be included in the OCP are given below.
4.9.4.1 Pump Station Overview

Various components of the pump station, their connectivity and function needs to be described. It
should include the criteria that was used to design the pump station. This may include describing –
suction header, number of pumps, types and their function (maximum and minimum operation
range), rated data from the manufacturer, discharge header, pipeline connectivity, surge protection
system, surge vessels, instruments and equipment’s connecting to the major components. Air
compressor, chlorination system, sumps. The typical operation of these components has to be
elaborated in the in the OCP.
4.9.4.2 Control System

The control system shall manage and control the pump group, valves, solenoids etc. including process
interlocks to properly control plant, protect the equipment, and provide the required functionality
and stability of operation. The control system includes:
• Local Control Panels.
• Programmable Logic Control Panels PLC/RTU Panels.
• SCADA Operator Work Stations, Servers and Communication Network.
Detail will be provided for the various components i.e. indicators, their function and control and will
include the following. Any backup system available for operation needs to be also included.
Page 93 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
• Pump local control panel.
• Chlorination.
• Surge vessel.
• Distributed control panel – SCADA, telecom etc.
4.9.4.3 Modes of Automatic Operation

If the system includes automatic operation the various modes needs to be detailed. These mode of
operation may be selected from the Pump Local Control Panel and from the SCADA Working Station.
The detail steps of operation and their control logic has to be explained.
4.9.4.4 Remote-auto Operation from SCADA

The general operational requirements, control logic of any electro-mechanical device i.e. pump duty
allocation – its procedure, different allocation modes needs to be described. The following can be
considered:
• Control parameters – their description, notes and settings.
• Limits of operation.
• Description of pump operation control and logic for various hydraulic conditions including
and specific modes of operation. The scenarios from hydraulic analysis can be further
detailed for better understanding.
4.9.4.5 Operation and Control of Valves

Valves can be located in pumps stations as well as other locations. The OCP needs to describe these
valves and their operation. The control valves will have the following functions which needs to be
described in the document:
• Outlet Pressure Control when required.
• Flow Control when required.
• Discussion of various settings.
• Closing opening etc.
4.9.4.6 Operation and Control of any Important Connection Points, Tap Offs, Branch Line Control
etc.
The document should include description of important connection points, tap offs and branch line
control and their operation. This will include logic of operation, description of control system, status,
manual operation options, operation of different fixtures like CV, MCV, and PRV etc.
4.9.4.7 Leakage Monitoring and Burst Control

If the system includes a Leak Monitoring System (LMS), it needs to be described. Relevant data
required for the Leak Monitoring are typically available in the control system/SCADA servers. The LMS
monitors the pipelines and typically generates an alarm if a leak is detected. These type of functions
and subsequent action needs to be documented. The actions may include shutting of valves to repair
leaks, adjusting pressure setting at control valves etc. Use of hydraulic models if required has to be
mentioned.
Page 94 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
4.9.4.8 Operation of Control of Surge Vessels and Air Compressors
The number surge vessels and their operational settings has to be described. The parameters typically
used are air pressure, water level, actual temperature, air energy etc. The values for these parameters
related operation of the vessel including design criteria has to be described. Any future change in the
settings for different operation condition will be in the OCP.
4.9.4.9 Operation and Control of Chlorination System

The operation and monitoring of the chlorination system and related SCADA/control system has to be
described. It will contain setting for pumps operations, soluble or chemical used, their dosage etc.,
while monitoring Water Quality Analyzers for pH, Conductivity etc. The OCP will explain various
operational conditions i.e. current / future / emergency etc. and the related settings of the equipment.
4.9.4.10 Performance Evaluation/Emergency Operation Options

The OCP should provide details of overall monitoring of the system and the interpretation of data from
various components. The performance of the system will be summarized from these information. It
should include a list emergency situation that may occur in the system and include procedures and
setups to follow for emergency operation of the system.
4.10 Value Engineering

Value Engineering is a systematic and structured process of team-based decision making that aims to
achieve best value for a project by defining those functions required to achieve the value objectives,
and delivering those functions at least cost (whole life cost or resource use), consistent with
TRANSCO’s required quality and performance.
Value Engineering is specifically intended to be conducted on projects where there is a reasonable

expectation that the potential for savings is greater than the cost of the Value Engineering exercise
itself. Value Engineering is intended to quickly identify and capitalize on most significant savings and
improvements, early on in the project concept / design development, when the cost impact of changes
are lowest.
Value Engineering needs to be carried out during preparation of the PDR and the FDR. The Consultant
is to carry out workshops as agreed with TRANSCO at both the PDR and FDR stage of the project and
provide a Value Engineering Report following each workshop.
4.11 Risk Management

Risk Management shall be carried out in accordance with TRANSCO Program Management Procedure
Manual.
In all stages of the project the Consultant and Contractor shall work with TRANSCO to develop and
maintain a risk register and risk mitigation plan. Workshops are to be held with TRANSCO at each stage
of the project to identify risks, allocate likelihood, impact and mitigation measures. The PDR shall
contain a section on risk management strategy and this is to be further updated through the final
design process and incorporated into the final design report. The risk management process is to be
taken over by the Contractor and managed through to completion of the project.
Page 95 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
5 Civil Works
5.1 Design Codes
Contractor/ Consultant shall perform the structural design based on Abu Dhabi International Building
Code (ADIBC). Alternative design codes (BS, EN, etc…) may be used subject to ADWEA approval.
Major code/ standard references are:
ADIBC - Abu Dhabi International Building Code
CIRIA GUIDE -The CIRIA Guide to Concrete Construction in the Gulf Region
ASCE 7 -05 -Minimum Design Loads for Buildings & other Structures.
ACI 318 – All Parts -Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete Commentary
AISC 360 – 05 -Specification for Structural Steel Buildings”.
AISC 341 – 05 -Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings”.
AISC S100 -07 -North American Specification for the Design of Cold – Formed Steel
Structural Members.
ACI 224R – 01 -Control of Cracking in Concrete Structures.
ACI 350-01 -Seismic design of liquid- containing concrete structures
ACI-350.3-06 - Seismic design of liquid- containing concrete structures
ACI 530.1 -08 -Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry
Structures & Related Commentaries.
ACI-351.3R-04 - Foundations for Dynamic Equipment
Euro code 0 -Basis of structural design.
Euro code 1 -Actions on structures” — All Parts.
Euro code 2 -Design of Concrete Structures – All Parts.
Euro code 3 -Design of steel structures” – All Parts.
Euro code 7 -Geotechnical Design — All Parts.
Euro code 8 -Design of structures for Earthquake resistance — All Parts.
BS 5950 - Structural Steel in Building".
BS 8110 -The Structural Use of Concrete.
BS 8004 -Foundations.
BS 8007 -Design of Concrete Structures for Retaining Aqueous Liquids.
BSEN206-1 -Concrete Specification, Performance, Production and Conformity.
BS 6399 Part 1 -Code of Practice for Dead and Imposed Loads.
Page 96 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
BS 2573 -loads for crane Gantry Girders, BS 2655 'loads due to lifts' and loads
due to machinery, vibration, construction, and test loads etc.
BS - CP 2012 – Part - 1 - Code of practice for foundations for machinery
CIRIA SP -The CIRIA Guide to Concrete Construction in the Gulf Region
AISC 360 – 05 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings”.
AISC 341 – 05 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings”.
AISC S100 -07 North American Specification for the Design of Cold – Formed Steel
Structural Members.
CIRIA Report 91 Early Thermal Crack Control in Concrete.
CIRIA Report 128 Design of thrust Block.
DIPPRA Thrust Restraint Design for Di Pipe.
AWWA-M11 Steel Water Pipe A Guide for Design & Installation.
UBC Uniform Building Code
RTA Road Transport Authority regulations
NFPA National Fire Protection Agency
CIRIA publication Guide to the construction of reinforced concrete in the Arabian

Peninsula
5.2 Topographic Survey

Topographic survey should be carried out in accordance with ADWEA Standard Specification w-c-ss-
001. Survey should cover the entire project site for the reservoir/ pump station facilities and extend
beyond the site boundary. The Consultant should carry out a site inspection to ascertain key features
to be picked up by survey and the extent of survey required beyond the site boundaries. Key features
to be picked include natural features such as water courses, changes in surface geology, change in
slope, and manmade features including utilities.
During the survey, benchmarks should be established to facilitate geotechnical investigations and
construction set out. The number of permanent/ intermediate/ temporary benchmarks should be
agreed with TRANSCO prior to commencement of survey.
The survey report should be in accordance with the ADWEA Standard Specification plus any specific
requirements set out in the terms of reference for the project.
5.3 Geotechnical Investigations

Geotechnical and Geophysical investigations need to be carried out at the preliminary design stage.
This will ensure that there will be no major discrepancies between design and the geotechnical
conditions and hence minimize any related delays and claims during construction.
Geotechnical investigations should be carried out in accordance with ADWEA Standard Specification
w-c-ss-002 and more specifically in accordance with Section 3.2 of this design guideline.
Page 97 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
5.4 General Civil / Structural Requirements – Pump Stations

5.4.1 General Arrangement
The Consultant / Contractor shall carry out the civil / structural designs and detailed drawings of the
structures of the pumping station suitable for the service life and the project requirements.
The Consultant / Contractor shall carry out the detailed design calculations for the structures of the
pumping station in accordance with the relevant Abu Dhabi International Building Code/International
Codes/Authorised local and national bodies.
The pump station should be located /designed to be flood free.
The arrangement of the various structures within the pumping station plot should be such that:
1) The person / operator in the control room should have the clear view of the pump hall.
2) The surface blocs / units should be close to the pump hall.
3) The sizes of the other rooms should be optimized and need not to be of same size as that of
longer side of the pump hall.
The following guidelines for the type of construction should be followed by the Consultant /
Contractor subject to the specific project requirements and Engineer approval. They should also be
read in conjunction with the mechanical guidelines:
Pump Stations will have some or all of the following facilities:
Main Pump Hall Compressor room
Unloading Bay Air Handling System (Ventilation and Air Conditioning)
Main Control Room Chlorination Facility
Switch Room Office
Battery Room Transformer room
Fire Pump Room Washrooms
A typical general arrangement is given in the Appendix to this guideline.
5.4.2 Pumping Hall

The Pump hall and laydown area shall be of steel structure or Reinforced concrete structure depending
upon the size of the pumping station. The Consultant / Contractor should select the material / type of
construction suitable for the service life of the structures, resembles with surroundings and which will
ensure the minimum maintenance.
The steel structures for pump hall and laydown area shall consists of portal frame with steel columns
supporting the electrical overhead travelling crane along the length of the pump hall and the laydown
area, the roof and the walls shall be of aluminium sandwich panels cladding.
The service buildings to the pump hall shall be of reinforced concrete structures. The walls shall be of
concrete block for 1 m bottom height and remaining of aluminium sandwich panels cladding. The roof
shall be of reinforced concrete.
Foundations shall be designed according to the recommendations/ findings of the detailed

geotechnical and geophysical soil investigation reports and shall consider the requirements of the
buildings/structures. Generally, pump station foundations are raft foundations with pump footings
Page 98 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
integral with the raft. Where the footing slab is a separate floating slab, then pump footings are
independent of the floor slab being separated by 20mm joint with compressible joint filler and sealant
as per specification.
Concrete reinforced roof shall be provided with waterproofing and heat insulation. The roof shall be
provided with 1m parapet wall and adequately sloped to avoid puddle and drained through rainwater
pipes.
The pump hall will generally be constructed below grade to provide the most advantageous hydraulic
conditions for the pumps. Reservoirs supplying the pumps will normally be located at grade, thus
always providing positive head to the pumps.
Walkways, stairs and access are also described in the Mechanical Works section of this guideline.
There should be adequate space around equipment within the pump hall for access to carry out the
O&M activities. The space requirements shown in the typical drawings in the Appendix will be
followed. The pump hall should have adequate space for loading / unloading of mechanical equipment
/ pumps directly from overhead travelling crane to trucks. The floor should have adequate slope to
eliminate any puddle and connect to a drainage channel and a sump pit.
Access and escape routes shall be in compliance with Civil Defence requirements. Where possible, the
pump hall shall be directly visible from SCADA work station.
There shall be clear pathways to all maintenance points such as gland packings, grease nipples etc.
Pathways shall be without any obstructions and without any need to remove or modify any stairs,
ladders, walkways or platforms for routine maintenance access.
Access platforms shall be installed at a height where equipment can be reached easily and without
the need for additional ladders or platforms.
Easy access to confined spaces shall be discouraged. Openings shall be big enough for easy emergency
rescue of personnel in case of accidents.
Escape routes for personnel shall be different than access routes for equipment. This is to prevent
situations where escape route is blocked by unloading of equipment for example.
Separate escape routes shall be provided for personnel.
An example of that is a roller shutter door in the pump hall for equipment access and a single leaf door
next to it for personnel access and escape.
All perimeter access doors shall open outwards in the direction of escape.
5.4.3 Sub-Station/Switch Gear Building:

Sub-Station/Switch gear Building are detailed below. These units shall be constructed strictly in
accordance with DISCO regulations and requirements and any detailed drawings issued by DISCO
during negotiation and approval process.
5.4.3.1 Metering Room

A metering room shall be provided to house ADDC energy meters. As far as possible, the metering
room shall be provided on the boundary wall with direct access from outside. The room shall be air-
conditioned and shall be provided with adequate lighting. The metering room shall be of permanent
nature constructed in reinforced concrete and block work. Access shall be provided with minimum
1.2m wide single leaf door.
The finished floor level shall be kept at minimum 300mm above finished ground level and its minimum
height shall be 3.5m.
Page 99 of 233
N-14054
Design Guidelines
5.4.3.2 TRM and QRM Room
TRM / QRM room, if required, shall be provided to house ADDC ring main unit (RMU). As far as
possible, the TRM / QRM room shall be provided on the boundary wall with direct access from outside.
The room shall be provided with dual air-conditioners, each 18000 BTU split air conditioner, and shall
be provided with adequate lighting. The TRM / QRM room shall be of permanent nature constructed
in reinforced concrete and block work. Double access shall be provided, each with minimum 1.5m
wide single leaf door of 3m height. TRM / QRM support shall be provided in line with ADDC
requirements.
The finished floor level shall be kept at minimum 300mm above finished ground level and its minimum
height shall be 3.5m.
A 1m deep cable trench shall be provided as per ADDC requirements.
5.4.3.3 Substation
The provision of substation, whether private or ADDC supplied, is governed by ADDC regulation based
on the total connected load.
In the case, the substation is supplied by ADDC, its location and civil works requirements are also
governed by ADDC. The Consultant/Contractor shall take full cognisance of ADDC standard drawings
and details and ensure compliance.
In the case of private substation, in general the transformer and switchgear rooms shall be adequately
sized with proper room and access for O&M requirements with minimum 2m clearance around
equipment.
The private transformer shall be housed in a permanent structure constructed in reinforced concrete
and blockwork in compliance with local statutory requirements. For, natural ventilation, cross
ventilation of adequate size shall be considered depending on the amount of equipment generated
heat and its allowable temperature rise. The transformer room shall be provided with covered cable
trenches. The cable trench layout shall be designed to avoid any crossing of medium and low voltage
cable trenches. For ease of maintenance, each transformer room shall be provided 3m wide front
verandah with transformer transportable U-channel encased in floor. Where deluge protection is
provided, adequate drainage facility shall be considered. The fireseal of trenches, ducts and sleeves
provided post cable laying shall be capable of restricting water ingress. The trench shall be used for oil
containment in case of any oil leakage form the transformer.
The finished floor level shall be kept at minimum 300mm above finished ground level. Generally, a
minimum 4m wide folding type double-leafed fixed-louvered door shall be considered. However, the
door size shall be governed by the transformer size.
The transformer room shall be adequately sized to accommodate a medium voltage load break switch
wherever required.
A switchgear room in general shall be designed to avoid parallel installation of switchgears. A
switchgear room shall be a permanent structure constructed in reinforced concrete and blockwork.
Its finished floor level shall be kept at minimum 300mm above finished ground level and its minimum
height shall be 4m. The switchgear support shall be strictly in compliance with manufacturer’s
recommended seismic requirement.
The room shall be air-conditioned and shall be provided with adequate lighting, both skylight and
lighting fixtures. Its main access door shall be 2.5m wide and 3m height. Depending on the length of
the switchgear room, escape doors shall also be provided fitted with panic bar latch sets.
A separate battery and battery charger room shall be provided to accommodate battery and battery
charger of medium voltage switchgear.
Page 100 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
5.4.3.4 Electrical Room and control building
The electrical and control building shall be designed as reinforced concrete structure with block work
in compliance with local statutory requirements. The building shall be designed to accommodate the
electrical panels, SCADA work station and server adequately partitioned to provide enclosures for each
unit. Raised flooring shall be provided for SCADA control room and server room for under floor cabling.
A UPS panel including its battery shall be provided as a backup power source for SCADA control,
servers and other auxiliary control and instrumentation. Dedicated rooms shall be provided for UPS
panel, UPS supply distribution panel and battery. The battery for the UPS shall be kept in a separate
room with explosion proof fittings.
Cable cellar of minimum 2.5m height shall be considered under the electrical panel rooms for cable
routing and cable management. Preferably, a staircase shall be provided for entry and exit to the cable
cellar. Its flooring shall be adequately sloped to facilitate draining. A drainage sump shall be provided
for dewatering with floor opening for access. All below ground cables entering any building / structure
shall be provided with cable transit system (mechanical seal) to prevent water ingress.
Working clearance to all panels shall be provided in compliance with ADDC requirements. Access to
all the rooms shall be provided in compliance with ADDC requirements and civil defence requirements.
Door heights shall be as per panel height. Skylight shall be considered for natural lighting.
5.4.4 Chlorination Building

The chlorination building, hypochlorite generator/ dosing room and PLC / transformer rectifier room
shall be designed as reinforced concrete and blockwork structure.
Accessibility of the building and / or equipment for maintenance by roads and walkways shall be
ensured by the Contractor. This should include accessibility for Fork Lifts, so that heavy equipment
and materials can be moved when required. The building should also have adequate height for
movement of mechanical devices so that materials can be handled easily. GRP grating will used as
floors where required. The building should have good functional HVAC system. HVAC system should
be designed considering ADWEA Standard Specification.
The floor should have adequate slope to eliminate any puddle and connect to a floor drainage system
which ultimately connects to a storm drain or sewer. Each floor drain shall be of heavy duty uPVC with
"S" or "P" trap complete with chrome plated heavy duty, 200 x 200mm, bronze strainer. The strainer
shall be screwed to the body of the drain. All floor drains shall have chrome plated removable covers
to their strainers or heavy duty aluminium cover.
The salt saturator, product tanks area, temporary reverse storage area as well as a salt storage shed
shall be designed as steel structures with portal frame at regular intervals with steel columns
supporting the electrical monorail. The salt storage area shall be enclosed if required by TRANSCO.
The duration of salt storage shall be project specific and shall be decided during design stage.
5.4.5 Fire Water Pump Room

The fire water pump room shall be designed as a reinforced concrete structures with blockwork.
The location of the storage tank and its capacity will be as per Civil Defence guideline. It has to have
adequate ventilation. It should have a main pumps (electrically and diesel driven) and a jockey pump
to maintain pressure. Where turbine pumps are used, adequate size opening in the roof over the
pump shall be provided with removable GRP cover.
ensured by the Contractor. Overhead travelling crane shall be installed for equipment handling.
Page 101 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
All statutory and civil defence requirements shall be followed.
5.4.6 Compressor Room

The compressor room shall normally be designed as a reinforced concrete and blockwork structure.
The floor should have adequate slope to eliminate any puddle and connect to a floor drainage system
which ultimately connects to a storm drain or sewer. Floor drains shall be provided to cater for the
condensate.
Adequate ducting shall be provided for venting hot air / heat dissipation from the compressor. Air
intake in the form of sand trap louvers shall be provided.
Service monorail shall be provided for individual compressors with landing bay.
ensured by the Contractor. The building should also have adequate height for movement of
mechanical devices so that they can be handled easily.
5.4.7 Non-Process Buildings

All other non-process buildings such as Administration Building, Stores, Workshops, Guard house, etc.
shall be designed as reinforced concrete skeleton or steel structure, as per the project scope and in
compliance to local codes & regulations.
5.4.7.1 Administration building

The administration building should have rooms for the following: pantry, reception, washrooms,
storeroom, Etisalat room, server room, UPS room, Prayer room, meeting room, specific project
requirements.
The administration building shall be of permanent nature constructed in reinforced concrete and block
work. The finished floor level shall be kept at minimum 200mm above finished ground level and its
minimum height shall be 3.0m.
5.4.7.2 Guard house

The Guard house be of permanent nature constructed in reinforced concrete and block work. It shall
comprise office, one bedroom facility with kitchen and washroom.
5.4.7.3 Workshop and Store

The size, location, and specification would be project specific and should be discussed and decided
during the design stage.
5.4.8 Equipment foundations

Foundations of equipment shall be designed in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. The
design should be substantiated by geotechnical investigation and its recommendation.
Equipment foundations should be designed to spread the load of installed machinery on to the ground
so that excessive settlement or tilting of the foundation block relative to the floor or other fixed
installations will not occur; they should have sufficient rigidity to prevent fracture being under stresses
set up by heavy concentrated loads, or by unbalanced rotating or reciprocating machinery; They
should absorb or damp down vibrations in order to prevent damage or nuisance to adjacent
installations or structures.
The foundation to equipment weight ratio shall not be less than 3 to 1. The natural frequency of the
foundation and equipment shall not coincide with any resonant frequency (dynamic excitation
frequency of the equipment) and complying with the codes.
Page 102 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
5.4.9 Pipe supports and pipe sleepers
A pipe support shall be designed to transfer the load from the Pipe to the supporting structures. The
load includes the weight of pipe, pipe fittings and the pipe contents.
Pipe sleepers are another form of pipe support used for supporting pipe at ground level. These are
either cast on site or can be precast in high-strength steel reinforced concrete. The four main functions
of pipe sleepers are to anchor, guide, absorb shock and support specified loads from a wide variety of
pipeline sizes and weights.
The following loads from piping shall be included in the design of pipe support structures:
a. The thrust pressure based on the specified pipe test pressure acting on the pipe’s tee, bends,
blind flanges, etc. and transmitting the load to the structures.
b. Pipes larger than 300 mm diameter shall be considered as concentrated loads in their actual
locations under empty, normal operation and test conditions, whichever gives the most severe
effect.
c. Piping less than 300 mm diameter shall be considered as a distributed load in the range 0.75 to
1.25 KN/m² over the gross area of the supporting floor. The greatest value shall be assumed
where extensive piping is anticipated. In area of structures where there is no piping, no allowance
should be made.
d. The assumed loads given above are based on ANSI standard pipe and fitting. Where non-standard
pipe and fittings are to be installed, the loads shall be adjusted to suit.
e. Considerations shall be given to pipework where the configuration, operating loads and operating
temperatures may give rise to significant horizontal forces due to friction at supports.
f. The pipe supports for above ground piping system, shall be designed considering the load
outcomes from the pipe stress analysis.
Complete stress analysis for all the pipes below and / or above ground and within the pump hall shall
be performed by the Contractor using computer software.
Pipe support and sleeper design shall comply with W–C–SS–003–Rev01.
5.4.10 Outdoor Cable trenches

Outdoor cable trench, if used, shall be constructed in reinforced concrete with heavy duty interlocking
precast concrete covers (designed for traffic load) with maximum length of 500mm. The floor trench
shall be provided with 100mm sleeves at every 1m to facilitate draining for rainwater.
All below ground cables entering any building / structure shall be provided with cable transit system
(mechanical seal) to prevent water ingress.
5.4.11 Valve chambers

Imposed Loads for chamber design shall be taken in accordance with Abu Dhabi International Building
Code. (ADIBC) and the related ACI/AISC/ASCE Codes. The loads chamber cover slabs shall be 5.0
KN/m², or a minimum single point load of 7.50 KN whichever is more unfavorable for the structure.
Chamber cover slabs which may be subject to traffic loads shall be designed to a traffic load of SLW60
(equivalent to 33.33KN/ m²) distributed load. In vicinity of heavy traffic, Surcharge Imposed Live Load
of 33.33 KN/m² (equivalent to SLW 60 single Wheel Load as per DIN 1072) shall be considered at the
Page 103 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
side of chamber’s walls. Hydrostatic Loading shall be the hydrostatic pressure of water contained in
the chamber retaining aqueous liquids, considering maximum level.
Adequate access shall be provided for valve operation. The valve chambers should have enough space
so that the valves can be operated easily. The chamber should have drainage sump and ventilation for
air circulation. The cover should be designed according to standard specification and there should be
clearly visible markings. Covers should be removable to allow maintenance. There should be entry
points for cables.
In case of constructing the valve chamber above the ground (i.e. in a bund), then the soil passive
resistance shall not be entrusted above the original ground level (i.e. to be considered as Zero); whilst
the passive earth pressure shall be considered below the original ground level.
External concrete protection shall be as per W-C-SS-005 Specification for Concrete Section 10.10.2
Protection.
5.4.12 Thrust/line anchor blocks

The unbalanced hydrostatic forces and hydrodynamic forces acting on the unrestrained pipes/fittings
are called thrust forces. This thrust forces occur at any point in the piping system where the direction
or cross section area of pipelines/ waterway changes. Thus, there will be thrust forces at bends,
reducers, offsets, tees, dead ends and closed valves.
The hydrodynamic thrust forces are generally found insignificant comparing to the hydrostatic thrust
forces and are usually can be ignored.
A thrust force in underground pipelines is usually to be balanced with bearing or gravity thrust blocks,
restrained joint systems or line anchors. The use of line anchors shall be limited as last option, if
adopting thrust blocks and/ or restrained joint system is not practically possible and subject to
TRANSCO/ Engineer approval. It has to be mentioned TRANSCO does not recommend using thrust
blocks with piles. Instead it recommends carrying out soil replacement where there are poor soil
conditions.
Thrust block/ line anchor details from ADWEA standard typical drawings can be used by the Contractor
for applicable parameters/ conditions subject to ADWEA/ Engineer approval.
The following Table show the forces the thrust forces computation on which the thrust and / or anchor
block shall be designed for:
Table 5.1 – Thrust forces computation.
Thrust Type/Bend Value Thrust Block Line Anchor Block
Blind Flange P*A 1*P*A
90 Degree H Or V Bend 2*P*A*SIN (Ɵ/2) P*A*((Pi/2)-(Ɵr/2))*TAN

“NA for V Bends”. (Ɵ/2)
45 Degree H Or V Bend 2*P*A*SIN (Ɵ/2) P*A*((Pi/2)-(Ɵr/2))*TAN
22.5 Degree H Or V Bend 2*P*A*SIN (Ɵ/2) P*A*((Pi/2)-(Ɵr/2))*TAN
11.25 Degree H Or V Bend 2*P*A*SIN (Ɵ/2) P*A*((Pi/2)-(Ɵr/2))*TAN
Sum of two Bends H or V ( example 2*P*A*SIN (Ɵt/2) P*A*((Pi/2)-(Ɵtr/2))*TAN
11.25 + 22.5) “NA for V Bends”. (Ɵt/2)
Page 104 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Combined H Bends 2*P*A*SIN (Ɵ/2) for every P*A
bend
Offset H Bends 2*P*A*SIN (Ɵ/2) for every P*A
bend
Combined V Bends NA P*A
Offset V Bends NA P*A
Reducers P*(A1-A2) P*(A1-A2)
Where:
H – Horizontal V – Vertical NA – Not Applicable
Ɵ – Bend angle in degree
Ɵr – Bend angle in Radian
Ɵt - total angles in degree
Ɵtr - total angles in Radian
Pi = 3.1416
A – Cross sectional area of the pipe (internal for flange joints and external for all other types)
A1 – The reducer bigger pipe cross sectional area
A2 – The reducer smallest pipe cross sectional area
The calculation of the required pipe restrained length shall be carried out in accordance with the pipe
Manufacture recommendations.
5.4.13 Potable water system

The Potable Water Supply System is required to supply Cold Potable Quality Water to all consumers
on site. Potable Quality is to be assured by installing in line filter units immediately upstream of each
consumer.
The Potable Water Supply is also to be used to supply break tanks and cisterns which serve sanitary
and hot water systems. The Potable Water Supply System also delivers water for service within
buildings.
Minimum storage size as per ADDC; Facilities supplied; Min pipe diameter –ADDC
Potable water system shall be designed in accordance with ADWEA standard specification w-c-ss-012.
5.4.14 Firefighting ring main system

Firefighting ring main system has to be designed as per Civil Defence requirement. It will be sized to
supply the estimated requirement for the facility. Fire Protection systems shall be designed in
accordance with ADWEA standard specification w-m-ss-010.
5.4.15 Surge vessels

The surge vessels and associated equipment shall be designed and suitable for operation in the
climatic conditions of the United Arab Emirates. The vessels shall be sized on the basis of the worst
case scenario such that pressures remain at all times and all locations within the agreed allowable
pressures or by default below the maximum allowable surge pressure and above atmospheric. The
design shall be performed considering that one vessel is not available and it shall result in the
minimum possible total volume. The vessels shall be controlled based on the air to water ratio (level
Page 105 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
control) or based on the air mass (mass control), which ever results in an optimum design considering
the whole life cost cycle of the vessels.
The following parameters shall be considered for the design:
• Extreme fluid levels (HHWL and LLWL) or extreme air charge
• Laplace coefficient from 1.0 to 1.4 unless otherwise advised by TRANSCO
• Minimum level in the vessel sufficient to avoid air entrainment into the pipeline
• Positive pressure (above atmospheric) for initial air charge / level in the vessels
• One vessel shall be considered as not available (n+1 design)
The sizing of the surge vessels shall be based on the findings of the surge analysis study and minimize
air compressor and air release operations, in particular in case of restart after trip.
The surge analysis shall utilise an approved computer software package that allows for a detailed
modelling of air vessels dimensions and their control mode. The computer model and results shall be
provided to TRANSCO and shall include the air valves/vacuum breaking valves along the pipeline route.
The air valves / vacuum breaking valves are not allowed to open during the surge unless otherwise
agreed by TRANSCO/ENGINEER.
The Contractor shall provide full surge protection for the system in accordance with the
recommendations of the surge analysis.
The surge protection equipment shall be located as shown on the drawings unless alternative
locations are approved. These alternative locations shall be based on new surge study showing better
performance of surge protection system. It is not anticipated that the alternative locations will be
approved unless the alternative locations are shown to have substantial advantages in the surge
protection systems.
Surge Vessels shall be designed in accordance with ADWEA standard specification w-m-ss-006.
5.4.16 Steel tank foundation

Steel tanks and their foundations shall be based on API 650 –Welded Steel Tanks and in accordance
with ADWEA specifications w-m-ss-011, w-c-ss-003, w-c-ss-004.
Foundations shall consist of an annular reinforced concrete ring beam and compacted structural fill
base within the concrete ring beam. The ring beam shall be a minimum of 300mm wide and 600mm
deep. The actual beam depth will depend on geotechnical investigations. The steel reinforcing shall
be designed for direct hoop tension resulting from lateral earth pressure in the inside of the ring beam.
The structural fill shall be compacted in accordance with ADWEA standard w-c-ss-004. The finished
surface shall slope at 1:120 downwards from the centre of the tank to the concrete ring beam.
Thickness of the structural fill shall depend on the geotechnical investigations. Structural fill shall have
no sharp angular particles which might damage the corrosion protection of the steel floor plates.
5.4.17 NDRC (Non-Disruptive Road Crossings)

For Non-Disruptive Road Crossings the options that can be considered are:
• pipe jacking,
• micro tunneling and
Page 106 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
• horizontal directional drilling
The work for NDRC shall include all services, equipment, materials, tools and labour for the complete
and proper installation, testing, restoration of underground utilities and environmental protection.
The work entails crossing underneath channels, waterways and roads in the Emirate of Abu Dhabi.
The crossings are of variable length and diameter, for the purpose to install potable water pipes,
sewage systems or conduits for electrical cables.
The Contractor shall note the accessibility of both entry and exit pit locations for each and every
crossing and shall further note the likeliness of utilizing marine transport systems for the island works
including but not limited to stringing/ testing/ coating of pipelines, drilling procedures etc. and all
possible requirements as deemed necessary by the Contractor.
The requirements in regard to pipelines welding, installations. Control of pipelines stress, bending,
hydrostatic testing. Flushing, disinfection and commissioning shall be as stated in other sections of the
Tender Documents.
Before starting with the works the Contractor shall provide a desk study / feasibility study. The study
shall list all the parameters used in the design. In case the NDRC shall be conducted for the purpose
installing potable water lines, the calculations have to show wall thickness calculations considering
maximum external and internal forces.
Contractor shall confirm that he is complying with the requirements of Abu Dhabi Municipality and
other concerned authorities if applicable.
NDRC systems shall be designed in accordance with ADWEA standard specification w-c-ss-016 as well
as the following standards:
AASHTO HS20 44+100% - Surcharge loading.

BS 1377 Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes.
BS 5228-1 Code of practice for basic information and procedures for noise control.
BS 5228-2 Guide for noise control legislation for construction and demolition.
BS 5911-1 Concrete pipes and ancillary concrete products.
BS 5930 Code of practice for site investigations.
BS 6164 Code of practice for safety in tunnelling in the construction industry.
BS EN 1916 Concrete pipes and fittings, unreinforced, steel fibre and reinforced
Guide to best Practice for Installation of Pipe Jacks and Microtunnels. Pipe Jacking Assn, UK
An Introduction to Pipe Jacking and Microtunnelling design. Pipe Jacking Association, UK
Guidelines for Planning and Design of Non-Disruptive Road Crossings. Abu Dhabi Municipality
5.4.18 Earth retaining structures

Loads; Geotechnical report; Types of structures; Backfill materials; W–C–SS–003–Rev01
Earth Retaining Structures can consist of cantilever retaining walls, gravity retaining wall systems and
reinforced earth systems. All Earth retaining Structures shall be designed to prevent failure by
sliding, overturning, settlement or slip circle. Design of retaining structures shall be in accordance
with ADWEA Standard Specification W–C–SS–003–Rev01.
Retaining wall shall be designed to take into consideration dead loads from the wall self-weight,
earth and backfill material; live loads from pipelines, traffic, building loads in accordance with ADIBC;
and other superimposed loads.
Page 107 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Design of any Earth Retaining Structure requires geotechnical investigation and reporting and shall
be carried out in accordance with Section 3.2 of this design guideline. Minimum requirements are
the determination of soil density, angle of internal friction and unconfined compressive strength.
Backfill materials shall be in accordance with ADWEA Standard Specification W-C-SS-004 Section 8.2
and placing and compaction shall be in accordance with Sections 8.3 and 8.4. Backfilling immediately
adjacent the wall shall consist of free draining gravel with associated perforated drainage pipe and
geotextile, to prevent any build-up of hydrostatic pressure.
5.4.19 Sheet piles diaphragm walls

Refer ADWEA Standard Specification for Piling W-C-SS-018.
Sheet piles diaphragm walls can be considered as a construction option if required.
When steel sheet piles are required for shoring or any other purpose required by the Project the
Contractor shall submit detailed stability and adequacy design calculation for TRANSCO/ Engineer
approval.
5.4.20 Driven/Bored Concrete Piles

Refer ADWEA Standard Specification for Piling W-C-SS-018.
The following shall be applied to the design and construction of piles:

• The spacing between the centerlines of piles shall not be less than 3 times the diameter of
pile.
• The diameter of pile shall not be less than 400 mm.
• Micro piles (with less than 400mm diameter) may be accepted for special cases subject to
ADWEA/ Engineer approval and recommendation of geotechnical investigation.
• The length/depth of pile shall be such that it reaches approved soil firm stable stratum
(preferred N-Value not to be less than 50) and shall not followed by a weak soil.
The bearing capacity of the driven/bored cast-in-place piles shall be defined as follows:
• By using a minimum of two static formulae based on standard penetration test, static
cone penetration test, and soil tests.
• In addition to the static formula, dynamic formula shall be used for estimating the
bearing capacity of the driven cast-in-place piles.
• Preliminary Pile load tests shall be carried out to confirm the results of the static and dynamic
formulae as well as to define the expected settlement under the working load.
The Consultants / Contractor shall decide the Civil / Structural General requirements in line with
ADWEA Standard Specification Ref. W – C – SS – 003.
5.4.21 Architectural Requirements

The Consultant / Contractor shall provide all architectural designs for the pumping station structures
in accordance with functional requirement with considerations to aesthetics. The architectural designs
should blend with surrounding architecture and should reflect the local culture and heritage wherever
possible.
Page 108 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
The Consultant / Contractor shall carry out architectural designs in accordance with the relevant Abu
Dhabi Municipality-Urban development Guidelines, Abu Dhabi International Building Code, local
authority regulations and the safety requirements listed in safety code NFPA 101 whichever more
stringent and the Authority discretion.
The Consultants / Contractor shall carry out the Architectural designs and works in line with ADWEA
Standard Specification Ref. W – C – SS – 008.
5.4.22 Earthworks
The pump station should be located to minimise earthworks volumes and excessive depths of fill. It
should also be located to be flood free. Finished ground surface levels should be such that surface
drainage is directed away from the pump station.
The following aspects should be considered in earthworks:
• Procurement and supply of material, delivery, transportation, handling and storing at site
• Dewatering and its safe disposal
• Excavation/backfilling
• Stockpiling and disposal of excavated material
• All necessary safety measures including locating underground services and working adjacent
to them
Earthworks should be designed in accordance with ADWEA Standard Specification w-c-ss-004.
5.4.23 Concrete Works

Foundations shall be capable of restricting settlements and other movements in service to acceptable
limits for the equipment or superstructure to be erected thereon.
All foundations shall be in reinforced concrete. Where the ground is excavated for any reason below
the underside of the proposed foundation the void shall be filled with concrete. Any over excavations
below the foundation blinding level shall be filled with structural backfilling. Any ground water
encountered during the excavation shall be dewatered using proper dewatering system approved by
TRASNCO, prior to any construction work. All such cost of dewatering shall be included in the tender
rates.
5.4.24 Roadwork and Drainage

Pumping Stations shall be provided with adequate access to carry out regular operation and
maintenance. Asphalt roads shall be provided for motorable access for transporting heavy
components e.g. pumps, valves, panels, etc. Pedestrian walkways in interlock tiles shall be provided
to access different parts of pumping station to facilitate operation and maintenance. Pump Station
roads would generally be a minimum 6m width kerb to kerb and would be a minimum of 1 metre clear
of building structures. Clearances, turning radii etc. should be sufficient to manoeuvre heavy rigid
vehicles. Pavement thickness should be determined by the geotechnical investigations carried out
including determination of CBR for subgrade material. Roadworks shall be designed in accordance
with ADWEA standard specification w-c-ss-010.
5.4.25 Water Drainage Systems

There are basically three different water drainage systems required for the pump stations:
Page 109 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
• Surface water drainage to take rainwater runoff from building roofs and road pavements to
soakaways.
• Sewage Water drainage taking discharge from toilets, showers etc. to a septic tank system.
• Contaminated water System taking water from process areas including pump hall,
chlorination rooms, and battery rooms discharging water to a main sump. Disposal from the
site is as specified in the Environmental permitting/ studies.
Gradients shall generally not be steeper than 1 in 75 nor flatter than 1 in 250 generally and with a
permissible deviation not greater than 1/20 of the given gradient. All pipes & fittings to be used on
the project shall comply with the requirements of the latest relevant British/other standards approved
by TRANSCO/ENGINEER. The joint sealing rings shall conform to BS 2494. Products to be procured with
BSI certification. The dimension & pressure rating of the pipes shall be in accordance with ISO 161/1.
Inspection Manholes shall be constructed of reinforced concrete or of solid concrete blocks and shall
be carried out in accordance with the relevant codes and specifications.
Water drainage systems shall be designed in accordance with ADWEA standard specification w-c-ss-
011.
5.4.26 Storm Water Drainage System

Separate drainage systems to be provided for the following:
• Sewage, a dedicated sewage network, discharges to a septic tank or local network.
• Contaminated water from industrial source, transformer. Include oil separator, post oil
separation discharge into local SWD system or onsite lagoon.
• Chlorinated water. Include neutralization, post neutralization discharge into local SWD
system or onsite lagoon.
• Stormwater into local SWD system or onsite lagoon.
• Overflow from tanks into local SWD system or onsite lagoon.
• Flow from surge vessels into local SWD system or onsite lagoon.
Drainage lagoon/ outfall structure

Where a local storm water drainage system is not present, Contractor should provide an onsite unlined
evaporation drainage lagoon.
5.4.27 Fencing and Site Security

Pumping station site shall be provided with a boundary wall and entry and exit motorised gates for
vehicle access. A separate man access gate shall also be provided beside the main gate.
All external areas including the road inside the plot shall be lit by pole mounted street light luminaries.
Requirement of site monitoring using CCTV cameras should be evaluated and provided if necessary.
This is further discussed in Instrument and Control System. Fencing Design shall comply with ADWEA
Standard Specification w-c-ss-013.
5.4.28 Painting and Coating

The external protection/coating system for the potable water pumping station shall be:
Page 110 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Alkali Resistant Acrylic based anti- carbonation coating + Sealer coat + filler Coat
• Epoxy binder / Sealer Coat – 100 microns thick.
• Alkali Resistant Acrylic based filler 100 microns thick.
• Alkali Resistant acrylic based anti- carbonation coating – 100 x 3 coats = 300 microns thick.
And internal coating for potable water pumping station shall be Solvent free 100% solid content
Polyamine based pure Epoxy 300 micron thick + primer system. Painting and Coating shall be in
accordance with ADWEA Standard Specifications w-c-ss-008, w-c-ss-014, and w-c-ss-015.
All structural steel shall be coated with fire resistant paint as per civil defence requirement.
5.4.29 Drawing Requirements

Design drawings for pump stations shall be drawn in accordance with Section4.5. In addition to these
general requirements, Pump Station Civil Works drawings shall include complete construction details.
Pump Station Civil Works drawings shall include but not be limited to the following details:
1. Site layout plan;
2. Earthworks drawing;
3. Pump station layout plan;
4. Footing Plans
5. Utility plan and Access road drawings;
6. Pump Station, Electrical Building and Administration Building - general arrangement showing
plans at different levels, multiple sections encompassing all details and elevations;
7. Surge vessel general arrangement drawings;
Electrical and control building, chlorination building, fire water pump house, compressor
building/room, QRM building, substation / switchgear building, guard house, administration building,
shall be designed in accordance with typical drawings provided in the Appendix.
5.5 General Civil / Structural Requirements – Reservoirs

Water reservoirs shall be designed and constructed as water tight retaining structures either from
reinforced in-situ concrete or post tensioning/ pre-stressed reinforced concrete or steel, as per the
project scope and in compliance to local codes & regulations.
Foundations shall be reinforced in-situ concrete designed as per recommendation of approved

geotechnical investigation report and ADWEA/ Engineer approval.
5.5.1 Selection of Reservoir Type

For the general requirements of TRANSCO, reservoirs would normally be constructed from welded
steel, reinforced concrete or post tensioned concrete. The choice between the three is dictated by
several factors:
• Site Location. If the reservoir site is to be located in an existing built up area it could be
expected that land availability is limited and visual impact is important. Therefore the likely
Page 111 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
design would be a low height structure utilizing the maximum site area possible for a single
structure (with compartmentalized cells for maintenance). This favours reinforced concrete
construction. If the site location is outside the existing built up area and taller structures are
required/ allowed then circular reservoirs would be preferred which favours welded steel and
post tensioned concrete in the likely size range TRANSCO utilize.
• Life Cycle Cost. Foe the acceptable technical solutions a life cycle cost analysis should be
carried out and reservoir type selected based on lowest Net Present Value.
5.5.2 Reinforced Concrete Reservoirs

Generally, these are rectangular with actual dimensions dependent on capacity required, land
availability and shape. Length to breath breadth ratio is recommended as 1.5:1. Maximum height
above ground shall be restricted to 5m (check with Planning Department restriction). Roof shall be
supported on columns to suit structural design. It should have sloping floor to outlet end at 1 in 200.
The design of the reservoir shall meet the following:
• ADWEA Standard Specifications for Concrete Works ‐ Specification for Civil/Structure General
Requirements for Water Works
• The latest edition of the BS, BS EN, ASTM, ACI, AASHTO, DIN and CIRIA
In addition, the following parameters shall be incorporated into the design:
• Minimum steel for crack control
• Concrete mix design
• Minimise shrinkage effect by pouring the sections of the work between construction joints in
a sequence such that there will be suitable time delays between adjacent pours.
• Curing methodology
• Single reinforced concrete structural elements are not permitted. Minimum wall thickness of
double reinforced structural elements to be 230mm wide
• Concrete pour heights for vertical elements to be minimised to prevent segregation
• Jointing and sealing methodology
5.5.2.1 Pre-Cast Concrete Works

The method statement of construction, erection, and assembly of precast concrete elements needs
to be approved by Client/Engineer prior to commencement of such works. The Contractor needs to
ensure that the delivered pre-cast concrete to site is in compliance with ADWEA requirements.
Construction of pre-cast concrete units shall follow British Standards such as BS 6073 PT 1 for concrete
blocks.
The size of coarse aggregates in pre-cast concrete shall not be bigger than 20mm. Casting of pre-cast
concrete is done in individual forms and curing can be done by steam curing or continuous water
curing. The curing duration for steam curing (at least 4 days) is less than continuous water curing (at
least 7 days) after which curing membrane is implemented or any other approved method. No
branding is allowed in the finished work of pre-cast concrete elements.
Page 112 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Mix design shall be in accordance with standard specification W-C-SS-005. If any deviation is proposed
by the supplier, then the Contractor needs to approach ADWEA/ENGINEER for their approval.
Time of lifting for pre-cast concrete units shall be determined by the supplier but it shall not be less
than 10 days.
For more details about pre-cast concrete; refer to section W-C-SS-005 “Specification for Concrete” of
ADWEA specifications.
5.5.2.2 Design Considerations

The quality of concrete, other materials and workmanship shall be adequate for safety, serviceability
and durability. The concrete reservoir shall be designed in such a manner that it sustains all loads and
deformations of normal construction and use and has adequate durability and resistance to the effects
of arid desert conditions and winds.
The grade of concrete shall be based on strength requirements for structures/items. However, the
lowest grade of concrete used for structural purposes shall be C40 i.e. concrete having a 28 days cube
compressive strength of 40N/mm2.
The reservoirs shall be designed in accordance with BS 8007, BS 8110 and ADWEA's design guidelines
and standards of water supply systems, and to the approval of the ADWEA/ENGINEER.
Reservoirs shall generally be covered and divided into suitable compartments if required for cleaning
requirements. Compartments shall be made with a full height dividing wall. The dividing wall shall be
designed such that either compartment may remain full of water to under roof soffit whilst the other
compartment is empty.
The minimum free board (top water level) shall be 300 mm to roof soffit or increased to accommodate
structural members (beams).
Reinforcement shall be steel reinforcing bars of minimum yield stress = 460 N/mm2 and conforming
to BS 4449.
The cement to be used throughout the works shall be ASTM Type II cement obtained from
manufacturers approved in writing by the ADWEA/ENGINEER. The cement to be used throughout the
works shall be decided based on the soil investigation report, otherwise, ASTM Type II (MSRC) cement
to be used for substructure (structure in contact with soil), reservoirs or any water retaining structure;
while ASTM Type I (OPC) cement to be used for superstructure or above ground concrete works as
approved by ADWEA/ENGINEER. However, MSRC Cement shall be used for column necks and any
above ground concreting works done as continuity to below ground concrete. MSRC Cement can also
be used for superstructures for Particular rooms exposed to chemicals and /or contaminated drained
water subject to ADWEA/EMGINEER approval. Contractor shall take necessary measures to ensure
that Concrete with OPC cement is not used for any substructures concrete works, until instructed by
ADWEA/ ENGINEER. MSRC Cement shall comply with ASTM C150 Type II, with C3A content of
maximum 8%.
5.5.3 Post Tensioned Concrete Reservoirs

Materials included in the design and construction of post tensioned concrete shall comply with BS
5896. This applies to any material embedded in the concrete as well as in direct contact with potable
water including concrete admixtures, plastic grouting tubes, sealants, seals and coatings.
The Contractor shall be required to provide a construction methodology, from his specialised post
tensioned concrete designer, for the acceptance by ADWEA/ENGINEER.
Page 113 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
The workshop will be used to confirm the details, methods and inspection points of the following:
1. Concrete casting sequence;

2. Concrete curing procedure;
3. Installation and stressing of post tensioning;
4. Grouting of sheathing and anchorage zones;
5. Method of manufacturing and quality control of precast components;
6. Installation of roof support structure;
7. Installation of roof;
8. Installation of fixtures and fittings; and
9. Installation of pipe penetrations.
5.5.3.1 Concrete floor and wall footing

The floor and wall footing can be constructed as either a post tensioned concrete slab or as a
reinforced concrete slab.
For post tensioned option the floor and wall footing shall be designed and constructed as a continuous
unjointed post tensioned concrete slab thickened below the wall, below column supports, at scour
drop boxes and at pipe penetrations.
The floor shall be laid on two layers of 300 micron polyethylene building film to allow movement
during tensioning. The building film shall be laid on a bedding layer appropriate to the reservoir floor
and, if installed, appropriate to the under floor drainage system. This bedding layer shall also comply
with the post tensioning design subgrade friction requirements.
For reinforced concrete floor slab construction, the concrete should be constructed in square
segments with maximum segment dimension approximately 6 metres. All joints shall have water stop
cast in place or alternatively a hydrophilic water seal such as ‘hydrotite’.
The floor shall be finished by steel trowelling to a smooth surface. The concrete floor and wall footing
shall have 20 mm by 45o chamfer on all exposed, external corners.
Any temporary anchor bolts installed in the floor shall be chemical anchors using 316 stainless steel,
for example, for temporary props used during construction which shall be cut off when no longer
required and then heavily coated with epoxy.
The external surface of the wall footing shall be no more than 300 mm above the finished ground level
so that guardrailing is avoided.
5.5.3.2 Post tension concrete wall

The reservoir wall shall be designed and constructed from post tensioned concrete. Reservoir wall
vertical stitch joints for precast concrete wall panels shall have a ‘keyed’ profile and include
overlapping reinforcement of adjacent panels on both faces. A hydrophilic water seal such as
‘Hydrotite or similar approved’ shall be applied to each vertical face. Post tensioning ducts at the joints
shall be well aligned, sealed and checked to be clear of debris prior to pouring of the wall stitch joints.
The ducts shall be checked to be clear of any ingress of cement or mortar immediately after the joint
is poured. This shall include water flushing till clear and then dry the ducts with dry compressed air.
5.5.3.3 Stressing material

Stressing material for post tensioned concrete shall be high strength steel 7 wire strand stress relieved
tendons complying with BS 4486 and BS 5896.
Page 114 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Tendon anchorages shall be in accordance with latest standards. Stressing tendon ducts shall be zinc
coated steel, so constructed that ingress of cement or mortar during concreting is prevented. The duct
shall have a maximum friction curvature coefficient M of 0.25.
5.5.3.4 Stressing Operations

All stressing operations shall be performed in strict accordance with the relevant manufacturer’s
specifications and under the specialist designer’s full time, on site supervision.
The pre-stressing force shall be checked by reading the jacking pressures and the elongation of the
strands. All gauges shall be calibrated before dispatch to the site, and a chart drawn up plotting gauge
reading versus applied jacking force.
Jacks shall incorporate a provision for hydraulically or manually locking off the wedges to limit draw
in to 8 mm. If the draw in on anchoring is greater than 8 mm, then the strand shall be re-stressed.
Stressing acceptance criteria are as follows:
1. Acceptance at +/- 5% of the theoretical extension.
2. More than 5% of theoretical extension shall be investigated and reported on by the specialist
designer and will be subject to Icon Water instruction to un-stress and re-stress and/or liable
to rejection.
Cable extensions shall be calculated and measured on the basis that an initial force sufficient to
remove all slack is applied before measurements are commenced.
All stressing tendon ducts shall be grouted after acceptance to do so by ADWEA/ENGINEER is issued.
5.5.3.5 Wall / Floor Joint and Wall / Roof Joint

The wall should be mounted on an elastomeric pad sitting on the floor footing. The wall floor joint
should have a water stop / hydrophilic water seal to prevent leakage. The joint should allow for sliding
movement of the wall over the slab footing.
Where the roof of the reservoir is of concrete slab construction then a bearing pad is also required
between the top of the wall and the roof slab. The bearing pad should be positively secured at the top
of the wall
5.5.3.6 Welded steel reservoirs

All materials included in the design and construction of welded steel reservoirs shall comply with BS
6920 including sealants, seals and coatings. Reservoirs shall be designed in accordance with API 650.
The reservoir is to be supported by reinforced concrete ring beam around its circumference and
engineered pavement to a thickness determined from the geotechnical and geophysical
investigations. Roof shall be a conical steel structure supported on outside steel wall and roof beams/
trusses with interior columns.
The constructor shall be required to provide detailed design and construction methodology for
acceptance by ADWEA/ENGINEER.
Refer to Mechanical Works section of this guideline for further details of requirements for steel tank
construction.
Page 115 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
5.5.3.7 Bolted Steel Panel Reservoirs
Bolted Steel Storage Tanks would normally only be used for storing small quantities of water such as
for fire pump service tank. For details of bolted steel tank guidelines refer to Mechanical Works
Section of this Guideline.
5.5.4 Pipework layout

5.5.4.1 Inlet pipework
The reservoir inlet pipe shall include a vertical standpipe pipe inside the reservoir located with its
centreline within 1 metre of the reservoir wall.
The inlet pipe shall be designed for maximum inflow rate for the reservoir.
The inlet pipework in the reservoir shall nominally be DI in a post tensioned concrete reservoir and
steel in a welded steel reservoir with surface protection complying with ADWEA Standard
Specifications. An alternative material for both types of reservoir is 316 stainless steel without surface
protection.
The inlet standpipe shall terminate with a flanged connection at 0.7 m above the reservoir floor.
The inlet pipework shall not be used to vent the reservoir bypass pipework.
5.5.4.2 Outlet pipework

The outlet pipe shall be sized to ensure that, while drawing the specified firefighting flow at points
within 150 metres of the fire ground (concurrently with peak hour demands), residual pressures in the
reticulation mains do not fall below the equivalent of 10 metres head. This residual is to be achieved
with the reservoir at half capacity and an allowance for reservoir outlet losses of 1.5 metres.
The reservoir outlet shall be located with its centreline within 2 metres of the reservoir wall and
separated by an arc of 180o from the inlet. The outlet shall be at a level of 150 mm above the reservoir
floor. The lip on the outlet shall be within 2 mm of level all round and shall be 1.6 times the nominal
outlet pipe diameter. The lip level shall be used as the zero point for water level monitoring. The outlet
shall be covered with mesh for personnel protection. Mesh shall be 100x100x3 bars and shall be 316
stainless steel in post tensioned concrete reservoirs and carbon steel with surface protection in steel
reservoirs.
The outlet pipework in the reservoir shall nominally be DI in a post tensioned concrete reservoir and
steel in a welded steel reservoir with surface protection complying with ADWEA Standard
Specifications.
5.5.4.3 Reservoir bypass pipework

Pipework shall include a bypass between inlet and outlet for when the reservoir is out of service. The
bypass pipe size shall be no less than one standard size smaller than the outlet pipe size. The bypass
isolation valves shall be flanged gate valves, hand wheel operated which shall be provided with heavy
chain for padlocking in closed position.
A pressure reducing valve shall be provided to control the pressure in the outlet main to mimic the
reservoir. Where the TWL of the reservoir is below 675 m AHD, a pressure relief pipe is to be provided
via an open ended pipe, with no valves to be installed on the pressure relief pipe.
5.5.4.4 Overflow pipework

The reservoir overflow pipe shall be a vertical pipe inside the reservoir. The overflow pipe shall be at
least one standard size larger than the size of the inflow pipework. The reservoir overflow rate shall
Page 116 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
be equal to the maximum possible inlet flow rate (not the design maximum inflow) for the reservoir
and shall be used to design the overflow pipework size and design the overflow weir (bellmouth). The
crest of the overflow weir shall be 80 mm above the reservoir TWL and 220 mm below the underside
of the reservoir roof structure. The maximum water depth over the weir shall not exceed 120 mm.
The reservoir overflow pipe shall not have any valves and shall discharge to the de-chlorination pit.
The overflow pipe shall have a flanged connection 300 mm above the reservoir floor.
The overflow pipework shall be DICL in a post tensioned concrete reservoir and steel in a welded steel
reservoir with surface protection complying with ADWEA Standard Specification.
5.5.4.5 Under floor drainage system

Where the geotechnical investigations report identifies the need for under floor drainage, design of
the under floor drainage system shall include drain layout partitioned to assist location of reservoir
leakage. Partitioned under floor drains shall separately discharge to the de-chlorination pit. Work as
executed drawings shall record the location of partitions in the under floor drainage and identify the
partition location and the underfloor drainage pipe connected to the respective partition.
5.5.5 Accessories
5.5.5.1 Access Manholes and Ladders
Access manholes, 1500 mm x 1500 mm clear opening shall be provided on the roof of the reservoirs
with modified glass reinforced plastic access ladders and safety cages provided at each opening.
External access shall be provided by galvanised mild steel ladders, 450 mm wide, butted against the
wall. Galvanised mild steel safety cages shall be provided for the ladders.
5.5.5.2 Ventilation
150mm diameter pipe with integral deodoriser and mosquito mesh provided for every 400m² of roof.
5.5.5.3 Water Level Indication

Manometer tube 80mm diameter fixed to outside of reservoir wall with flip-type colour indicators and
relayed to distribution centre.
5.5.5.4 Cathodic Protection System

The provision of cathodic protection system for steel tanks shall be in accordance with ADWEA
Standard Specification w-m-ss-011 and as discussed in the Mechanical Section of this Guideline.
5.5.6 Earthworks
The following aspects shall be considered in earthworks:
• Procurement and supply of material, delivery, transportation, handling and storing at site
• Dewatering and its safe disposal
• Excavation/backfilling
• Stockpiling and disposal of excavated material
• All necessary safety measures including locating underground services and working adjacent
to them
Page 117 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
5.5.7 Roadworks and Drainage
Reservoirs shall be provided with adequate access to carry out regular operation and maintenance.
Asphalt roads shall be provided for motorable access for transporting heavy components. Walkways
in interlock tiles shall be provided to facilitate operation and maintenance.
The stormwater drainage of the reservoir site shall be designed to discharge to the low side of the
site. Discharge shall be piped to where the natural slope changes from steep to gradual and from there
shall become surface flow following natural drainage lines.
Storm flow cut off drains shall be provided on the high side of the reservoir site to divert stormwater
runoff away from the base of the reservoir.
Site grading around the edge of the reservoir shall be designed to carry over land storm flow as well
as reservoir roof storm flow. This stormwater flow shall be directed to drainage pits and pipework.
Minimum size of stormwater pipework shall be 160 uPVC. Stormwater pits shall be provided at
changes of direction of pipework. Stormwater pits shall be cast in situ reinforced concrete and shall
be structurally designed and comply with the requirements of ADWEA Standard Specifications for
Concrete.
5.5.8 Fencing and Area Lighting

A boundary chain link fence shall be provided around the reservoirs and associated pump station plot.
The reservoir area shall be lit by high mast mounted flood light of minimum 25m and the road inside
the plot shall be lit by pole mounted street light luminaries.
5.5.9 Painting and coating

Paint for coating tanks and pipes should be any substances harmful to human health. Paint shall be
approved by a recognized international laboratory.
5.5.9.1 Coating Systems for Fabricated Steel Tanks

Protection of fabricated carbon steel components is required for all reservoirs. All coatings shall be
applied on-site with provision for full encapsulation.
All surfaces to be protective coated using solvent-less high build epoxy shall be blast cleaned. All
surfaces to be protective coated shall be free from rust, mill scale, oil, grease, dust or other
contaminants and shall be thoroughly dry and clean. All irregularities on the surface, including weld
spatter, welding slag etc. shall be removed by grinding flush prior to blasting. Sharp edges shall be
rounded (radius not less than 10 mm) before blasting.
The coating for all internal surfaces shall be two (2) coats of a high build solvent-less epoxy, each coat
consisting of a minimum DFT (Dry Film Thickness) of 250 microns.
The coating for the reservoir external surfaces is to be a zinc epoxy to manufacturer's requirements
with a solvent borne acrylic as the topcoat also to manufacturer's requirements.
5.5.9.2 External Surfaces (Inland Tank >5km to Coast)

The coating for the reservoir external surfaces is to be two (2) coats of an inorganic zinc silicate to a
minimum dry film thickness of 75 microns per coat.
While preference is for the inorganic zinc finish, where site aesthetics are required, apply an additional
coating of solvent borne acrylic topcoat to manufactures requirements.
Page 118 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
5.6 Drawing Requirements

Design drawings for reservoirs shall be drawn in accordance with Section 4.5. In addition to these
general requirements, Reservoir Civil Works drawings shall include complete construction details.
Reservoir Civil Works drawings shall include but not be limited to the following details:
1. Site layout drawings of the whole site including security fence layout;
2. Drainage drawings;
3. Access road drawings;
4. Reservoir general arrangement showing location of inlet, outlet, overflow, scours;
5. Reservoir Structural drawings including post tensioning details;
6. Under floor drainage partitioning and pipework location;
7. Light weight roof structure drawings ;
8. Concrete roof slab drawings;
9. Valve chambers and drainage pits;
10. Pipework and equipment layout drawings;
11. Buried conduit layout drawings;
12. Embedded conduit arrangement;
Additional drawings other than those listed may also be specified to be provided as part of the design.
5.6.1 Testing and Commissioning

All Water retaining structures shall be water tight. Inspection and testing of structure and testing for
liquid tightness should be in accordance with EN 1992-3 to determine the overall water tightness of
the constructed structure and particularly the joints in the concrete.
Hydro testing shall only be commenced after completion of the reservoir construction including the
top slab (if it is designed as monolithic with the walls) and before application of any internal or external
coating / water proofing and before commencement of backfilling.
After the construction of the reservoir, the Contractor shall remove all dirt and foreign materials from
inside the reservoir and shall clean down the walls, floor, columns and underside of the roof with
potable water. All debris and water used for cleaning shall be removed from site.
Concrete defects (if any), such as honey combing, cracks, pin holes, etc. shall be repaired as per
approved material and methodology. Internal & external cones of formwork tie rods shall be filled
with approved material. Elastic sealant shall be applied for the joints as per manufacturer instruction.
After completion of the surface preparation & cleaning the reservoir shall be inspected by the ADWEA
/ ENGINEER. Testing and disinfecting of the reservoir or tank shall not commence until written
approval is given by ADWEA /ENGINEER. The entire material to be used for repair works shall be
certified as Non‐Toxic
Page 119 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
5.6.1.1 Filling the Reservoirs and Hydrostatic Testing
Before any coating application, the reservoir should be initially filled to the normal maximum level
with potable water at a uniform rate of not greater than 2m height in 24h.
Initially, a 21 days stabilizing period shall be allowed, while absorption and autogenously healing take
place. After the stabilizing period the level of the water surface should be recorded at 24 hour intervals
for a test period of 7 days. After this 7 days test period if the total permissible drop in level, after
allowing for evaporation and rainfall, does not exceed 1/500th of the average water depth of the full
tank or 10mm whichever is lesser, the tank shall be deemed water tight.
Notwithstanding the satisfactory completion of the test, any evidence of seepage of the water to the
outside faces of the water- retaining wall should be assessed against the requirement of the
specification.
Should the structure not satisfy the 7 days test, then after the completion of the remedial work it
should be refilled and if necessary left for a further stabilizing period; a further test of 7 days duration
should then be undertaken in accordance with the above.
No backfilling around the walls of the reservoirs shall be commenced until the successful completion
of testing.
The Contractor shall provide a warranty for water tightness of reservoirs for 10 years.
5.6.1.2 Disinfection/Sterilization of Concrete Reservoirs

The internal surfaces of the structure shall then be thoroughly washed with clean water containing 20
parts per million of chlorine for 24 hours. The chlorinated water shall then be drained away and the
structure filled with potable water. Disinfection /Testing shall be in accordance with AWWA C652
5.7 Design Data

5.7.1 Meteorological data
Climatic conditions can be severe. Dust storms are prevalent and the atmosphere is humid and
corrosive. Refer General technical specification (W-G-SS-001) for climatic condition.
5.7.2 Different Design Loads

5.7.2.1 Dead Loads
The Dead load should be classified as permanent fixed action, such as (not limited to) self-weight,
partition walls, roof & floor finishing, earth load, etc...
Dead Loads shall be taken in accordance to the ADIBC and ASCE 7-05 “Minimum design loads for
buildings & other structures”.
5.7.2.2 Imposed Loads/ Live Loads

Imposed loads shall be classified as variable free actions. Impose loads are temporary, short duration
or moving load. All the imposed Loads shall be taken in accordance with Abu Dhabi International
Building Code. (ADIBC) and the related ACI/AISC/ASCE Codes. (mainly ASCE 7 -05 “Minimum Design
Loads for Buildings & other Structures”).
In addition to the aforesaid codes, the following additional live loads shall be taken into account:
• The loads for platforms and chamber cover slabs shall be 5.0 KN/m², or a minimum single point
load of 7.50 KN whichever is more unfavourable for the structure.
Page 120 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
• Platforms and chamber cover slabs which may be subject to traffic loads shall be designed to a
traffic load of SLW60 (equivalent to 33.33KN/ m²) distributed load.
• Sand load shall be additive to live loads when area under consideration is used as a work area. The
effect of sand accumulating behind barriers walls and up stands shall be considered in the design
of walls and roofs.
Imposed loads shall be taken from the aforementioned Codes and as required by TRANSCO, whichever
contributes to the worst load case. The minimum design live loads on all floors will be based on the
static and dynamic loading from plant and equipment (Data provided by Vendor) plus the relative
imposed load taken from aforementioned codes”. In vicinity of heavy traffic, Surcharge Imposed Live
Load of 33.33 KN/m² (equivalent to SLW 60 single Wheel Load as per DIN 1072) shall be considered at
the side of chamber’s walls, retaining walls, etc.”
5.7.2.3 Wind Loads

Wind load on buildings / Structures shall be calculated as per Abu Dhabi International Building Code
(ADIBC) and related ACI/AISC/ASCE/SDPS Codes (mainly SDPS WS “Special Design Provisions for Wind
& Seismic Standard (ANSI/AF & PA SDPS”).
The basic wind speed shall be obtained/calculated as per the Code guides, provided that the
mean/and or the maximum wind speed on which the peak wind velocity pressure will be calculated
shall not be less than 160 km/hr. (45 m/sec).
5.7.2.4 Seismic Loads

Seismic load on buildings / Structures shall be calculated as per Abu Dhabi International Building Code
(ADIBC) and the related ACI/AISC/ASCE/SDPS Codes mainly:
SDPS WS (2008) “Special Design Provisions for Wind & Seismic Standard (ANSI/AF &
PA SDPS – 2008”.
AISC 341 – 05 “Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings”.
The seismic zone for UAE shall be taken as per the guidelines of the subject Code and the Contractor
shall reconfirm with the concerned Municipality based on their latest circular in respect of the above.
5.7.2.5 Hydrostatic Load

Hydrostatic Load shall be the hydrostatic pressure of water contained in the tank or in a chamber or
any other concrete structures retaining aqueous liquids, considering maximum level. The hydrostatic
pressure shall also be the horizontal water pressure acting on the tank/chamber walls, the vertical
water pressure acting downward on tank/chamber base slab and / or the upward water pressure
acting on the tank/chamber base slab; resulting from the ground water table.
5.7.2.6 Dynamic Loads

Each structure shall be designed to withstand the effects of vibration and impact to which it may be
subjected. Each structure and foundation supporting a compressor, pump etc. having significant
dynamic unbalance shall be designed to resist the peak loads specified by the manufacturer. Vibration
amplitudes of the supporting structure or foundation shall be kept within acceptable limits of dynamic
forces that occur during normal machine operation. The frequency ratio i.e. ratio of frequency of
disturbing moment and/ or forces to the natural frequency of vibrations of foundation block and
machinery system shall be within the limits provided in per ACI 351.3R-04 and BS-CP 2012 or
equivalent code subject to TRANSCO/ Engineer approval.
Page 121 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
The equipment having low amplitude/ vibrations shall be dealt with the recommendations of relevant
codes/ standards.
The foundation to equipment weight ratio shall not be less than 3 to 1.
The natural frequency of the foundation and equipment shall not coincide with any resonant
frequency (dynamic excitation frequency of the equipment) and complying with the codes.
The loads pertaining to the equipment to be considered are those given by the
MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER, together with the conventional loads as listed in this Specification, (dead,
imposed, piping, seismic, wind, erection etc.) as found applicable.
Crane and monorail loads provided by MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER shall be considered at their

maximum values, including the lifting capacity as well as the maximum horizontal loads caused by
braking or acceleration, producing worst conditions.
The soil parameters shall be taken from the final geotechnical investigation report. The dynamic Soil
parameters shall be addressed in the detailed geotechnical investigation report by the Contractor
which are:
• Cu = Soil Coefficient of Elastic Uniform Compression (KN/m³).
• Cr = Soil Coefficient of Elastic Uniform Shear (KN/m³).
• Cɸ = Soil Coefficient of Non‐Uniform Compression (KN/m³).
• Cs = Soil Coefficient of Non‐Uniform Shear (KN/m³).
If the building or structure is founded on isolated footing or isolated pile caps with connecting tie
beams, machinery foundation and the associated pipe supports shall be independent of adjacent
foundations. Surrounding concrete slabs or paving shall be separated from machinery foundation by
a 20 mm joint formed with compressible material and sealed with an approved elastic sealant.
If the building or structure is founded on raft slab foundation or raft slab on piles, machinery
foundation and the associated pipe supports shall be monolithically cast with the said raft slab with
the necessary reinforced concrete plinth.
Reinforcement shall be used at all faces, if the foundation is over 1 m thick, shrinkage reinforcement
should be spaced approximately 600 mm, in three directions (cube reinforcing with minimum bar
diameter of 16 mm).
5.7.2.7 Thermal Loads

When thermal expansion results in friction between equipment or pipes and supports, the friction
forces shall be taken as the operating load on the support times the applicable friction coefficient
given in the table below.
Thermo-Mechanical Forces and Stresses
Buildings, Structures, Foundations and liquid retaining structures (including fireproofing) which are
subject to thermo-mechanical effects shall also be designed for the thermal loads and for any
temperature difference that may occur.
Page 122 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
5.7.2.8 Loads during Erection and Maintenance
All possible loading conditions during erection and maintenance shall be taken into account. The most
unfavourable condition shall be taken into account for each member.
The loads of scaffolding, including the wind loads, due to erection and maintenance shall be taken into
account for the design of the structure.
5.7.2.9 Piping Loads

Loads from piping shall be included in the design of all applicable structures.
5.7.2.10 Overhead Crane Loads

Crane and monorail loads provided by MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER shall be considered at their
maximum values, including the lifting capacity as well as the maximum horizontal loads caused by
braking or acceleration, producing worst conditions.
The design of Gantry girders (Runaway beams) shall be in accordance with Abu Dhabi International
Building Code and the related ACI/AISC/ASCE/SDPS Codes.
5.7.2.11 Other Loads

The buildings/structures shall also be designed for other loads (if subjected to) such as but not limited
to, traffic movement action, accidental actions, actions on structures exposed to fire, etc.., in
compliance to relevant Abu Dhabi Building Code & other regulation.
5.7.2.12 Loads Combinations

The design loads combinations are various combinations of the load cases for which the structure
needs to be designed for. The services and ultimate loads combination with the necessary loads
factors shall be applied as per the relative design Code adopted for the design.
5.7.3 Acceptance Criteria

The Consultants / Contractor shall follow the Acceptance Criteria in line with ADWEA Standard
Specification Ref. W – C – SS – 003 – Rev01.
5.7.4 Design Equations

The foundations shall be designed and constructed to safely prevent overturning, base failure, uplift
and sliding. Due consideration shall be taken to the risk of detrimental deformation and settlement
of the soil. Rotation (angle of inclination), horizontal and vertical movements of the foundations as a
result of compression of the soil, must not exceed that which is acceptable with regard to the resulting
forces in the structures and the safe operation of the electrical equipment.
Design of foundation shall be carried out by using the limit state design method at the ultimate limit
state for the applicable load combination.
The overall foundation stability, allowable bearing capacity, sliding, overturning, floatation, rotation,
etc.; shall be checked at serviceability limit state with factors of safety Specified in this Specification.
In the sliding check the friction resistance at foundation base shall be considered zero in case of
application of water proofing membrane above the blinding.
In all the cases the active soil pressure can be developed only within a wedge of soil between the wall
and failure plane passing through the lower end of the wall and at angle of (45˚ + ɸ/2) to the
horizontal. Whilst the passive soil pressure can be developed only within a wedge of soil between the
wall and failure plane passing through the lower end of the wall and at angle of (45˚ + ɸ/2) to the
vertical. Where ɸ is the soil angle of internal friction
Page 123 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
In case of constructing the valve chamber, thrust blocks, anchor blocks, etc., above the ground (i.e. in
a bund), then the soil passive resistance shall not be entrusted above the original ground level (i.e. to
be considered as Zero); whilst the passive earth pressure shall be considered below the original ground
level.
When shear key is required shear key of a minimum depth of 500 mm shall be provided in order to
develop full soil to soil friction.
Ground water level shall be considered for high tide condition or as specified in Abu Dhabi building
code.
The recommended allowable soil bearing capacity should be as specified in the Final Detailed
Geotechnical Survey Report approved by ADWEA/ Engineer.
While calculating the stresses on soil, the passive earth pressure shall not be considered fully
developed unless the structure tends to move. The actual passive earth pressure shall be considered
as the total acting forces minus the resistance base friction force. The Contractor can verify the said
actual developed soil passive forces using relevant geotechnical software programme.
5.7.5 Factor of Safety

For design of any thrust restraint system such as but not limited to: valve chambers, thrust blocks,
anchor blocks, etc. The factor of safety for sliding, overturning and rotation shall be considered as
Follows:
Table 5.2 – Thrust Forces & Factors of Safety.
Load Case Impact Forces Resistance forces FOS
Load Case # 1. Thrust load based on 1. Base Friction. 1.2

1 hydrostatic test pressure
which is higher.
2. Soil Passive earth pressure
2. Full soil active pressure. above the base slab Multiplied
by 0.5.
3. Full Soil Passive pressure earth

3. All other unfavourable
below the base slab; including
loads.
the shear key.

2 maximum operating or
design pressure.
2. Soil Passive earth pressure
2. Full soil active pressure. above the base slab
1. Multiplied by 0.5.
3. All other unfavourable
loads.
below the base slab; including
the shear key.
Page 124 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
3 maximum operating or
design pressure
2. Zero Soil Passive earth pressure
2. Full soil active pressure. above the base slab

3. All other unfavourable below the base slab; including
loads. the shear key.

4 maximum allowable
transient pressure or test
2. Zero Soil Passive earth pressure
pressure which is higher.
above the base slab
2. Full soil active pressure.
3. All other unfavourable below the base slab; including
loads. the shear key.
The Factor of safety for the uplift resistance is 1.4. Care shall be taken to check the flotation based on
the high tied condition; where the ground water table is at its highest high level. Meteorological data
to be obtained by the Contractor from the concerned Authority prior to commencement of the design.
For all load cases, dead loads of backfill can be taken into account beneficial if it is ensured that the
structure will be backfilled prior to testing the piping. This is reliable for base friction and earth
pressure.
The influence of ground water shall be taken into account.
5.7.6 Design Software

The Consultants / Contractor shall use design, modelling and optimising software for different aspects
of the transmission system. These shall include but not be limited to Structural, Hydraulic, Surge
analysis, Pipe stress, Electrical and HVAC. The software shall be internationally recognized and more
importantly acceptable to TRANSCO.
5.7.7 Foundation Design Criteria

Pressure for safe bearing foundation shall be as per the recommendations of the final detailed
Geotechnical investigation report. Detailed designs for all foundations are to be prepared by the
Contractor in accordance with the relevant clauses of the Specification. In case of piled foundation
the minimum number of piles under any foundation will be two piles.
The Consultants / Contractor shall follow the Foundation Design in line with ADWEA Standard
Specification Ref. W – C – SS – 003 – Rev01.
Page 125 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
5.7.7.1 Stability
Machinery foundations should be designed to spread the load of installed machinery on to the ground
so that excessive settlement or tilting of the foundation block relative to the floor or other fixed
installations will not occur; they should have sufficient rigidity to prevent fracture being under stresses
set up by heavy concentrated loads, or by unbalanced rotating or reciprocating machinery; They
should absorb or damp down vibrations in order to prevent damage or nuisance to adjacent
installations or structures.
5.7.7.2 Piping Design

The pipe supports for above ground piping system, shall be designed considering the load outcomes
from the pipe stress analysis.
5.7.8 H&S, Quality Requirements

Please refer to Section 4.7.
5.7.9 Design Life

Design and choice of construction materials shall consider and ensure minimizing maintenance works,
and therefore, all civil elements shall be designed to result in a durable construction with a minimum
design life of 50 years.
5.7.10 Optimization
Optimization shall be an integral part of design and construction to deliver the best value solution.
Designers / Contractors shall focus on both technical and commercial aspects of the project.
Optioneering and innovation play an important role in optimisation. Whilst optioneering helps in
finding most feasible techno-economical solution, innovation helps in delivering robust and
sustainable solutions.
5.7.10.1 Value Management

Value management shall be applied for achieving improved design, construction, and cost-
effectiveness. It is a method of highlighting possible opportunities to create value within a project
and subsequently managing those solutions to ensure value is continuously delivered.
It encompasses the whole life cycle of a project, from design to completion and beyond. The process
is undertaken in collaboration with the project team, understanding and managing the balance
between cost, time and performance.
The main benefit of VM is that it gives each and every project a clear path to create value through the
understanding of client objectives as well as the needs and wants of the stakeholders. The route to
delivery is agreed and developed with the full project team, with the understanding that solutions to
achieve the objectives are reliable and cost-effective.
5.7.10.2 Cost Considerations

The following costs shall be considered during design and construction stages of the project:
a) Design costs
b) Construction cost (civil, mechanical, electrical, instrumentation and control)
c) Permits and NOCs
d) Insurances and banking cost
e) Land costs, if applicable
Page 126 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
f) Charges for water, sewage and drainage connections
g) Charges for electricity connection
h) Other administrative charges
Page 127 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
6 Electrical Works
6.1 Introduction
contracts for TRANSCO. They are to be read in conjunction with the latest versions of the following
documents:
• The Electricity Supply Regulations 2007 (Regulation & Supervision Bureau Water, Wastewater
and Electricity Sector Emirate of Abu Dhabi)
• The Electricity Wiring Regulations (3rd Edition) (Regulation & Supervision Bureau Water,
Wastewater and Electricity Sector Emirate of Abu Dhabi)
• ADWEA Standard Electrical Specifications for Water Works (W-E-SS-001 to W-E-SS-014)
• ADWEA/ADDC/ACDC Standard S-AAA-GEN-SFL General Requirements System Characteristics
• UAE Fire and Life Safety Code of Practice 2011 Edition (chapters 5 & 6)
6.1.1 Provided by TRANSCO

The following input data will be provided by TRANSCO to the Contractor on commencement of the
study:
• Existing TRANSCO electrical network models (if any)

• As built drawings (existing systems)
• Operation and Control philosophy (existing systems)
6.1.2 Provided by the Contractor

The following input data will be collected by the Contractor:
• Earth Resistivity measurements at the site

• Manufacturer’s equipment electrical characteristics equipment
6.1.3 Abbreviations
AFE Active Front End Drives
CAPEX Capital Expenditure
DB Distribution Board
DE Drive End
LGD Lightning Ground Density
LV Low Voltage
MCCB Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
MSB Main Switchboard
MV Medium Voltage
NDE Non Drive End
ONAN Oil Natural Air Natural
ONAF Oil Natural Air Forced
Page 128 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
OFAF Oil Forced Air Forced
OPEX Operating Expenditure
PWM Pulse Width Modulated
RTD Resistance Temperature Detector
SSO Switched Socket Outlet
UPS Uninterrupted Power supply
VSD Variable Speed Drive
6.1.4 General Environmental Parameters

The following environmental design requirements shall apply unless advised otherwise by TRANSCO:
• Outdoor Humidity 100%

• Outdoor Temperature (under Shade) 55°C
• Ground Temperature (Max, Avg, Min) at 0.5m below GL
• Ground Temperature (Max, Avg, Min) at 1.0m below GL
• Indoor Humidity (Max, Avg, Min) 20- 80%
• Indoor Temperature Pump Room 50°C
• Indoor Temperature Control Room 45°C
• Conformal coating Requirement (IEC 60721-3-3) Class 3C2
• Mechanically Active Substances (IEC 60721-3-3 Classification of environmental conditions) class
3S3
6.2 Design Philosophy

The electrical system shall be designed to provide safe and economical operation of the plant.
The electrical design shall take into account:
• Safety to personnel and equipment in construction, operation and maintenance.

• Reliability of services.
• Minimum fire risk.
• Equipment compliance.
• Cost effectiveness.
• Ease of maintenance and convenience of operation including accessibility to equipment.
• Adequate provision for changes during design development and for future expansion and
modification (as appropriate engineering and or space provisions).
• Maximum interchangeability.
• Automatic protection of all electrical equipment and isolation of faulty system through
selective relaying systems or intelligent control devices.
6.2.1 Electrical Safety

In addition to the Wiring Regulations the following requirements shall apply
• Substations shall be in-accessible to unauthorised persons.

• Outdoor transformers shall be installed in fenced locked compounds, appropriate warning
signage shall be installed
• Equipment shall be designed and installed to ensure safe operation at all times.
Page 129 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
• Consideration shall be given to interlock systems that prevent inadvertent operation of
equipment e.g. energisation of equipment by back feeds, remote control of equipment,
closure of earth switches and bus-ties and the like.
• Insulation and dielectric materials shall be non-toxic or contain compounds persistent or
hazardous environmental containments.
6.2.2 Safety in Design (SID)

In addition to the mandatory requirements covered by the wiring regulations the Consultant needs to
consider safety in design with respect to constructability and ongoing maintenance. This would
normally involve attendance of SID workshops and is separate from HAZOP studies.
Issues to be considered include are safe egress from switchboard rooms, outward opening doors from
switch-rooms, alternative emergency exit paths (when the fault level is greater than 15kA), exits, a
working access around switchboards and panels, e.g. a minimum of 600mm unimpeded space around
a switchboard when either doors are fully open or equipment is racked out. Safety from falling from
heights when accessing instruments. Consideration of access for replacement of panels, once finishing
joinery has been completed.
6.2.3 Power Supply

Power is distributed in the Emirate of Abu Dhabi at either 11kV or 33kV by either the Al Ain Distribution
Company (AADC) supplying the municipality of Al Ain or the Abu Dhabi Distribution Company for the
remainder of the emirate including the western regions. Unless stated otherwise in the brief to the
Consultant, the distribution company will be able to provide two incoming supplies to the pump
station site.
The power supply and distribution for the pump stations will be designed with dual feed configuration,
the scheme will provide high speed bus transfer systems and automatic transfer systems, dual
transformers , dual switchboards with bus couplers so that no single fault or loss of power in the
system will compromise the pumping capability of the pump station. Essential and critical LV services
will be backed up by UPS. The intention of this design is that the sub stations, transformers,
switchboards and motor control centres will distribute the critical loads equally on their buses.
6.3 Concept Design

The initial planning requirements are to determine the electrical maximum demand for the plant and
the foot print of the major electrical equipment. Care needs to be taken at this stage that assumptions
made about the electrical topology (e.g. distribution, motor voltage, transformer sizes etc.) are not
locked in as the optimum solution should be explored during the preliminary design phase.
In developing the Concept Design the Consultant shall co-ordinate with the relevant distribution
company, ADDC or AADC to confirm the expected load/maximum demand and to ensure the network
has sufficient capacity and to ensure that there is sufficient information to plan and build any required
expansion of the associated network.
The Concept Design Deliverables shall be:
• Single Line drawing/schematic showing the common connection points, incoming

arrangement, required transformers, MV switch boards, LV switch boards (not including
ancillary or distribution boards), transmission pump sets with MV VSDs
• Space requirements of the following equipment for input into the building envelope design:
o HV switchyard and Incoming transformers
Page 130 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
o MV switch rooms showing MV switchboards, MV motor control centres and control
panels
o Site MV distribution network and cable routes
o MV / LV transformers
o LV switch rooms showing LV switch boards, LV motor control centres and control
panels
o MV VSDs and any associated phase shifting transformers
• UPS topology and battery room
• Tabulated load list for each voltage level showing the major connected loads, duty and
diversity. These loads to include water transmission pumps, fire pumps and total conditioning
loads.
6.4 Preliminary Design

The most important outcome of this stage is to determine the electrical topology, the voltage levels
of the motors and the motor starter drive requirements.
The purpose of the preliminary design is to provide detailed enough information to go to tender to
obtain a competitive bid from Contractors who will carry out the detail design.
The Consultant shall carry out preliminary design studies to develop the concept report to confirm
• Transformer Loading and transformer sizes

• Voltage level of major pumps and drives
• Selection of generic motor drives and co-ordination with hydraulic engineer on motor
selection
• Fault levels at the switchboards, three phase and single phase to earth
• Updated ventilation and air conditioning requirements,
• Sizing of UPS system
Deliverables from the preliminary design shall include
• Updated single line drawings showing.

o Bus bar ratings required current ratings for switchboards based on standard currents
as defined in IEC 60059
o Short Circuit ratings required for switchboards based on standard type testing fault
levels (e.g. 31 MVA for 3 seconds)
o Required protection relays for all incomers and feeders and medium voltage
switchboards and for incomers over 400A for LV switchgear
o Required protection for all motors, and where appropriate schedule of required
protection for motors
• Cable schedules for all Mains, sub mains , feeder and motor cables (excluding distribution
circuits
• Indicative Cable routes showing cable tray, duct trench and bus duct. These won’t show cable
containment sizes but the Consultant will have calculated the containment size requirements
and co-ordinated with civil, mechanical engineers to confirm feasibility of the route.
• Layout drawings showing the location of Transformers, Variable speed drives, Switchboards,
motor control centres, distribution boards, UPS’s etc.
• Preliminary layout drawings of the electrical rooms for the switch boards, motor control
centres, VSDs, control panels, UPS’s battery rooms and any other rooms required.
Page 131 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
• Electrical Specifications, these should be a collation of relevant Transco standard
specifications with an additional section for defining the scope and particular requirements
for the project. Additional written particular specification requirements should be kept to a
minimum, most project specific requirement should be provided in the drawings, schedules
and data sheets.
• Electrical Equipment Data sheets: These shall be filled out for preliminary design tender
documents, taking care to provide project particular constraints and requirements,
differentiating between mandatory and optional information required from the EPC
Contractor and deleting information that is not applicable.
6.5 Design Requirements

6.5.1 Cable Sizing
The following guidelines shall be taken into account when selecting cables;
• Voltage regulation requirements detailed in ADWEA/ADDC/ACDC Standard S-AAA-GEN-SFL

General Requirements System Characteristics
Cables shall be sized taking into account thermal limits and maximum permissible volt drops.
The Following voltage drop limits shall also be applicable:
• For main incoming cables – 2% per incomer feeder, at 100 % load.

• For all other power supply distribution feeders (running condition) – total 2.5 % up to final
loads
• Total voltage drop under starting conditions should not exceed 15%.
Consideration must be made that under motor starting or locked rotor current conditions the voltage
drops at motor feeder busbars results in the contactor coil dropping out.
The current rating capacity of cables shall take into account de-rating factors that may result from
installation conditions.
Cables shall be sized to withstand short circuits for the protective relay operating time without
damage and for a minimum of one second.
Incomer cables to distribution boards (DBs) and other panels shall be sized the bus bar rating and not
the operating load and shall be at least 125% of the calculated maximum demand of the DB or panel.
Transformer primary and secondary cable current ratings shall be greater than transformer rated
currents.
Motor and feeder cables shall have a current rating greater than the rated full load current.
Distribution Board feeder cables shall have a rated current greater than the calculated maximum
demand of the switchgear plus a spare capacity of 25%.
Bus Ducts should be considered where capacity is greater than 1000A and where greater than 3 cores
per phase are required.
6.5.2 Bus Ducts

Bus Ducts should be considered where capacity is greater than 1000A and where greater than 3 cores
per phase are required.
Page 132 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
6.5.3 Motors
6.5.3.1 Motor Voltages
During the preliminary design stage the voltage levels of the motors and hence the drives and motor
control centres need to be determined.
Table 6-1 Recommended motor voltages
Nominal Voltage Nominal Motor Rating Range Maximum Motor Rating

400V < 500kW 710kW
690V 350kW to 1000kW 1250kW
3.3kV 350kW to 3500kW 4000kW
6.6kV 350kW to 7000kW 8000kW
11kV 500 kW to 12000kW 13000kW
Motor starting studies shall be completed to determine the minimum acceptable voltage for large
motors.
All MV motors shall be VSD driven
Table 6-1 sets out the recommended operating voltages for motors, the final selection of the nominal
voltage needs to take in account the following items
• Motor costs
• VSD costs (including harmonics)
• Cabling Costs dependent on price of copper and Aluminium
• Heat output cost of cooling air conditioning
• Space considerations required switchgear, cable containment systems
• Capex and Opex needs to be considered, for the lifecycle costs the Consultant should consider
a 25 year period.
Capex items to be included are:
• Motors
• Drive system
• Motor Cables
• Harmonic mitigation
• Installation Cost
• Cooling system cost
Opex considerations are
• Energy Costs - Motors

• Energy Costs - Drive system
• Energy Costs - Cooling system
• Maintenance program
• Midlife upgrade e.g. replacing inverter units, semi-conductors
6.5.3.2 Motor ratings

Normal motors are designed for operation at a maximum ambient temperature of 40 ° C and a
maximum altitude of 1000m, the de-rating factors for motors are dependent on the design and
Page 133 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
cooling method, and reputable motor manufacturers will provide temperature/altitude derating
factors for their motors. The Consultant should confirm with the supplier that the offered motors are
designed for the ambient temperatures at the pumping station.
Typical de-rating factors are shown below

Table 6-2 Typical Motor de-rating factors
Ambient Temperature 40 45 50 55 60
Temperature Derating Factor 1 .965 .93 .9 .865
Motors will not be installed at altitudes above 1000m therefore altitude de-rating factors are not
required.
6.5.3.3 Motor Protection

Table 6-3 provides recommendation of Motor protection, it does not differentiate between LV and
MV motors as the protection required. The motor protection relay may be integral with the VSD.
The CT classification for motor protection should be as advised by the relay manufacturer, however
the default class is 5P10
Table 6-3 Motor Protection Requirements
kW Protective Devices at motor Motor Relay Monitoring Other

Protection
< 5.5kW Not Required Standard
Protection
≥5.5kW and < PTC thermistor ref temp
110kW and all VSD 140°C
motors <5.5kW
≥110kW and < 1 Platinum RTD per winding Thermal overload
350kW 1 Platinum RTD NDE Excessive starting time
Bearings Locked Rotor
1 Platinum RTD DE Bearings Phase Undercurrent
≥350kW to 3 Platinum RTDs per winding Thermal overload

3500kW 1 Platinum RTD NDE Excessive starting time
Bearings Locked Rotor
1 Platinum RTD DE Bearings Phase Undercurrent
X-Y Motor Vibration monitor
motor NDE bearings
X-Y Motor Vibration Monitor
DE bearings
≥3500kW Same as ≥350kW to 3500kW Thermal overload Motor

motors Excessive starting time Differential
Locked Rotor Protection
Phase Undercurrent
As advised by
motor supplier
Page 134 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
6.5.3.4 LV motors
Motors over 15kW should have assisted starting either by soft starters or VSDs. DOL starting may be
considered if the motor starting study of the electrical determines that the network has sufficient
strength that any voltage dips at the main LV bus bars due to the starting currents is within the ADWEA
guidelines.
In the initial design phase the Electrical Consultant will co-ordinate with the hydraulic designer to
determine whether there is a requirement to vary the pump flow and hence the motor speed during
operation and in addition if there is a requirement for soft starting and soft stopping. This will
determine whether for hydraulic/mechanical reasons there are requirements for variable speed drives
or soft starters. Consideration should be taken not only of potential stress to the piping but also stress
to the pumps and motors. It may be that starting or stopping requirements (e.g. long times, variable
ramp up and ramp down characteristics) can only be achieved by a VSD
The distribution company requirement and the load study referred elsewhere in these guidelines will
determine if assisted starting is required for network stability.
If it is determined that there is a need to vary the pump flow a cost benefit analysis should be
undertaken to compare energy savings versus the Capex and Opex of VSDS including all harmonic
mitigation requirements and additional air conditioning requirements.
6.5.4 Variable Speed Drives

6.5.4.1 Lifecycle costs
For the selection of the drives the Consultant should consider a 25 year period life cycle costs.
Capex items to be included are:
• Drive system
• Harmonic mitigation
• Installation Cost
• Cooling system cost
Opex considerations are
• Energy Costs – Drive system

• Energy Costs Cooling system
• Maintenance program
• Midlife upgrade e.g. replacing inverter units, semi-conductors
6.5.4.2 Ambient Temperature Derating

While the VSD rooms should be provided with cooling and ventilation, the output current of drives
should be de-rated to account for 50°C for indoor installations and 55°C for outdoor installations. In
detailed design de-rating should be based on Vendor data, for preliminary design assume current
output is derated 1% for every 1°C temperature rise.
6.5.4.3 Cooling
Careful consideration should be given on method of cooling refer to Section 6.6.2.1.1.
6.5.4.4 VSD Harmonic Mitigation

As a general principal one should mitigate the problem at source, for example with active front end
drives (AFE) or multi pulse drives supplied by phase shifting transformers. It should be noted that to
Page 135 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
meet Transco requirements that with multi pulse drives a minimum of 24 pulse and more probably 36
pulse drives would be required
Active harmonic filters are not a suitable solution for pumping station applications and are not
accepted by Transco.
Line chokes should still be considered with AFE drives, for pre filtering.
Sine filters are not a preferred solution for new installations as there are issues with voltage drops,
physical space required and maintenance requirements.
6.5.4.5 Compatibility of Motor and Drive

The output voltage and current waveforms produced by PWM drives are a particular concern for the
stresses imposed on motor insulation and motor bearings. Refer to specification for requirements
6.5.4.6 Electromagnetic Compatibility

To achieve good EMC performance it is important to plan the electrical installation of the power drive
system, that is from the transformer to the motor not just the drive itself and it is extremely important
to adhere to the Vendor’s requirements. Detailed requirements will be found in the specifications.
• Step 1
Determine the environment type and allowable EMC levels as per IEC? 61800-3:2004
• Step 2
Confirm the maximum permissible drive to motor cable length of all of the Transco pre-approved
VSD to determine location of drives, principle should be to minimise motor cable lengths and
screened multicore symmetrical cable should be mandatory.
• Step 3
Consider best routing of power and signal cables and required separation of the different type of
cables according to sensitivity to RFI & emission of RFI:
• Step 4
Plan the earthing topology and taking into account effect of high frequency currents that will
appear in the earthing network due to grounding requirements of the drives to reduce EMC.
• Step 5
Consider the output filters required, whether filters provided for motors will meet the
requirements for EMC mitigation
6.5.5 Transformers
6.5.5.1 General Design Requirements for Transformers
Refer to the standard specification for Transformers W-E-SS-003.
The transformers feeding duel fed (double ended) switchboards shall have sufficient capacity to supply
the entire board in the circumstance that one transformer is out of service and the bus-tie is closed.
The transformers, other than phase shifting transformers, are to be installed outdoors without shade.
The transformers at the pump stations can be considered distribution transformers.
6.5.5.2 Transformer Protection

Refer to the transformer specification W-E-SSS-003 for requirements.
Page 136 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Table 6-4 Protection at Transformer
Protection at Transformers Ansi Codet CB tripped
Winding Temperature 49 Downstream CB (LV
Bucholz Relay 63 Upstream with Inter trip to

Down stream
Restricted Earth Fault (>2500 kVA) 64Ref Upstream with Inter trip to
Down stream
Over current, earth fault and differential protection for transformers will be measured at the
switchboard and details are provided in Table 6-7 Recommended Protection Requirements at MV
Switchgear.
6.5.5.3 Operating transformers in parallel.

Under normal service circumstances the transformers will not be operating in parallel, except
momentarily when the high speed bus transfer system operates. It would be expected that the
transformers feeding each section of a switchboard will have identical characteristics. Table 6-5 lists
the requirements for successful parallel operation of Transformers. When the preferred conditions
are not met, parallel operation is possible but not optimal
Table 6-5 Conditions for Successful Parallel Operation of Transformers
Transformer Conditions Requirement
Same phase angle shift Mandatory

Same Polarity Mandatory
Same Phase Sequence Mandatory
Same Frequency Mandatory
Same voltage ratio and turns ration Preferred
Same percentage impedance & X/R ratio Preferred
Identical position of Tap Changer Preferred
Same kVA rating Preferred
One of the most important considerations with paralleling transformers is the subsequent increase in
short circuit fault levels therefore the switchgear and bus bars must all be rated for the higher
potential fault levels.
Other necessary conditions for parallel operation are
• All parallel units must be supplied from the same network.

• Secondary cabling from the transformers to the point of paralleling has approximately equal
length and characteristics.
• Voltage difference between corresponding phase must not exceed 0.4%
• There should be Directional relays on the secondary side of the transformers.
• The percent impedance of one transformer must be between 92.5% and 107.5% of the other.
Otherwise, circulating currents between the two transformers would be excessive.
Page 137 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
6.5.5.4 Transformers with nonlinear loads
It is not expected that the transformers will be subject to significant nonlinear loads dues to the
requirement for low harmonic drives, however the Consultant must advice the transformer supplier
of the expected harmonic levels so that the transformer is rated appropriately, of particular concern
are the Triplen harmonics.
6.5.5.5 Items to consider on data sheets.

6.5.5.5.1 Rated Power
The rated power will be that determined form the load studies as that described elsewhere in these
guidelines and rounded up to the nearest preferred values as clause 5.1.2 of IEC 60076-1 . The
Consultant needs to reiterate the required ambient temperature.
The preferred values are: 100kVA, 125kVA, 160 kVA, 200 kVA, 250kVA, 315kVA, 400kVA, 500kVA, 500
kVA, 630 kVA, 800kVA, 1000 kVA and multiples of 10 of these values
6.5.5.5.2 Climate
The service condition for temperature of cooling air at the Transco sites will exceed the normal service
conditions as defined in IEC standard 60076-1 (clause 4.2). Table 6-6 shows as an example the
comparison between IEC normal service conditions of the air temperature and values at the Abu Dhabi
International airport. The Consultant needs to provide the transformer vendor with the values at the
proposed site which can be obtained from the National Centre of Meteorology and Seismology
(NCMS) web site http://www.ncms.ae/en/climate-reports-yearly.html?id=8801.
In addition the equipment must also comply with the stated ambient temperature of 55°C
Table 6-6 Air Temperatures Transformer Insulation
Air temperature IEC Normal Service Abu Dhabi International Airport Values
Conditions
Maximum Temperature 40°C 49°C
Monthly Average of Hottest 40°C 35.4°C

Month
Yearly Average 20°C 27.575
6.5.5.5.3 Cooling
The cooling medium shall be air and all transformers should be designed for normal operation to
operate as ONAN with the option to operate as ONAF under abnormal circumstances.
For transformers greater than 10MVA and where there are space constraints, ONAN/OFAF cooling can
be considered.
6.5.5.5.4 Insulation
The transformer insulation options are:
• Mineral Oil:
Mineral oil is the traditional insulating medium and have a good record for providing effective
insulation however regular maintenance should be done to ensure the longevity of the transformers.
• Natural Ester fluids
Page 138 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Natural Esters are currently not approved by Transco as an insulating medium for transformers
• Dry type Transformers:
Dry type transformers are often used for areas where there are number of people such as shopping
malls and airports as if there is a fire there is no oil to support combustion, other main applications is
where it is imperative to avoid oil spills. The disadvantages are that they need to be larger to achieve
the required insulation levels. The main application at the pump stations would be for the
transformers associated with the MV VSDs.
6.5.5.6 Transformer Earthing Requirements.

The short circuit studies will determine what the potential maximum earth fault levels and potential
transient over voltages for solidly earthed system. From this can be calculated potential step and
touch voltages. If the studies demonstrates initially that the fault currents then an iterative process
will determine the required neutral to earth impedance
The default for transformers stepping down to the LV network (400/415V & 690 V), that the secondary
side is solidly earthed, however as described above it is necessary to confirm that this is appropriate,
particularly when the source short circuit power is high.
6.5.6 MV Switchgear
Refer to the standard specification for MV switchboards W-E-SS-001, the design should also include
the following criteria:
• Each Switchboard shall be designed with an electrical capacity to match its respective supply
transformer.
• Provision for a minimum of 1 additional tiers shall be provided at either end of the MV
switchgear (for new installations)
• All switchgear shall be indoor units, including switchgear for onsite MV sub stations.
• MV switchgear shall use SF6 contactors.
• Vacuum or SF6 circuit breakers may be used for motor VSD starting duties where the starting
frequency is low or the capacity is beyond the ratings for contactors.
• Each half of double sided switchboards shall be mirrored with respect to placement of
cubicles.
6.5.6.1 Recommended Protection Requirements at MV switchgear

Table 6-7 shows recommendations of the protection required for MV switchgear.
It should be noted that this is a guide and the final selection of the protection selection will depend
on the protection study and analysis of the behaviour of motors, transformers and drives during faults.
Modern protection relays have multiple functions available, therefore additional functions can be
added with no extra wiring or instrument transformers required.
The protection scheme should still aim to be the simplest that will provide the required protection of
the equipment.
Table 6-7 Recommended Protection Requirements at MV Switchgear
Location Relay type Ansi Code

Incomers Under Voltage 27
Arc Flash Detection 28
Page 139 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Instantaneous & Time Over Current 50/51
Time & Instantaneous Earth Fault 50N/51N
Over Voltage 59
Directional (if required for 67

discrimination)
Differential Protection 87
Inter trip (if required from upstream 94

protection)
Feeder to MV Arc Flash Detection 28
switchgear
Instantaneous & Time Earth Fault 50N/51N
Bus Section Phase to Phase under voltage 27
Arc Flash Detection 28
Over Voltage 59
Directional Phase over current/earth 67,67N

fault
Feeder to MV/MV Arc Flash Detection 28

Transformer
Winding over temperature 49
Bucholz (Intertrip to downstream) 63
Restricted Earth Fault ≥2500kVA (Plus 64REF

Intertrip to downstream)
Feeder to MV/LV Arc Flash Detection 28

Transformer
Winding over temperature 49
Page 140 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Bucholz (Intertrip to downstream) 63
Feeder to Arc Flash Detection 28

Transformer/VSD
Package Winding over temperature 49
6.5.6.2 Current Transformers

Refer to the specification W-E-SS-001 for requirements.
Instrument transformers and relays would be part of the package supplied by the switchboard
manufacturer.
Secondary currents of CTs are typically 1A or 5A.
Where the switchgear is sized for future growth the CTs should be provided with Taps for the
appropriate ratios.
When the metering or protection equipment is at the board or when only short pilot wires are
required 5A secondary winding is recommended. However the burden of the secondary cable and
connections a can become significant with 5A secondary’s for longer runs and this will need to be
taken into account.
When estimating the burden on a CT the burden of each device needs to be added (since they are in
series connections) including the burden of the secondary cable and then rounded up to the next
standard value. If the total burden imposed on the CT secondary winding by the connected device(s)
and wiring connections exceed the rated burden of the CT the CT may partly or fully saturate and
therefore the secondary current will no longer be linear with the primary current over the operating
range.
Care should be taken to not over specify the CTS as not only can it make them unnecessarily large with
potential subsequent effects on the size of switchgear but also not necessarily the best design for their
purpose.
It is not necessary to have a spare set of CTs installed at the switchgear.
6.5.6.2.1 Current Transformers for Tariff metering

The EPC Contractor shall procure the CTs for tariff metering according to the distribution company
requirements, the meters shall be provided by the distribution company and installed by the
Contractor.
Page 141 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
6.5.6.2.2 Current Transformers for check metering and power monitoring.
For moving coil panel mounted meters Class 3 is sufficient, for check metering and power quality
meters Class 1 is recommended.
6.5.6.2.3 CTs for Protection

In addition to the general requirements described above protection CT's require an Accuracy Limit
Factor (ALF). This is the multiple of rated current up to which the CT will operate while complying with
the accuracy class requirements. For example a 5P10 CT will have an accuracy of 5% up to 10 times
the rated primary current.
Class X CTs are special CTs used mainly in balanced protection systems (including restricted earth fault)
where the system is sensitively dependent on CT accuracy. Further to the general CT specifications,
the manufacturer needs to know:
• V KP - Voltage knee point

• Io - Maximum magnetising current at Vkp
• Rs - Maximum resistance of the secondary winding.
• Harmonic levels
When specifying Class X CTs it is essential to consult with the protective relay provider to
ensure the correct CTs are installed.
Table 6-8 below provides a guideline for protection CT selection
Table 6-8 Protection CT requirements
Protective System CT Secondary/VA Class

Instantaneous overcurrent relays 1A / 2.5VA Class 10P5
& trip coils 5A / 7.5VA
Thermal inverse time relays 1A / 2.5VA 10P10
5A / 7.5VA
Inverse definite min. time relays 1A / 5VA Class 10P10/class 10P/1515
(IDMT) overcurrent 5A / 15VA
IDMT Earth fault relays with 1A / 5VA Class 10P10
approximate time grading 5A / 15VA
IDMT Earth fault relays with phase 1A / 5VA Class 5P10
fault stability or accurate time 5A / 15VA
grading required
Motor Protection 1A / 2.5VA 5P10
5A / 7.5VA
Restricted Earth Fault 1A or 5A Class PX, to relay manufacturers
requirements
Differential Protection 1A or 5A Class PX to relay manufacturers
requirements
Directional protection 1A or 5A Class PX to relay manufacturers
requirements
Page 142 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
For differential protection it is essential that the CTS are matched; where composite relays are used
the CTs must meet the most onerous classification and refer to the relay manufacturer’s
requirements.
6.5.6.3 Interlocks
In addition to the specification W-E-SS-001 requirements, the earthing switches shall be interlocked
with its associated MV switch so that closure of the earthing switch is only allowed when the MV is
not in the service position.
6.5.6.4 High Speed Bus Transfer (HSBT)

A high speed transfer system shall be provided for the MV switchboards as indicated on the typical
SLD drawings. Typically there will be three circuit breakers, one for each incomer and one for the bus
sectionaliser; it will only be permissible for a maximum of two circuit breakers to be closed at any one
time.
The MV switchboards are all double ended, under normal operation each of the incoming breakers
are closed and the bus coupler (sectionaliser) is open with each bus section supplied by its incomer.
In the event of either incomers losing power from either an unexpected outage or from a planned
shut-down of one supply the relevant incoming breaker should open and the sectionaliser close. The
HSBT system enables a fast transfer to take place in a controlled manner so as not to cause mechanical
damage to the motors or connected loads while ensuring the pump station maintains operation
continuity.
Transfers must be blocked on faults (that is if the incoming circuit breaker has tripped because of a
down-stream fault) otherwise the bus sectionaliser will close onto a fault and the whole system could
be lost. Co-ordination between the HSBT supplier and VSD will be required and transient analysis will
need to be carried out to ensure compatibility and optimisation of the transfer.
Retransfer to the original source should be carried out manually by the operators once they have
confirmed all status and protection indications.
The following modes should be available, the first mode described is a closed transition with the
remainder being open transition methods.
The microprocessor unit integrated with HSBT system shall control all different operation modes
based on the program logic, data analysis and operability. The HSBT can be programmed for various
control configurations and different scenarios. Some of the control modes covered by the HSBT
program logic shall be as following:
• Surge-free synchronised transfer in the event of loss of supply

• Automatic transfer within an adjustable angle before the first phase coincidence (fast transfer)
• Transfer at the first phase coincidence (in-phase transfer)
• Automatic transfer below an adjustable minimum voltage (residual voltage transfer)
• Automatic transfer after an adjustable maximum time (long-time transfer)
6.5.6.4.1 Closed Transition (hot paralleling)

In this case the sectionaliser is closed before the relevant incomer circuit breaker is opened, it should
allow only momentary paralleling of the two supplies. This mode is only suitable for a planned transfer
and has the advantage that it is simple to implement with synchronising check between the two
supplies. However consideration needs to be made on the consequence of the event of a fault
Page 143 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
occurring during the time the power sources are paralleled. This mode should be only considered if it
is not feasible to take pumps out of service for sufficient time to allow a manual long term transfer.
6.5.6.4.2 Open Transition High Speed Transfer (simultaneous switching)

The aim of this mode of transfer is to minimise the off grid time for the affected bus section and
therefore minimises the motor bus voltage and phase decay before the power is reinstated to avoid
the motors slowing significantly. By definition the high speed transfer takes place within the first 10
cycles.
The transient torques are reduced due to the speed of the transfer. The high speed transfer is
particularly applicable for low inertia loads such as centrifugal pumps to prevent the sudden stopping
of the motor and pump which can cause large stresses on the motor shafts and windings and damage
the pipes from water hammer. The high speed transfer will be blocked if the phase angle between the
bus and the source are out of limits.
6.5.6.4.3 Open Transition -In Phase Transfer

If a high speed transfer is blocked the HSBT will connect the other source when it is in phase with the
induced voltage. This takes place between 10 and 600 cycles.
6.5.6.4.4 Residual Voltage Transfer or long term transfer.

In cases where high speed or in phase transfer do not occur then the transfer will take place either
after the residual voltage on the motor bus has decayed to a safe level or after a fixed long term delay.
6.5.6.4.5 Manual Transfer

The manual transfer will be initiated by the operator and can be either an open transition command
or closed transition command
In addition a manual transfer can be carried out after a planned shutdown of the motors on one bus
section
6.5.7 Back-up Power Supplies

6.5.7.1 Generators
Because of the topology of the network, with dual fed supplies generators are generally not required
except for some valve stations that may be supplied from a spur line. Critical back up power supply
for the pump stations are supplied via UPS’s.
The valve stations will have operating voltage of 400V; the switchboards associated with these should
have a generator connection box with terminals ready for generator cables. The change over at the
switchboard should be manual consisting of the main incoming circuit breaker paired with a generator
circuit breaker with mechanical interlock and centre off.
The generator connection box must have the same rating as the main switchboard bus rating. The
connections at the connection box should be sized to take the cable lugs of the mobile generators
6.5.7.2 UPS’s
Back up for critical pump station equipment is from UPS system. The design considerations are
described in the specification W-E-SS009.
6.5.7.2.1 Preliminary Design

The Consultant shall prepare a load list of the equipment that is to be connected this shall include
• SCADA
• Flow meters
Page 144 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
• Station auxiliaries
• Any other instrumentation that has 230V power supply
• Critical valves Allow one operation during each power failure
• 30% of lights in Control room & IT/Server room
• Air conditioning, is required for the areas listed in Table 6-9 below
Table 6-9 UPS Fed Air Conditioning Requirements
Room Temperature Requirements
SCADA/control room 25°C

IT room 25°C
Switch rooms 30°C
VSD room with no power to the VSDs 35°C
UPS room 25°C
Battery room 20°C
During a power outage, the pumps and VSDs will not be running, most VSDs are rated for 40°C
degrees.
The load list must include static requirements and starting currents of motors including actuated
valves and air conditioning motors.
The Consultant shall estimate the space requirements for the UPS so that the room can be sized
correctly.
6.5.7.2.2 Detail Design

The Contractor shall provide a complete design for the UPS system including the protection required.
6.5.8 LV Switchboards
The switchboards ratings shall be based on the values calculated from the electrical studies, rounded
up to the next standard value as outlined in IEC 60076-1.
In addition they shall have the minimum ratings as outlined in Table 6-10 below.
Table 6-10 LV Switchboard Requirements
Switch Board Minimum Current Minimum short Circuit Form Rating

Description Rating A Rating SC Level
Main Switchboard Rating of Incoming 25kA 3 seconds Form 4b
Transformer
Motor Control Centres Connected Load 25kA 3 seconds Form 4b
Motor Valve MCC 160A 10kA 1 second Form 4b
Lighting and small 125A 10kA 1 second Form 3b

power
UPS 100A 6kA Form 3b
DC Supplies 120% Power supply Max SC available from Form 3b

Rating battery bank
Page 145 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
6.6 Studies
This section provides guidelines on what would is expected for each of the studies described below
for both the preliminary design stage and for the detailed design stage, the Consultant shall prepare
the requirements for the studies to be undertaken by the Contractor amending as appropriate the
guidelines presented here for the detailed design stage .
6.6.1 Load Studies

Load flow studies need to be carried out to calculate current, power flow fault levels, phase angles
and voltage levels at the buses throughout the pump station. The load flow studies should be done
both for normal operation with open Bus tie (for each side of the switchboard) and for the case when
there is a loss of transformer incoming supply and the bus tie is closed.
Refer to the ADWEA/ADDC/AADC standard S-AAA-GEN-SFL for the system characteristics and fault
levels.
The preliminary load design requirements are described in Section 6.4.
6.6.1.1 Electrical Study Detailed Design

The Contractor shall carry out an electrical study of the network and a use computer modelling
software (e.g. Etap or SKM tools) to prepare the report(s).
The outcome of the studies carried out at the detailed design phase shall be used as the basis for the
final design.
Outputs should provide in tabulated form for each cable, switchboard / Motor Control Centre (LV)
with detailed curves and circuit diagrams as generated by the modelling tool provided in the Appendix.
The electronic software copy of the study shall be provided to enable verification and the ability to
model the network in the future.
The reports shall include method of analysis, assumptions made and discussion on any issues with co-
ordination
6.6.1.2 Fault Study

Short Circuit Calculations should be carried out according to IEC 60909 methodology. Refer to the
ADWEA/ADDC/AADC standard S-AAA-GEN-SFL for the system characteristics and fault levels.
IEC tolerances should be used for transformer and generator impedances
The DC component of the asymmetrical short circuit shall have decayed sufficiently for arc
extinguishment by the time the circuit breaker contacts open
Provide maximum and minimum calculated fault levels at each switchboard and motor control centre
as indicated in the table below.
Page 146 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Table 6-11 Calculated Fault Level Headings
Switchboard Consultant Line to Line to Line to Three phase Fault

Reference (with recommended fault Ground Fault Ground Fault Current
rated voltage) level Current Max Current
& Minimum
Max Min Max Min Max Min
6.6.1.2.1 Protection Guide and Relay Settings

The Contractor shall carry out a protection co-ordination study to determine the devices to be used
to protect against prospective faults to the network and to the machines. Table 6-7 provides a
guideline on protective devices to be used at MV switchgear.
The following should be taken into account:
• Power system architecture

• Operational modes
• Neutral Earthing Systems
• Characteristics of current sources (including motors) and their contribution to fault levels
• Load characteristics
• Continuity requirements maximum permissible times to be off line
The Consultant shall determine that the selection and settings of all protection relays specified and
shown on the preliminary design SLDs are satisfactorily co-ordinated. Consideration of the upstream
protection provided by ADDC/AADC shall be included.
The Consultant shall provide a table for each of the relays to be installed showing set points.
6.6.1.3 Harmonic Study

The majority of the harmonics within the plant will be produced by variable speed drives and to a
lesser extent UPS systems. The preliminary design would be based on the premise that low harmonic
drives would be selected either by active front end drives or phase shifting transformers. A harmonic
study will be carried out during the detailed design phase to ensure the equipment selected meets
the project harmonic requirements as listed below.
Table 6-12 Harmonic Levels
Total Harmonic
Switchboard Busbar Total Harmonic Voltage
Current Distortion
Supply Voltage Distortion (%)
at full load (%)
400V , 690V 5
3.3kV, 6.6 kV 3
>11kV 3 3
6.6.1.3.1 Detailed Design Harmonic Study

The detailed harmonic design would be carried out by approved computer modelling software such
as Etap or SKM tools. It is acceptable to use approved Vendor harmonic software where the motors,
transformers and drives are supplied from the same manufacturer. Typically results that need to be
analysed for system harmonic performance assessment studies are:-
Page 147 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
• Impedance vs. frequency response plotted on charts at each plant main supply intake
busbar that is used for assessment of resonance effect due to provision of capacitors in
the plant that could lead to high harmonic voltage distortion resulting in overheating
and failure of capacitors.
• Assessment of the total current and voltage distortion levels expressed as harmonic
indices at each of the main supply intake switchgear circuit at all main MV & LV busbars
under the normal and minimum short circuit system configuration.
6.6.1.4 Earthing Study
The Wiring Regulations require the earthing to be a combination of TN-S & TT with the locally earthing
to be a T-T system. The electrical design shall consider the risk of
• Transferred potential to remote locations.

• Touch Potentials.
• Step Potentials.
• Static Discharge.
• Circulating Currents and Screen Voltages
For HV earthing systems, safe step and touch potentials shall be determined using IEEE80/ESAA EG1.
Duration of earth faults used in calculations shall be based on the time for the back-up protection to
clear the fault.
The earthing system shall be designed to achieve maximum earth path resistance as follows:
• General electrical earthing 1 Ohm.

• Earthing for lighting protection 7 Ohm
• Instrument clean earth 1 Ohm
6.6.1.4.1 Preliminary Earthing Design

The Consultant will carry out a study of the location of metalwork in the vicinity of the substation this
will include:
• Pipelines, including method of installation in the ground, insulated or not

• Fences
• Poles and other steel structures in immediate contact with the ground
• Communication cables
• Disused buried metalwork.
The Consultant will take data provided by the project geologist on the type of soil and using tables
from IEC 62305 estimate the soil resistivity which will be used with the preliminary short circuit study
results to produce an earthing single line schematic to complement the power single line. This will
include sizing of earth bars within the switch room, sizing of earth cables.
The Consultant shall also provide a preliminary LV earthing layout of the site which will include the
location of earth electrodes, location of exothermic welded earth connections to the structural
foundations, earth inspection pits. The Consultant shall consult with the structural engineers on any
limitations or requirements with using the foundations for the earthing. The substation earthing
design will be carried out in the detailed design phase.
6.6.1.4.2 Detailed Earthing Design

During the detailed design stage the Contractor shall carry out a comprehensive soil resistivity survey,
which will require the taking of multiple accurate resistivity readings at various depths across the site
with particular attention to the substation areas. In addition the Consultant will investigate whether
Page 148 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
there are dissolved salts in the salt that could corrode earth electrodes. Using these values the
Contractor shall complete the detailed earthing design which will include:
• Buried Earthing Conductor design including mesh, buried conductors, electrodes any earthing
compound
• Transient voltage design
• Bonding of adjacent structures
• Earthing Impedance (if required to limit earth fault current) of transformer star point
Where there is a 33kV or 22kV substation, the Contractor shall use an earthing computer modelling
software such as CDEGs to carry out a full earthing analysis to produce sub-station design earthing
design to IEC 50522:2010. This will include calculations of the step and touch voltages, earth potential
rise and fall. The CDEGs software using the improved earth impedances it produces will confirm the
earth fault currents as calculated in the short circuit studies.
The Consultant doing the detailed earthing design of the substation should have a proven track record
of substation earthing design and if necessary a sub Consultant should be engaged.
6.6.1.5 Lightning Protection Design

The lightning protection design shall be carried out to IEC 62305, in addition to the Wiring Regulations
Transco requires a minimum lightning earth impedance to be 7Ω.
The power earth and lightning earths to be separated but under lightning strike conditions to ensure
potential equalisations surge diverter (e.g. Metal Oxide Varistor MOV) is installed between the main
earth bar and the lightning earth)
6.6.1.5.1.1 Preliminary Lightning Design

During the preliminary design phase a lightning strike risk assessment shall be carried out according
to part 2 of IEC 62305 to determine the need of protection for people and equipment. It is acceptable
to use the IEC Lightning Risk assessment calculator (supplied with the standard) to estimate the risk.
The risk assessment requires the input of the lightning ground flash density (LGD) for the site.
Although currently LGD maps are not available for the UAE or other gulf countries
An estimate can be made from NASA worldwide lightning maps using data from their optical transient
detector satellite system. (http://geology.com/articles/lightning-map.shtml). This indicates that for
Abu Dhabi Emirate the GFD is less than 0.4 flashes/ square km annually, and for the Northern Emirates
from the mountains to the gulf of Oman the GFD can be as high as 5 Flashes per square kilometre.
Follow the procedure as outlined in IEC 62305-2 determine what lightning protection level (LPL) and
therefore the lightning protection systems (LPS) required including surge protection for the major
areas of the pumping station. This shall include
• Surge vessels
• Electrical Sub stations
• Pump station as a whole
• Any ancillary buildings
• Any internal Lightning protection systems required.
The Consultant shall prepare for the preliminary design report a recommendation for level of lightning
protection system. This shall include a table as illustrated below presenting the tolerable level of risk
is required for each area for:
Page 149 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
• R1 risk of loss of human life
• R2 risk of loss of service to the public
• R3 risk of loss of cultural heritage
• R4 risk of loss of economic value
Table 6-13 Example of lightning protection Table
Tolerable Level of Risk Calculated total Risk

Area R1 R2 R3 R4 R1 R2 R3 R4
Surge vessels
Pump station
as a whole
Control room
The report shall include any recommendations of what lightning protection will be required.
This report should include an Engineer’s estimate of what the mitigation costs are.
In assessing the level of protection, where the specifications call for a level of protection such as surge
protection and or equi-potential bonding then this must be taken in account for assessing the risk at
the preliminary design phase.
6.6.1.5.1.2 Detailed Lightning Design

If it has been determined that a LPS is required the Contractor shall design a lightning protection
system including
• An air termination system

• Down conductor System
• Earth Termination System
The design shall follow the Wiring Regulations and IEC 62305 guidelines, if there is any discrepancy
the more stringent requirements will be met.
6.6.1.6 LV Distribution Detail design studies

The Contractor shall use computer software (e.g. Amtech, PowerCAD) to
• Verify compliance with the Electricity Wiring Regulations

• Confirm fault ratings at all LV switchboards
• Confirm cable sizing and that the de-rating factors as outlined in the EWR have been applied
• Confirm settings of protective devices, including relays associated with ACBs and MCCB trip
units.
• Confirm adequate protection of cables and equipment connected them.
• Confirm discrimination between upstream and downstream protection devices.
• Confirm requirements for Arc flash have been met.
A report shall be produced which provides the following information for each cable.
Page 150 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Table 6-14 Cable Report
Item Cable Details and Calculation Results To be provided in To be provided in as

Ref cable schedule built
documentation
post
commissioning
a Cable Tag number Cable Tag number Yes
b Cable type -Configuration Yes Yes
c Insulation, sheathing, armouring and screening Yes Yes

details
d Installation configuration Yes, Cable containment

identification
e Conductor details - CSA, conductor materials. no Yes Yes

of cables in parallel for the phases, neutral and
earth conductors
f Design Ambient Temperature No No
g Derating factors – grouping/installation etc. No No
h Load, current capacity of cable under the Load only No

defined conditions
i Volt drop No No
j Calculated Earth fault impedance and maximum No Measured

permissible
k Cable length No Yes
l Maximum length for cable selected Yes Yes
l Protective device details for each cable including Yes Final settings after
manufacturer, type, and model and trip unit commissioning
including all adjustable settings.
Page 151 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
The results of the report shall be used to provide cable schedules providing details as listed in table
above.
Provide co-ordination curves between the protections devices, priority should be given to ensure
devices that feed multiple branches have the greatest discrimination.
6.6.2 Heat Loads

6.6.2.1 Preliminary Design
An essential factor determining the performance, life and rating of equipment is their operating
temperature therefore it is essential for sufficient cooling and air conditioning to be provided to
ensure the temperature within the control and switch-rooms and within cabinets is within the
equipment specifications.
The Consultant shall provide an initial estimate of the heat loads of the following major equipment so
that the air-conditioning and ventilation requirements can be estimated:
• VSDs
• UPS’s
• Battery Banks
• Switchboards
• Electric Motors
6.6.2.1.1 VSD heat loads

Particular consideration should be given to the heat loads generated from the VSDs. Generally for
heat loads over 10kW, cooling by just air conditioning the room is not likely to be sufficient.
The electrical designer needs to co-ordinate with the mechanical engineer to investigate the following
options:
• Ducting heat generated from the drives out of the room

• Liquid cooling of the drives
• Ventilation of the drives to ensure sufficient air flow is maintained
It is essential that planning for cooling of the VSDs is carried out in the preliminary design stages of
the project as dependent on the solution proposed there needs to be sufficient space in the building
fabric therefore co-ordination will be required with the architect.
6.6.2.1.2 Off line heat loads

As a number of essential services within the plant are required to continue if the power to the site is
lost, the design Consultant needs to estimate the heat loads generated in off line events so that the
essential air conditioning loads are maintained. The off line air conditioning loads can be determined
by referring to the loads supplied by the UPS. It will be necessary to calculate the heat loss from the
batteries when they are in discharge mode as this will be greater than during trickle mode.
6.6.2.2 Detailed Design

The Contractor electrical engineer will confirm the heat loads of the equipment selected, taking in
account of diversity, operating points of the pumps and hence the drives.
The heat loads generated in each of the rooms and the required operating temperature and
ventilation requirements need to be calculated according to the equipment selected so that the air
conditioning detailed design can be carried out by the mechanical works.
Page 152 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
6.7 Small power and Lighting

6.7.1 Lighting Design
The detailed lighting design shall be carried out by the Contractor.
All luminaires for both interior and exterior areas including roadway and area light shall be LED type.
Exterior lights shall have zero upward light component unless required for decorative requirements:
6.7.1.1 Preliminary Lighting Design

The Consultant shall confirm the lux levels as outlined in the ADWEA specification W-E-SS-013 are
appropriate for the pump station, the Consultant shall prepare tender documentation for the
Contractor to provide the detail design. This shall include a schedule of the type of lighting required
for different areas of the pump station.
For road lighting it will include the category of lighting required.
The Consultant shall carry out a preliminary emergency lighting layout design based on the fire report
including location of exit signs. The emergency lighting shall meet the UAE Fire and Life Safety Code
of Practice
6.7.1.2 Detailed Lighting Design

The Contractor shall carry out the detailed lighting design of the pump station including the
presentation of lighting calculations.
The voltages at lighting fixtures shall be within ±5% of the rated voltage for the lamp, ballast or driver.
Refer to ADWEA specification W-E-SS-013 for the minimum illumination levels.
• Uniformity requirements are:

• For control rooms, office areas ≥ 0.5
• Other interior areas ≥ 0.4
• Exterior plant areas ≥ 0.3
• Roadways and foot paths ≥ 0.3
6.7.1.3 Lighting Calculation Presentation.

Preferred Lighting software is AGI 32 or Dialux
Modelling of large equipment such as pumps, motors, transformers, switchboards and tanks is
required. It is acceptable to model irregular shaped items such as pumps and motors as rectangular
blocks.
For the purpose of this calculation points closer than 200mm (0.2m) to vertical surfaces such as walls
and objects may be ignored.
A Luminaire Schedule shall be provided that includes the
• Luminaire label (As shown on the calculation and lighting layout drawings
• Description including Manufacturer and Model Number
• Lumens per luminaire
• Light Loss factor
• Quantity of each type of luminaires
The calculation results are required for both normal and emergency lighting requirements and shall
be presented for each area. They may be presented either by Isolux contours or by calculation points,
Page 153 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
for normal levels do not include decimal values. In addition on the same page as the calculation results
provide a schedule that includes the following:
• Room/Area label including room height

• Units
• Average lux
• Maximum
• Minimum
• Minimum/ Average
• Minimum/ Maximum
The Luminaires shown in the calculations shall include the luminaire label and Mounting Height.
6.7.2 Essential and Emergency Lighting

There is a difference between essential lighting, which is that required to maintain operations and
emergency lighting which is that required by the building codes, in this case the UAE fire and life
Safety Code of Practice, to ensure in the event of a power cut safety of occupants and rescue people
are not compromised by in sufficient lighting.
6.7.2.1 Essential Lighting

30% of the lighting within the control room and IT/server room will be supplied from the UPS under
loss of power. The distribution boards shall have an essential section with a secondary feed from the
UPS. Under normal operations both sections of the board shall be supplied from the mains power,
however under mains failure the two sections shall be isolated from each other and the essential
section shall be supplied from the UPS distribution board. Areas that have essential lighting still need
to comply with the emergency lighting requirement. The emergency lighting monitoring in these
rooms will be on the essential circuits so that emergency lighting back up packs will continue to be
trickle charged from the essential lighting circuits and will operate in the event of failure of the
essential lighting.
6.7.2.2 Emergency Lighting

The Contractor shall develop the preliminary emergency lighting design to detailed design to comply
with the UAE Fire and Life Safety Code of Practice. The design will include circuit design and emergency
lighting calculations.
Emergency lighting in rooms with essential lighting will be on the essential circuits so that the
emergency lights will only go one once there is no power to the essential lighting.
6.7.3 Small Power

6.7.3.1 Concept Design
The Consultant shall provide a schedule of what is required for different areas of the pumping station,
including consulting with the architect and other services such as fire and security to determine the
small power requirements.
The table below provides suggested minimum requirements. (SSO = switched socket outlet
Table 6-15 Socket Outlet Requirements
Area Requirement Additional

Office / Control Room: 1 twin 13A SSO for each work station, Work stations to be
printer and one single 13A SSO every from floor boxes
10 metres along the wall
Page 154 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Lunch rooms Confirm with architect for
requirements
Switch rooms, VSD rooms 1 twin 13 A SSO on each wall plus any
required for work station
UPS room 1 twin 13 A SSO on each wall plus any
required for work station
Transformer compound 1 x 13A 1φ SSO and 32A 3 φ SSO to IP56,
service each transformer
Bathrooms 1 x Fixed outlet for hand dryer
1 x fixed outlet for toilet ventilation
fan
Pump Hall 1 x 13A 1φ SSO and 32A 3 φ SSO outlet IP56,
adjacent to each pump for
maintenance and on walls of room at
30 metre spacing.
Walkways at high Level 1 x 13A 1φ SSO at 30 metre spacing IP56,
Exterior Areas 1 x 13A 1φ SSO and 32A 3 φ SSO at 30 IP56,
metre spacing in areas requiring
regular maintenance.
Other areas as required
6.7.3.2 Preliminary Design
The Consultant shall provide the following information for the tender documentation:
• Indicative small power layout for critical areas such as control rooms, switch rooms, lunch
rooms
• update the socket outlet schedule
• Provide a list of Distribution boards required
• Layout drawing of the pump station showing locations of Distribution boards
• Scope of works for tender documentation.
• Particular specification if required
6.7.3.3 Detailed Design

The Contractor will complete the final design for the small power ensuring that all equipment has the
required socket outlet or fixed outlet as required. This includes items such as power supplies for doors,
fire doors, hot water for lunch rooms etc.
The Contractor will design the small power circuits including cable sizing, containment, distribution
boards will provide a DB schedule. Refer to Section 6.6.1.6 for requirements.
Page 155 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
7 Mechanical Works
This section covers typical mechanical equipment that is part of the pumping station design.
7.1 Design Codes

IAHR - “Hydraulic Structures Design Manual 1”, 1987
AWWA M51 - Manual of Water Supply Practices M51
AWWA D100 -Welded Carbon Steel Tanks for Water Storage
ISO 2531 -Ductile Iron Pipes, Fittings, Accessories and their Joints for
Water Applications
ISO 8573.1:2010 -Contaminants and Purity Classes
API 650 -Welded Tanks for Oil Storage
ASME -“Boiler and Pressure Code” Section VIII
NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems
NFPA 2001 -Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 24 -Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains

and Their Appurtenances
NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 30 -“Flammable Liquid Code”
ASHRAE Standard 62-2010 -“Ventilation for the Acceptable Indoor Air Quality”
ASHRAE 2013 -“Handbook Fundamentals”
ASHRAE 2013 -Handbook Fundamentals, Chapter 21 “Duct Design”
ASHRAE -Handbook HVAC Systems and Equipment, Chapter 13,

“Hydronic Heating and Cooling”
CIBSE - Guide A Environmental Design
7.2 Water Transmission Pump

7.2.1 Pump arrangement.
When required flow cannot be achieved with one pump, or if using one pump would result in selection
of a very large pump, several pumps can be arranged in a parallel pumping configuration to achieve
the required flow or range of flows.
7.2.2 Redundancy and standby capacity.

Pumps shall be installed in N+1 configuration with allowance for future expansion. Typically a
provision shall be made for future pumps to be installed without having to shut down whole pumping
station in order to install additional pumps.
Page 156 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
7.2.3 Pump Selection
Total dynamic head of the pump during operation will vary. For example: a change in water level in a
tank will cause static head of the pump to change as well. As a result, operating point of the pump will
not be constant but will move on the pump curve as flow conditions change.
There are many sources of energy losses when fluid is flowing through the pump. They can be roughly
divided in two categories: Mechanical losses and hydraulic losses.
Mechanical losses are:

1. Bearing friction losses
2. Shaft seal friction losses
Hydraulic loses are:
1. Flow friction loses.
2. Mixing losses.
3. Recirculation loses.
4. Incidence losses.
5. Disk friction losses.
6. Leakage losses.
Some of those losses increase as flow increases and some decrease. Some are linear and some are
nonlinear. When adding losses for the full range of flows that pump can achieve, there exists a flow at
which sum of all those loses is minimal and pump curve is closest to the ideal Euler curve. That point
is called the best efficiency point (BEP)
Pumping costs will be lowest if pump operates at the BEP but also, the life span of the pump will be
the longest.
Pumps shall be selected so it operates at BEP if possible. Because of the potentially infinite number of
flow head conditions sometimes (or most of the time) it is not possible to select pump that will operate
exactly at BEP so pump shall than be selected so it operates as close as possible to BEP.
The Table below gives guidance on how much pump operating point shall be allowed to differ from
BEP.
Table 7.1 – Pump Operating Point Variance from BEP.
Satisfactory Range 70% of BEP flow 120% of BEP flow
The above figures are for guidance only and manufacturer shall be consulted for each specific pump
selection.
Particular care shall be taken when pumps are operated in parallel arrangement. If they are selected
to operate at BEP when pumping in parallel, when only one pump is operated it will then pump more
flow than when two or more pumps are operated in parallel. This is due to lower friction losses.
Page 157 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
So in other words if pump was operated at BEP when pumping in parallel, its operating point will move
to the right of the BEP. Care shall be taken that this increase of flow is within recommended range of
flows for that particular pump.
If pumps are operated via variable frequency drive (VFD) and there is a large static head in the system,
when slowing down the pump its operating point will move to the left of the BEP. Again, care shall be
taken that this decrease of flow is within the recommended range of flows for the particular pump.
If the pump is going to mostly operate at part load condition where its speed is reduced by a VFD then
it shall be selected so its operating point at full load conditions is on the right of the BEP. When slowing
down the pump its operating point will move to the left to the zone of higher efficiency.
So called, “pump control valves” shall not be specified. In the past when soft starters and VFDs did not
exist it was common practice to start pumps against closed isolation valve or pump control valve and
then slowly open the valve to avoid cavitation and vibration of the pumps at start-up.
With the currently available technology there is no longer any need for such start-up philosophy.
7.2.4 NPSH.
Cavitation is the phenomena that can occur at pump suction if total suction head available at the
particular flow is less than required suction head at the same flow.
If absolute pressure at pump suction is lower than vapour pressure of water, water will evaporate and
steam bubbles will form.
When those bubbles implode, localised zones of very high pressures will occur. This can cause pitting
damage to pump impeller. Cavitation damage always occurs on the low pressure side of the impeller.
Available NPSH shall be calculated using the following formula:
𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑎𝑎 = 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 − 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 + 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 − 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹

Where:
𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑎𝑎 − 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒

𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 − 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 − 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 − 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻ℎ𝑡𝑡 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑒 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 − 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
Vapour pressure head of water for various temperatures is given in Table 7.2 below
Table 7.2 – Vapour Pressure Head of Water
Temperature Vapour pressure head Temperature Vapour pressure head

[°C] [m] [°C] [m]
0 0.06 25 0.32
5 0.09 30 0.43
10 0.13 35 0.58
Page 158 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
15 0.17 40 0.76
20 0.24 45 0.99
Calculated NPSHa shall be higher than NPSHr by at least 1.5 m for all possible flow conditions.
7.2.5 Pump Types.

Double suction Horizontal split case pumps are preferred pump type for transmission systems. They
have several advantages over other pump types:
1. Unlike end suction pumps, they do not have axial loads on the pump shaft. This is due to
cancelation of axial forces because of double suction design.
2. Pump impeller and shaft are easily accessible for maintenance as top casing of the pump
can easily be removed without disturbing suction and discharge pipework.
3. They have lower NPSHr requirements because each impeller eye only handles half of the
flow.
4. Because axial thrust forces on the pump shaft are balanced and cancel each other they
have higher efficiencies than similar end suction pumps. Higher efficiency translates to a
lower operating costs.
5. Relatively higher allowable nozzle loads due to the rigidity of the lower part of the housing
Double suction pumps are more sensitive to piping arrangement around them. Refer to section on
pump suction design for more information.
7.3 Pump Station Piping

Pump Station Piping is defined as pipework commencing at the pump station site upstream boundary
and finishing at the point where the discharge header exits the pump station site Pump station piping
shall be designed such that dead legs and stagnant water are avoided at all times. Where there is a
danger that water can become stagnant a provision for drain-down of pipework or equipment shall
be incorporated.
Where this is not possible of feasible other means of prevention such as constant flow bypass etc.
shall be provided.
Where necessary, a provision for pipe filling shall be provided. Typically a nozzle with flange
connection and isolation valve. This point shall be at lowest point of the pipework to allow air inside
the pipework to be pushed upwards towards the air valve locations
7.3.1 Pump Suction Design

When designing pump suction pipework care shall be taken to avoid common problems such as:
1. Insufficient head at pump inlet leading to cavitation.
2. Too high suction pipe velocity, producing noise and vibration
3. Air entrainment causing loss of pump capacity and vibration issues.
Velocity in the pump suction pipes shall be kept between 0.8 - 1.0 m/s
Velocity at suction pipe inlet shall be kept below 1.5 m/s and it shall be through a bellmouth
arrangement in order to reduce inlet headloss.
Double suction, split casing pumps are particularly sensitive to suction piping arrangement.
Page 159 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Suction pipes must be kept as straight as possible. Elbows and bends in horizontal plane must be
avoided as they can lead to fluid pre-rotation and unequal flows to the two halves of the impeller. This
can lead to unbalanced axial thrust loads shortening the life of pump bearings.
Suction pipe material from the supply tanks shall be either DI or Steel, internally and externally coated
as described in Section 7.3.2 Use of these lining materials will ensure that strainers are not required.
Elbows and bends in vertical plane are acceptable but shall be avoided as much as practically possible.
Butterfly valves shall be installed so that valve disc is in the horizontal plane when fully open. This is
to avoid unequal flows reaching pump impellers due to flow disturbance from valve disc.
Since suction piping is almost always bigger diameter than pump nozzle, an eccentric reducer (Flat
portion of the reducer on top) shall be installed upstream of the pump inlet. This is to avoid air
entrapment at the reducer.
Required Submergence of the inlet pipe must be calculated to make sure that there will be no air
entrainment. Following formulas from the IAHR Hydraulic Structures Design Manual 1, 1987 can be
used:
𝑆𝑆
= 1.0 + 𝐹𝐹𝐷𝐷
𝐷𝐷
𝑉𝑉
𝐹𝐹𝐷𝐷 =
�𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
Where:
𝑆𝑆 − 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 [𝑚𝑚]

𝐷𝐷 − 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 [𝑚𝑚]
𝐹𝐹𝐷𝐷 − 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 [−]
𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑉 − 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 [ ]
𝑠𝑠
𝑚𝑚
𝑔𝑔 − 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 [ 2 ]
𝑠𝑠
Submergence of the pipe inlet shall be equal or higher than what was calculated using the above
formulas.
If required submergence cannot be achieved a vortex preventer must be used.
7.3.2 Pipe material

The generally preferred pipe material for pumping station and yard pipework is as follows:
Page 160 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Table 7.3 – Preferred Pipe Materials for P/S and yard pipework.
Pipe location Pipe material Pipe internal coating Pipe external coating
Pipework inside Carbon Steel. API 5L Fusion Bonded Epoxy Fusion Bonded Epoxy (FBE)
pumping station. Grades B, X42, X52 (FBE) 300 micron dry 300 micron dry thickness
Installed on pipe thickness
supports above
ground. Coating must be
approved for potable
water use.
Yard pipework buried Carbon Steel. API 5L Fusion Bonded Epoxy For steel pipes:
underground. Grades B, X42, X52 (FBE) 300 micron dry In accordance with DIN
thickness 30670. Three layer of fusion
Or bonded Epoxy, copolymer
adhesive and polyethylene.
Ductile iron pipes to Coating must be
EN 545 approved for potable For Ductile iron pipes:
water use. Layer of metallic Zinc of 20
microns thickness and
bitumen based coating of
thickness not less than 100
microns
Ductile Iron Pipes can be of the following pressure class.
DN(mm) Class of Pipe

Up to 300 K9, C40 up to C100
350 -600 K9, C30 up to C100
700 -800 K9, C25up to C64
900 - 1000 K9, C25 up to C50
1100-1200 K9, C20 up to C50
Over 1200 K9, C20 up to C30
The final selection of pipe material is to be determined based on a Technical and Economical
Assessment to compare the above materials. The assessment will be based on the whole Life Cycle
Costs (WLCC) taking into consideration, but not limited, to the following:
• The difference in service life for different materials;
• The difference in failure rate (based on historical performance) for each material;
• The difference repair costs for each material;
• Suitability of the material for the application;
• Corrosion protection requirements over the asset service life;
• Capital and Operating cost for each material
Page 161 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
7.3.3 Protection of Buried Pipelines.
Soil resistivity study shall be performed to determine appropriate way to protect buried pipelines.
Wenner or Schlumberger method are acceptable procedures for soil resistivity testing.
Pipes can be protected by:
1. Encasement in polyethylene sleeves.(DICL)

2. Wrapping in tape.(DICL)
3. Cathodic protection.(Carbon Steel)
Where soil resistivity is low, typically less than 10 Ωm, a cathodic protection system might be required
(for Carbon Steel).
This has to be evaluated on case by case basis via risk analysis and if risk analysis shows that risk is
unacceptably high a sacrificial anode or impressed current type of cathodic protection shall be
provided.
Sacrificial anodes shall be sized for the design life of the pipeline.
Where soil resistivity is higher than 20 Ωm polyethylene sleeving shall be used on DICL
Where soil resistivity is less than 20 Ωm factory applied tape shall be used on DICL.
7.3.4 Fittings Fabrication and Welding

Carbon Steel pipe fittings including bends, tees, pipe headers, reducers etc. shall be fabricated in
accordance with the requirements of ADWEA Standard Specification W-P-SS-011 and ASME Standard
B31.3. Welding procedures shall be carried out in accordance with ASME Section 1X Code.
7.3.5 Minimum and maximum velocities.

Velocity in pipelines shall be limited because high velocities can cause issues with surge. Higher
velocity means higher initial kinetic energy of the fluid and consequently more severe surge effects.
High velocity will increase pumping costs, and in cases when velocity is particularly high it can damage
lining of the pipes or erode pipe material.
Low velocities on the other hand mean that pipes are unnecessarily big which results in high capital
costs of pipelines.
Recommended range of velocities is between 0.8 and 1.5 m/s. Absolute maximum velocity shall not
be more that 2 m/s.
Page 162 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
7.4 Mechanical Work

7.4.1 Valves
7.4.1.1 Check valves.
Check valve shall be installed downstream of the pump to prevent backflow through the pump when
pump is not operating.
When selecting check valve type, consideration shall be given to check valve dynamic closing
characteristics and consequence of check valve slam on surge.
Ideally, valves shall be selected based on their surge response following surge analysis.
Recommendations of the surge report shall include appropriate check valve type (instead of selecting
the check valve first and then trying to mitigate surge effects caused by that particular valve).
A fast acting non slam type check valve is preferred.
Reverse velocity characteristic of the selected check valves shall be readily available to allow for
modelling of the valve dynamic characteristics in surge software.
7.4.1.2 Nozzle check valves.

Nozzle check valves are the preferred type of check valves. They are fast acting and require less
installation space than other type of valves. However, they have higher head loss and are more
expensive than other types of valves so careful consideration shall be given to selection.
7.4.1.3 Ball check valves.

Ball check valves are not acceptable and must not be specified. They have poor dynamic characteristics
which results in slow closing time.
7.4.1.4 Swing Type Check Valves.

Swing type check valves are acceptable if their specified performance is acceptable from surge point
of view. There are many variants of this type of the check valve such as: tilted disc, multi-door, resilient
disc with disc accelerator etc. They are all potentially acceptable subject to manufacturer’s
specifications.
7.4.1.5 Isolation valves.

Isolation valves shall be incorporated in the design to allow isolation of the equipment for
maintenance without the need to completely shut down the whole pumping station.
They shall also be provided along the rising main to allow for isolation of parts of the rising main in
case maintenance is required and sections of the rising main need to be drained.
Gate valves shall be provided for pipe diameters of DN300 and less and Butterfly valves for larger sizes.
7.4.1.6 Butterfly valves.

Butterfly valves are the preferred isolation valve type. This is mainly due to their lower price compared
to gate valves of the same size. They are also more compact. However, since they have, when fully
open, disc inside the fluid stream, they are source of turbulence.
Butterfly valves shall be used when pipework is larger than DN300
Page 163 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
If installed at pump suction they should be oriented so that disc is in horizontal position when fully
open.
7.4.1.7 Gate Valves.

Gate valves are acceptable as isolation valves. They are more expensive and physically larger than
butterfly valves but they have advantage that when fully open, gate is out of the fluid stream so they
will generate much less turbulence.
They should be used if pipe size is DN300 or smaller.
7.4.1.8 Ball Valves.

They have superior drip tightness and are of compact design. However, ball valves are not available in
large sizes so their use is limited to instrument piping isolation, drain connections, sampling points
etc.
7.4.1.9 Air Valves.

Air valves serve two purposes: during normal operation when pipeline is pressurised they will expel
air that has separated from the water. During maintenance when pipes are drained down air valves
will act as vacuum breakers and let air inside the pipeline.
Therefore air valves shall be installed at high points in the pipelines.
However, air valves have moving parts and during transient conditions they can cause secondary surge
effects (air valve slam) and localised damage to pipeline coatings or pipelines themselves. Therefore
they need to be modelled to make sure that their response during surge events will not cause damage
to pipelines.
An isolation valve shall be provided downstream of the air valve to allow for valve maintenance and
replacement.
On larger diameter pipes it might be necessary to install twin air valves if single valve does not have
enough capacity.
Another issue that needs to be considered is that most air valves require between 3-5 m of head in
order to close drip tight. They shall not be used where there is not enough head to keep them closed
at all times. Manual air purge valves must be specified instead.
Preferred type of air valve is double acting, kinetic, multistage, non-slam type air valve. Single acting
valves can be used where there is a need to expel air only and where there is no danger of vacuum
forming during the emptying of the pipeline.
Non slam valve refers to valve property to slowly close during operation. Depending on valve
construction this can be achieved in different ways.
One way to do this for example is to change the size of orifice when air velocity increases (two stage
valves) above certain set point. Smaller orifice will present more resistance to air flow so it will slow
down valve closure.
Number and size of air valves shall be designed based on AWWA M51 standard.
7.4.2 Flow metering.

Magnetic flow meters are preferred as the flow measurement instrument.
Page 164 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
They shall be installed in a chamber with at least 5 m of straight piping upstream of the flow meter
and at least 3 meters of straight piping downstream.
Flow meter material shall be selected such that it is appropriate for the fluid being pumped.
For water, preferred material is 316 stainless steel.
Stainless steel is not appropriate material for flow meters installed in chlorination piping.
Magnetic flow meters have negligible headloss due to their full bore design. However, in some cases
to increase accuracy of measurement, velocity through the meter needs to be increased. This is
achieved by installing a flow meter of smaller diameter than the pipeline.
Magnetic flow meters shall never be installed with supports under the body. This will damage the
meter. Instead, the support shall be on adjoining pipes or via bracket mounted on flow meter flanges.
Magnetic flow meters are not suitable for measuring flow of non-conductive fluids such as reverse
osmosis (RO) permeate or air.
7.4.3 Lifting Equipment

Lifting equipment must be provided inside pumping station to allow for removal of any piece of
equipment heavier than 25 kg.
7.4.3.1 Traveling Cranes.

Pumping stations shall be equipped with an electrical traveling crane. The crane shall be of single or
double girder type depending on capacity.
The Crane hook must be able to reach above each piece of equipment to provide straight lift.
Generally, any piece of equipment heavier than 25 kg shall be lifted by crane.
The Crane must have sufficient capacity to lift heaviest piece of equipment inside the pumping station
with appropriate safety factor applied.
The Crane hoist must be powered where capacity of the crane is more than 250 kg
Crane height shall be such that every piece of equipment can be lifted above obstacles to a flat bad
truck.
Crane shall be controlled by a pendant push button device. There must be an emergency stop button
on the pendant.
Access ladders must be provided for crane access for maintenance purposes. Two sets of ladders on
both ends of crane path are required.
7.4.3.2 Monorails.
Monorails shall be provided where load needs to be moved in one direction only, and where traveling
crane installation is either impossible or impractical, or if traveling crane is unable to reach above the
equipment in question.
Page 165 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
7.4.3.3 Hoists.
Hoists shall be powered for all capacities above 250 kg.
Hoist Hook shall be able to rotate 360 degrees
Hoist shall be operated by a pendant push button device.
7.5 Storage Tank System

This section should be read in conjunction with Section 5.5 General Civil/Structural requirements -
Reservoirs.
Storage tanks are used to store water. They provide backup in case of disruption of supply and they
serve to attenuate fluctuations in demand.
Tanks are filled at times of low demand and emptied in times of high demand
Several type of tanks can be used for water storage as described below
7.5.1 Steel Welded Tanks.

Steel welded tanks are typically large round structures made of welded steel plates used for storage
of water.
They shall be designed as per the API 650 standard that govern plate thickness and other structural
components of the tank.
Inlet and outlet of the tank shall be opposite to each other. This is to ensure elimination of dead spots
of water in the tank.
Tanks shall be provided with air vents. Size of air vents shall be calculated for a maximum water inflow
and outflow.
As a minimum tanks shall have following features:
1. Inlet connection.
2. Outlet connection.
3. Washout connection.
4. Overflow connection.
5. Transfer connection (to allow transfer of water from tank to tank in case of maintenance)
6. Inspection manholes.
7. Air vents.
8. Stairs leading to the top of the tank.
9. Any future connections and spare connections as per the specification.
10. Vortex inhibitor on discharge pipework.
11. Cathodic protection
12. Non-toxic coating.
Page 166 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
13. Instrument nozzles.
7.5.1.1 Cathodic protection.

Steel welded tanks shall be protected by automatic impressed current cathodic protection system.
System shall be designed to protect submerged parts of the tank and tank bottom plate.
Non submerged parts of the tank rely on coating for corrosion protection.
Tanks have to be electrically isolated from the connecting pipework.
7.5.2 Steel Bolted tanks.

Steel bolted tanks consist of steel plates that are bolted together to form round or rectangular tank.
An elastomer gasket is installed in between the plates to provide water tightness.
They shall be designed as per the AWWA D 100 – 3 Standard.
They are typically much smaller than steel welded tanks and are typically used for storage of water for
fire protection.
They can be used for storage of potable water where demands are not high and can be served by a
tanks of smaller capacity.
Care shall be taken to specify non-toxic material for gasket if tank is to be used for storage of potable
water.
As a minimum steel bolted tanks shall have following features:
1. Inlet connection.
2. Outlet connection.
3. Drain connection.
4. Overflow connection.
5. Manhole opening.
6. Air vents.
7. Instrument nozzles.
8. Access ladders or stairs in case of larger tanks
For smaller tanks it is good practice to provide two or more compartments so that tank can still be
maintained while in use. If tanks is divided in two or more compartments a balancing line shall be
designed so that contents can be transferred between compartments.
7.5.3 Concrete tanks.

Concrete Tanks are discussed separately under the Civil Works section of this guideline.
Page 167 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
7.6 Electro Chlorination Systems

Electro-chlorination is a process where electric current is passed through a brine solution in order to
produce sodium hypochlorite. Sodium hypochlorite is then used to disinfect water.
Although chemical processes that occur during electro-chlorination are rather complex they can be
described by the following simplified chemical reaction:
𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 + 𝐻𝐻2 𝑂𝑂 + 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 → 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 + 𝐻𝐻2
They are safer than gas chlorination systems but there are still significant risks involved with electro-
chlorination systems and careful operation and maintenance are of vital importance for safety.
The typical electro-chlorination system will have the following components:
1. Brine Mixing system
2. Water softening system.
3. Brine feed pumps.
4. Electrolyser.
5. Sodium hypochlorite storage tank.
6. Sodium hypochlorite dosing pumps.
7. Hydrogen dilution system.
8. Power supply and rectifiers.
9. Control system.
10. Acid cleaning system.
7.6.1 Brine Mixing System

The brine mixing system consists of a tank where water and salt are mixed in order to create brine
solution. It is of utmost importance to use salt without additives and with minimal concentration of
other elements such as: Calcium Sulphate, Magnesium Chloride, Calcium Chloride, Magnesium
Sulphate, Pb, Cu, Fe, Fl, Moisture and other insolubles. This is to prevent scaling of the anode and loss
of efficiency.
7.6.2 Water Softening System

Purpose of the water softening system is to reduce total hardness of water, where required, to below
10 ppm to prevent scaling of the anode and other equipment.
7.6.3 Brine Feed Pumps

Electrolysers require constant and steady flow of the brine solution. Feed pups have to ensure
constant flow and pressure of the brine solution as per the system design.
7.6.4 Electrolyser
Electrolyser cells are typically made of clear acrylic and they contain the anode. Brine solution is fed
via pump and electrical current is passed through the anode. This is where sodium hypochlorite is
formed and H 2 gas is released.
It is very important that electrolyser cells have proper ventilation to prevent build-up of H 2 .
Overheating of the anode is another issue that needs to be monitored and prevented.
Page 168 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Typically electrolyser will have water level and temperature sensors.
A Common operational issue is scaling and subsequent failure of the sensors. Regular maintenance is
a must for electro-chlorination systems.
During operation anode will inevitably scale and an automatic detection system for scaling must be
implemented. Typically this is done by monitoring the current through anode. When anode scales,
more current is required to produce same concentration of sodium hypochlorite.
7.6.5 Sodium Hypochlorite Storage Tank

Concentration of the sodium hypochlorite produced by the electro-chlorination systems is typically
below 1%. Storage tanks are obviously used to store the final product and to provide buffer capacity
during times of higher water demand. They must be connected to hydrogen dilution system to prevent
build-up of H 2 inside the tank. Storage tanks shall be installed inside the bund wall of at least 1.5 x
volume of the biggest tank inside the bund.
7.6.6 Hydrogen Dilution System

Hydrogen is by-product of electro-chlorination process. It is flammable and explosive gas and its
concentration must be kept below the lower flammable limit. For H 2, lower flammable limit is 4% by
volume. Hydrogen dilution system must be designed to keep concentration of H 2 at less than 25% of
the lower flammable limit. So H 2 concentration must be lower than 1% by volume to prevent ignition
and explosion.
Hydrogen dilution system typically consists of blowers that blow outdoor air through the tank.
Capacity of the fans must be calculated to provide enough dilution capacity.
7.6.7 Dosing pumps.

Dosing pumps are used for dosing sodium hypochlorite.
The preferred type of dosing pump is positive displacement with a membrane liquid end and a double
ball check valves. Membrane material shall be compatible with the pumped fluid.
Capacity of the dosing pumps can be adjusted by varying stroke length, effective stroke length or
stroking speed.
Capacity adjustments can be manual or automatic. Automatic capacity adjustment is preferred

method.
Particular care shall be taken when designing suction piping of dosing pumps.
Piping shall be kept as short as possible and as straight as possible. If long suction piping cannot be
avoided a break tank might be required. This is to avoid issues with insufficient NPSHa.
Piping shall be sized to handle instantaneous peak flow which is 3 times higher than pump rated
capacity. This is due to metering pump pulsation flow characteristics.
Calibration pot shall be installed at pump suction to allow for pump calibration.
Pulsation damper shall be installed as close to the pump discharge as possible. If two or more pumps
are connected to a common header each separate pump shall have its own pulsation damper.
Page 169 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Pressure that positive displacement pumps can achieve is only limited by the power that motor can
provide, therefore, some sort of overpressure protection must be provided. Typically, a pressure relief
valve on the discharge side piped back to the suction tank.
A pressure sustaining valve (back pressure valve) shall be installed at the end of discharge pipework
to provide some backpressure to the pump. Typical values of this backpressure is around 1.5 – 2.0 bar
above suction pressure.
This is to prevent free-flowing of the unmetered fluid due to inertial effects.
7.6.8 Power Supply and Rectifiers

Since DC current is used for electrolysis an efficient and stabile rectifier system that converts AC to DC
current is necessary.
7.6.9 Control System

A PLC based control system will ensure automatic operation of the electro-chlorination system.
7.6.10 Acid Cleaning

During operation anodes will scale. Acid solution is used for cleaning. This is typically done manually,
in-situ with a cart mounted reservoir and pump.
7.7 Surge Protection Systems

7.7.1 Surge tanks and Compressors
Both compressed air and bladder type of surge tanks are acceptable. The design criteria for
compressors is set out in Hydraulics Section 3.1.4.5.
Tank shall be designed as per the ASME Code for boilers and pressure vessels section VIII.
Corrosion allowance of minimum 3 mm shall be allowed when calculating tank thickness.
Bladder tank shall be specified with a nylon reinforced bladder and grate at the bladder connection to
prevent bladder being sucked in into pipeline.
Bladder shall be made of food grade butyl rubber.
Provision for draining the surge vessel shall be designed. In case of large vessels consideration shall be
given to where the content of the vessel is to be drained.
Drain valve must be locked in closed condition to prevent tampering.
As per the UK code of practice for Food Grade Compressed Air that is in direct contact with food
product, compressors used for compressed air surge tank shall produce air to at least ISO 8573.1: 2010
class 1.2.1. In case of surge vessels for potable water storage air class 1.4.1 is acceptable.
This level of filtration for particulate and oil (both aerosol and vapour) contaminants requires use of
coalesce and activated carbon filters.
Contrary to popular belief, even oil-free compressors will require oil filters in order to remove any oil
contaminants from ambient air.
Page 170 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Compressor shall be sized to fill the tank from empty to design pressure in no more than 4 hours.
Following formula can be used to estimate required compressor air flow:
𝑉𝑉 ∗ 𝑃𝑃
𝑉𝑉̇ =
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 ∗ 𝑡𝑡
Where:
𝑉𝑉̇ – Compressor Air flow [m3/s]

𝑉𝑉 - Surge tank volume [m3]
𝑃𝑃 – Required pressure in surge tank [bar]
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 – Atmospheric pressure [bar]
𝑡𝑡 – Time to fill the tank [s]
7.7.1.1 Pressure relief valve
A pressure relief valve must be installed to protect surge tank from overpressure.
Preferred type of the valve is automatic spring loaded valve.
Valve selection based on performance tables is not acceptable.
When selecting valve calculations as per the ASME Boiler and Pressure Code Section VIII, Pressure
Vessels, must be done to determine orifice size.
Calculations must account for compressibility of air. Calculations must account for back pressure if the
valve is not vented directly to atmosphere.
Calculations preformed with manufacturer software are acceptable as long as software complies with
ASME Boiler code.
7.7.2 Inertia wheels.

Inertia wheels are also acceptable as a surge mitigation measure but care must be taken because they
will increase motor size and pump start-up time.
7.7.3 Surge anticipation valves

Refer to Section 3.1.4 –Surge Design Parameters. Surge Anticipation Valves shall also be used for surge
protection in Case 1 but if not working then Case 2 design condition shall be studied.
.
7.7.4 Air Valves
Refer to Section 3.1.4 – Surge Design parameters. Air valves shall normally be designed for Case 1
(perfect condition) and the design is to be verified for Case 2 conditions (survival of the system).
Page 171 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
7.8 Motor Cooling System

For motor cooling preferred method is to use product water because it is readily available. In case
chilled water system is available, chilled water can also be used. For VFD cooling chilled water is
required.
Three types of motor cooling protection are acceptable:
1. Two loop system using chilled water in primary loop and recirculation pump in secondary loop.
Two loops connected via heat exchanger.
2. Single loop system using water from the suction header and recirculating it through the motor
using recirculation pump back to the suction header.
3. Two loop system using water from the suction header and recirculation pump and secondary
loop with recirculating pump pumping water through the motor. Two loops connected via
heat exchanger.
Which type of liquid cooling is to be used will depend on particular circumstances for each pumping
station. Preferred system is system No. 3 because of the lowest risk of contamination.
7.8.1 Heat exchangers.

When required heat exchangers must be specified as an interchangeable plate type. Brazed plate heat
exchangers are not to be used.
Heat exchanger frame must be oversized to allow for addition of at least 10% of additional plates.
A basket strainer shall be installed upstream of the heat exchanger to protect it from any debris.
Isolation valves must be provided to allow for dismantling of the heat exchanger without the need to
disconnect pipework.
Heat exchangers should be in duty/standby configuration to allow for servicing without the need to
shut down whole pumping station.
Isolation valve arrangement shall be such that swapping of duty and standby heat exchangers can be
achieved without shutting down the plant.
Drain connection shall be provided to allow for drainage of the standby heat exchanger to prevent
stagnant water.
7.8.2 Recirculation pumps

Recirculation pumps shall be installed in duty/standby configuration.
Since this type of the system is closed loop there will be no static head so pump has to be sized only
to overcome friction loses in the pipework and headloss through various pieces of equipment such as
heat exchangers, strainers, etc.
Centrifugal end suction type pump (close or long coupled) is preferred type of pump for this
application.
7.8.3 Expansion vessel.

Closed loop systems shall be provided with membrane type expansion tank to allow for water
expansion due to temperature change.
Page 172 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
7.8.4 Air venting.
Closed loop systems shall incorporate an automatic air vent to allow for air venting.
7.8.5 Water top up and pressurisation

Closed loop system shall incorporate water top-up and pressurisation unit. Purpose of this is to keep
secondary loop at pressure higher than atmospheric at all times to minimise air entrapment and to
add water when necessary.
7.9 Anti-Flooding System

Anti-flooding system is required inside the pump station to prevent flooding due to pipework leaks
and to discharge any water that has collected at low point inside the pumping station because of
regular maintenance or because there was a need to drain pipework.
Anti-flooding system consists of submersible pumps in duty standby configuration, all the necessary
pipe fittings and instrumentation for automatic operation of the pumps.
7.9.1 Submersible pumps.

In case water from the pipeline inside the pumping station needs to be drained down for reasons of
maintenance or in case of leaks in the pipeline, a sump shall be constructed at the lowest point of the
pumping station.
Two sump pumps in duty/standby configuration shall be installed to pump out any water that collects
inside the sump.
Pumps shall be submersible type with guide rail and pedestal mount. They shall be specified with
cooling jackets if they are to be operated without full submergence.
Pump discharge shall be connected to nearest drainage or storm water manhole.

Pumps shall be controlled by level sensor.
Capacity of the pumps shall be as per the table below:
Table 7.4 – Drainage Pump Capacity.
Pump station capacity Drainage pumps capacity

[l/s] [l/s]
Up to 500 15
From 500 to 1000 20
Above 1000 25
7.9.2 Davit Cranes.

Davit cranes shall be provided to allow for withdrawal of submersible pumps.
Depending on capacity, davit cranes shall be equipped with either manual or powered hoist.
Powered Hoist shall be controlled by a remote pendant push button device.
For small pumps of less than 25 kg in weight a manual davit shall be provided.
Page 173 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Permanent davit installation is not necessary, a permanent davit socket is acceptable if the same davit
is to be used for other purposes inside the pumping station.
7.10 Fire Fighting System

Firefighting systems must be installed as per the NFPA and civil defence standards.
Following types for firefighting equipment shall be installed inside the pumping station as per the
NFPA and civil defence standards
1. Portable fire extinguishers.
2. Fire hose reels.
3. Inert gas firefighting systems.
4. Fire hydrants.
5. Automatic sprinkler system.
6. Transformer protection systems.
7.10.1 Portable Fire extinguishers

Portable fire extinguishers shall be of CO 2 and foam type. They should be installed as per the NFPA
10.
As per the NFPA 10 no part of the building shall be more than 30m away from a fire extinguisher. In
high Risk areas this is 15m.
Fire extinguishers shall be wall mounted when installed indoors or in appropriate cabinet where
exposed to elements.
7.10.2 Fire hose reels

Fire hose reel installation should comply with requirements of NFPA 14
Fire hose reels should normally be installed alongside escape routes. They should be installed in such
a way that whole building is covered by a 30m long hose and 6m water jet.
Fire hose reels shall be installed inside the wall mounted cabinet
7.10.3 Clear Agent Firefighting Systems

Clear agent firefighting systems shall be installed as per the requirements of the NFPA 2001 standard.
CO 2 systems shall not be used for fire protection. Inert gas systems are preferred due to lower risk to
personnel.
Inert gas systems such as FM-200 supress fire by interfering catalytically, whereas CO2 system
supresses fire by reducing concentration of oxygen. Therefore CO2 systems are a greater risk to
people.
Inert gas systems such as FM-200 are preferred way of providing fire protection for electrical and
control rooms where possibility of water damage makes sprinkler and other conventional systems not
acceptable. Also FM-200 requires less space for cylinder storage than CO2.
Panel mounted FM-200 systems are preferred way of fire protection inside the electrical rooms.
Page 174 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
7.10.4 Fire Hydrants
Fire hydrants should be provided around buildings that need protection.
They should be located not less than 12m from the structures they are supposed to protect and should
not be spaced more than 75 m apart as per the NFPA 24.
Piping for fire hydrants shall be installed in a ring main configuration
7.10.5 Automatic sprinkler systems

Automatic sprinkler systems shall be installed as per the requirements of NFPA 13.
Electrical rooms shall not be protected by an automatic sprinkler system but rather with clear agent
system.
7.10.6 Transformer protection Systems.

The probability of a transformer catching fire is low but not unheard off. Transformers typically contain
oil for cooling which is flammable. Purpose of the transformer fire protection is to prevent collateral
damage to neighbouring structures.
Such systems are not meant to protect transformer itself. Once a transformer catches fire it is lost,
therefore the most common system for transformer fire protection is a deluge system.
Deluge systems have another advantage of cooling and wetting adjacent surfaces making them more
difficult to catch fire.
The problem with deluge systems is that they require a lot of water (10 l/min /m2 as per the NFPA
guidance) since transformers contain oil, in case of fire water will be contaminated and it must not be
dumped into sewage of storm water system.
Oil will also float on top of water and it will take time to extinguish burning oil under the transformer.
Foam on the other hand has the advantage that it sticks to the surface and provides coverage so
burning oil fires are extinguished faster and less water is used.
Therefore the preferred system for transformer protection is deluge with foam.
When designing a deluge system, due consideration shall be given to the fact that water that is
discharged during fire event has to be drained away unless transformer is located in a bund of
sufficient capacity to hold the water. Water cannot just simply be drained to the nearest storm water
outlet because it might contain oil.
It is therefore required to have oil interceptor of sufficient capacity between the transformer
enclosure and discharge point.
A Holding tank of sufficient capacity is also acceptable. After the fire event holding tank can be
emptied and contaminated water properly discharged.
Page 175 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
7.11 HVAC System

Air conditioning shall be provided in all occupied spaces and in all spaces containing sensitive electrical
equipment (MCC rooms, VFD rooms etc.) where air cooling (cooling by ventilation) would result in
high number of air changes per hour (ACH).
Electrical rooms shall be of sufficient size to keep reasonable number of air changes from air-
conditioning. Generally, no more than 20 ACH shall be allowed. If number of air changes is very high
than the space will be draughty and it will be difficult to deliver air inside the room due to a large
number of diffusers or grilles that would be required.
Battery rooms need to be air conditioned as well, because life of batteries is greatly reduced if they
are not kept at optimal temperature which is between 22-24 °C for most types of batteries.
Battery rooms have to be provided with ventilation to reduce risk of H 2 build-up.
Plumbing, foul drainage and site storm water drainage shall be incorporated in design. Refer Civil
Design section of this Guideline.
7.11.1 Climatic information.

HVAC design shall be based on ASHRAE data for various cities in UAE.
Relevant data for major cities in UAE is tabulated below:

Table 7.5 – HVAC parameters for UAE Cities.
Parameter Unit Abu Dhabi Dubai Al Ain Sharjah

Latitude Deg 24.43N 25.25N 24.27N 25.33N
Longitude Deg 54.65E 55.33E 55.60E 55.52E
Elevation m 27.0 10.0 265.0 34.0
Summer design dry bulb °C 44.9 42.9 46.0 44.1
Summer coincident wet bulb °C 23.0 23.6 23.0 23.8
Summer daily range °C 9.9 9.9 13.0 13.2
Winter design dry bulb °C 11.1 12.9 10.9 9.9
Winter coincident wet bulb °C 6.4 7.4
Atmospheric clearness - 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Average ground reflectance - 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
Soil conductivity W/m/K 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
This data shall not be confused with the requirement that outdoor air-conditioning (AC) equipment
must be rated for operation at 52 °C.
7.11.2 Design conditions.

Following table gives required design internal conditions:
Table 7.6 –Design Internal Conditions.
Relative Humidity Temperature

Summer Winter
50 % (not controlled) 24 °C ± 2 °C 20 °C ± 2 °C
Page 176 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Air conditioning system shall be designed to achieve above temperatures under the full load
conditions.
Occupied spaces shall be supplied with fresh air as per the ASHRAE standard 62 1.
Since air humidity is typically not controlled, it will vary throughout the year and during part load
conditions. Consideration shall be given to the design of the fresh air system to limit humidity rise to
no more than 60% RH during part load conditions.
Ventilation system shall be designed either to achieve a prescribed rate of air changes per hour or to
keep the temperature rise inside the space to no more than 3 °C higher than the ambient temperature,
whichever results in a higher ventilation rate.
When calculating temperature rise, solar load must be taken into account as well as equipment load.
If not available, equipment thermal load can be calculated based on electrical load and equipment
efficiency. If efficiencies are not known at the time of design they can be estimated. Typical values for
common equipment are given in table below:
Table 7.7 – Typical Equipment Efficiencies.
Equipment Typical efficiencies Notes

Electrical motors 95%
UPS 95%
VFD 95%
Electrical panel containing buss-bars and 90%
circuit breakers
Transformer 98%
Required minimum ventilation rates for various spaces are given in a table below:
Table 7.8 –Minimum Ventilation Rates.
Space Ventilation rate Notes

Pump Hall 12 ach
Office, control rooms - Fresh air supply as per ASHRAE standard 62
Battery room 5 ach
Chlorination rooms 12 ach Chlorine gas is heavier than air so extract
grilles shall be at low level
Store rooms: 10 ach
Toilets: 10 ach
7.11.3 Standby Capacity and Redundancy.

Mission critical spaces where loss of air conditioning (AC) or ventilation would result in catastrophic
consequences shall be provided with N+1 configuration of AC or ventilation equipment.
Typical examples are VFD rooms or MCC rooms served by one or more AC units, At least one of the
units shall be standby.
1
ASHRAE Standard 62 – 2010 “ Ventilation for the acceptable indoor air quality”
Page 177 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Control system for AC or Ventilation equipment shall be capable of detecting the fault and starting
standby equipment automatically without the need for human intervention. In case of AC units such
as Chillers and packaged DX units this is easily achievable as such units typically can indicate faulty
state.
In case of fans additional equipment such as differential pressure transmitter is required to indicate
when fan is not running.
7.11.4 Cooling Load Calculations.

Calculations shall be carried out using commercially available software. As a minimum software must
use ASHRAE transfer function method 2 or CIBSE admittance method 3.
Software shall be able to calculate cooling load on hourly basis for each hour in one year.
Calculations shall be done in SI units.
7.11.5 Equipment.
7.11.5.1 Fans.
Fan type shall be selected based on application and required airflow and external static pressure.
If fans are to be installed inside the spaces where there is a risk of explosion they must be specified as
explosion proof.
Forward curved centrifugal fans shall not be used, only backward curved. This is due to overloading
nature of the power curve of the forward curved fan.
Care shall be taken when connecting two or more fans to the same discharge plenum. If fans are not
selected properly such configuration can cause so called “Hunting” where fans rapidly change state
between two or more operating points on the fan curve. This creates noise and can lead to increased
wear of the fan motors and damage to fan bearings.
7.11.5.2 Ducting.
Ducting shall be designed as per the ASHRAE Handbook 2013 Fundamentals chapter 21 “Duct Design”
Friction loss in ducting shall be calculated using Darcy-Weisbach equation with friction factor
calculated using Colebrook-White equation.
Ducting shall be designed using Equal friction method.
When selecting initial velocity in the ducting for equal friction method, consideration shall be given to
noise criteria in the space served by that particular ducting system.
Acoustic calculations shall be performed to make sure that noise levels inside the spaces comply with
regulations and requirements from the specification.
If rectangular ducts are used, calculations shall be based on circular equivalent as calculated by the
following formula
2
ASHRAE 2013 Handbook Fundamentals
3
CIBSE Guide A Environmental design
Page 178 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
1.30(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)0.625
𝐷𝐷 =
(𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏)0.25
Where:
𝐷𝐷 − 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 [𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚]

𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 − 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒ℎ𝑡𝑡 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤ℎ [𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚]
Dynamic losses due to duct fittings shall be calculated using local loss coefficient from reliable source
such as ASHRAE duct fitting database or similar.
Duct design shall comply with local fire codes and fire and smoke dampers shall be included where
required.
If required by the local fire code smoke detectors must be installed inside the return air ducting.
7.11.5.3 Duct and Piping Insulation.

Ducts and pipes conveying fluids whose temperature is lower than the dew point of the surrounding
air shall be thermally insulated to prevent condensation.
Ducts carrying fresh air that pass through the air-conditioned spaces must also be insulated to prevent
condensation.
Ventilation air ducts (supply or exhaust) passing through non air-conditioned spaces do not need to
be insulated.
Where installed outside and externally insulated, ducts shall be cladded. Purpose of cladding is to
protect insulation from elements.
7.11.5.4 Louvers, Grilles and Diffusers.

When selecting grilles and diffusers care shall be taken to ensure that velocity through the grilles is
sufficiently low so it won’t cause excessive noise.
Free area velocity through weather louvers shall not be more than 3 m/s to avoid excessive noise
Face velocity through Sand trap louvers shall not be more than 1 m/s to avoid noise and to maximise
sand capture ratio.
In case of large air flow this will result in large area of the sand trap louvers so coordination between
structural and architectural design is a must.
Grilles shall be specified with opposed blade dampers to allow for airflow balancing.
7.11.5.5 Filters.
Filters shall be designed based on application.
Table below gives guidance on type and grade of filters required for typical applications
Table 7.9 – Filter Design per Application.
Application Primary filter Secondary filter Tertiary filter

Comfort air conditioning Sand trap louver, G4 F7 bag or pleated F9 bag filter
pleated panel filter panel
Ventilation for spaces Sand trap louvers Washable metal filter -
such as generator rooms,
Page 179 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
transformer rooms,
battery rooms,
Ventilation for rooms Sand trap louver, G4 F5 bag or pleated F9 bag filter
housing sensitive pleated panel filter panel
electrical equipment such
as MCC room, VFD rooms,
Control rooms
7.11.5.6 Direct Expansion AC units.

For comfort and air-conditioning acceptable air conditioning unit types are packaged (with integrated
or remote condenser) DX air handling units and split DX AC.
Split DX AC units are units where evaporator unit must be installed inside the air-conditioned space.
Split DX AC units shall not be used for air-conditioning of the electrical rooms due to possibility of
leakage of the evaporator units.
Location of the units shall be determined on a case by case basis but generally they should be out of
sight if possible. Pump station roof is typically a good place for AC unit’s location.
7.11.5.7 Chilled water systems.

Chilled water system can be used in industrial applications such as: Liquid motor and VFD cooling or
in comfort cooling. It is unlikely, however, that chilled water system will be used for an application
where cooling load is less than 600 kW due to its complexity and costs.
Chilled water systems shall be designed as per “ASHRAE handbook HVAC systems and Equipment,
chapter 13, Hydronic heating and cooling”
Type of the chilled water system shall be either constant flow or constant primary-variable secondary
flow.
Variable primary flow chilled water system shall not be used due to its complexity
Chillers shall be designed in N+1 configuration if they are used for cooling mission-critical spaces.
Attention shall be taken to ensure that chilled water circuit has enough water content. If the water
content in the chilled water loop is not sufficient than chiller will achieve design temperature quickly
and compressor will switch off. When water temperature rises again compressor might not be able to
start immediately because of the inbuilt protection that stops compressors from starting too often.
To estimate required water content the following formula can be used:
𝑃𝑃 1
𝑄𝑄 = 35.83
∆𝑇𝑇 𝑁𝑁
Where:
𝑄𝑄 − 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑐𝑐ℎ𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 [𝑙𝑙]

𝑃𝑃 − 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 [𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘]
∆𝑇𝑇 − 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 [°𝐶𝐶]
𝑁𝑁 − 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Page 180 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
If the water content is not sufficient then a buffer vessel of suitable capacity shall be used.
7.11.6 VRF systems.

Variable Refrigerant Systems are a type of DX Unit where flow of refrigerant is variable, depending on
the load.
They have several benefits:
1. They are centralised so one condensing unit can serve multitude of evaporator units.
2. Evaporator units can be different capacity and type
3. They can have long piping lengths
4. They can work with 100% fresh air
When designing VRF systems care shall be taken to follow manufacturer’s recommendations about:
1. Maximum number of evaporator units that can be connected to condensing units.
2. Maximum piping length,
3. Maximum elevation difference.
Since all evaporator units are connected to one condensing unit, in case of failure of the condensing
unit cooling will be lost so for evaporator units to be redundant, they have to be connected to two
different circuits.
7.11.7 Air intakes and discharges

Care shall be taken to ensure that Air intakes and discharges are positioned at least 6 m away from
one another.
Air intake shall be positioned at least 3m above ground level to avoid dust ingress.
Air intakes shall be positioned at least 6 m away from any source of contaminated air such as generator
exhaust or similar.
Any air intake shall be protected by a sand trap louver.
Page 181 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
7.12 Well System

Borehole wells are used for underground water extraction.
7.12.1 Well casing.

Purpose of the well casing is to prevent collapse of the well. Materials for the casing shall be selected
based on well depth, formation pressure etc.
Casing shall be of sufficient diameter to allow for insertion of production equipment (Pumps). There
shall be sufficient gap between casing and the motor or pump casing to allow for water flow.
7.12.2 Screen.
Purpose of the screen is to prevent large debris entering the well.
It is typical achieved by cutting slots in the well casing. Size of the slots shall be sufficient allow for
water flow but small enough to prevent debris entering the well.
Where there is a need to prevent ingress of sand inside the well a geotextile sheet shall be used to
wrap around the screen.
7.12.3 Riser pipes

Riser pipes shall be installed with centralisers to locate pipes at the centre of the bore.
7.12.4 Well pumps.

Well pumps are centrifugal multistage pumps.
Both types, radial and mixed flow, are acceptable. Mixed flow design is typically used when more flow
is required and radial type where there is a high head.
Since ground water in Abu Dhabi can have high content of chloride, corrosion protection of the pump
will generally be required.
There shall be sufficient clearance between pump and the casing of the well. In wells where well
screen is below the motor water has to pass between pump motor and the well casing , in wells where
well screen is above the motor water has to pass between pump body and the wall casing. In any case
if the clearance is not sufficient water passing will create high headloss. This can result in under-
performance of the pump.
Submersible motors must be cooled at a flow rate of not less than 0.15 m/s (that is flow rate past the
motor) or motor life will be shortened. If flow rate of 0.15 m/s cannot be achieved then a cooling
sleeve must be specified.
Page 182 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
7.13 Tap-Off Station system

7.13.1 Control Valves.
Control valves are used for flow or pressure control to deliver water at adequate flow or pressure to
consumers. There are many types of control valves but they all have common characteristics that need
attention. When designing Tap-Off Stations designer should consider requirements for back-up power
and control integration with up-stream/downstream pump stations.
7.13.1.1 Valve Stroking Range.

Control valves shall be selected so that they operate in the linear part of the valve characteristic curve.
Typical control valves depending on the type of the trim will have linear characteristic between certain
degrees of opening positions. Valves shall be selected to operate in that range for the full range of
possible flows.
7.13.1.2 Valve Cavitation.

Cavitation in valves is phenomena that occurs due to localised low pressure zones. If the pressure
drops below the vapour pressure of the fluid, fluid will vaporise and vapour bubbles will flow
downstream until pressure recovers which will then cause bubbles to violently implode potentially
causing severe pitting to pipe lining and coating.
When selecting valves, cavitation calculations shall be performed for a full range of possible flow, to
confirm that valve will not cavitate.
7.13.2 Types of Control Valves

There are many different types of control valves. Two preferred types are nozzle control valve and
globe control valve.
7.13.2.1 Nozzle Control Valve

Nozzle control valve are preferred type of control valve. This is because of the following reasons:
1. Headloss through nozzle control valve is lower than through other type of valves
2. Main valve seal is located in hydraulically uncritical pressure zone which results in less damage
and longer seal life.
3. They have superior cavitation characteristics compared to other type of valves. This is due to
concentration of flow towards the middle of the pipe so any steam bubbles that form when
imploding will be concentrated towards the middle of the pipe, far from the pipe wall where
they can’t cause any damage.
4. Large number of different valve trims are available to suit almost any flow condition.
5. Stroking range is much wider than for other types of valves so their controllability is superior
for the wider range of opening positions.
7.13.2.2 Globe Control Valve

Globe control valves are also acceptable in cases when higher cost of Nozzle control valve can’t be
justified. Like with other valves care shall be taken when selecting globe control valves so that they
operate in the linear part of the valve characteristic curve.
Potential for cavitation in globe control valves is much higher than for Nozzle valves so calculations
have to be performed to make sure that valve will not cavitate for the full range of possible flows.
Page 183 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
7.13.2.3 Pressure reducing valves
Pressure reducing valve is a control valve that maintains set pressure downstream of the valve
regardless of the upstream pressure and flow variations as long as the upstream pressure is higher
than the set pressure.
Preferred type of the pressure reducing valve is pilot operated automatic valve.
Pressure reducing valve must be able to close drip tight when downstream pressure exceeds the set
value.
When selecting pressure reducing valve, cavitation calculations must be performed to make sure that
valve will not cavitate under all flow conditions. Various nonstandard trims are typically available to
improve cavitation performance of a typical pressure reducing valve
7.13.2.4 Pressure sustaining valves

Pressure sustaining valve is control valve that maintains set pressure upstream of the valve regardless
of the downstream pressure and flow variations as long as downstream pressure is lower than the
upstream pressure.
Preferred type of pressure sustaining valve is pilot operated automatic valve.
Pressure sustaining valve must be able to close drip tight when upstream pressure drops below the
set value.
When selecting pressure sustaining valve, cavitation calculations must be performed to make sure
that valve will not cavitate under all flow conditions. Various nonstandard trims are typically available
to improve cavitation performance of the valve.
7.13.2.5 Pressure relief valves

Pressure relief valves must be installed when there is a danger that failure of the control valve can
lead to high pressure downstream. In other words if pressure reducing valve fails open dangerous
pressures can be transferred to downstream pipework.
Pressure relief valve will open when pressure upstream of the valve is higher than the set pressure.
Pressure relief will be achieved by water discharge through the valve.
This type of valves can discharge large amounts of water when fully open so consideration shall be
given to where that water will drain.
Preferred type of pressure relief valve is pilot operated diaphragm valve.
Page 184 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
7.14 Diesel Fuel Storage and Transfer

Diesel fuel is typically stored on site to power diesel generators where diesel generators are required.
Diesel fuel systems shall be designed as per the NFPA 30, Flammable Liquid Code.
7.14.1 Storage tanks.

A bulk storage tank and a day tank are required. Bulk storage tank is to be located outside of the
generator building and day tank inside the building close to the generator.
Purpose of the day tank is to avoid having large quantities of flammable diesel fuel stored inside the
building.
Capacity of the bulk tank shall be enough to enable the generator to run for 7 days at full capacity.
Capacity of the day tank shall be sufficient to enable the generator to run at full load for 8 hours.
Day tank shall have at least following fittings and features:

1. Inspection cover.
2. Breather/vent pipe.
3. Inlet pipe connection.
4. Outlet pipe connection.
5. Drain valve.
6. Drain pipe connection.
7. Emergency dump valve and connection.
8. Contents gauge.
9. Level instruments to control transfer pumps.
10. Level instruments for alarms.
11. Lifting lugs.
Outlet pipe connection shall not be at the bottom of the tank.
Emergency dump valve shall open in case of fire and contents of the tank shall be damped to a storage
sump outside the building
The Day tank shall be located inside a bund. Bund capacity shall be at least 1.5 times volume of the
largest day tank inside the bund.
The Bund shall have sump to enable pumping of diesel fuel with portable pump in case of fuel spillage.
Main storage tank shall have at least following features:
1. Inspection manhole
2. Breather/vent pipes
Page 185 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
3. Inlet pipe connection
4. Outlet pipe connection
5. Valved drain
6. Isolating valves
7. Visual fuel level indicator
Care shall be taken when selecting location for the diesel tank. It shall comply with requirements of
NFPA 30.
NFPA 30 specifies minimum distances between tank and site boundary or nearby buildings. Distance
depends on tank capacity so it is important to plan location of the tank early in the project.
7.14.2 Diesel Fuel Pumps.

Purpose for the diesel pumps is to transfer diesel fuel from the bulk storage tank to the day tank.
Pumps are to be operated on level switch. Once the level in the day tank reaches “tank empty” level
pumps shall start until level reaches “tank full” level.
Diesel pumps shall be positive displacement pumps such as rotary lobe type.
Diesel fuel pumps shall be installed inside the bund. On the suction side of the pumps a duplex, manual
changeover, basket strainer shall be installed.
Pumps shall be located outside of the building and shaded from the sun.
7.14.3 Diesel Fuel Pipelines.

Pipes used for diesel fuel transfer shall be carbon steel minimum schedule 40.
Page 186 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
8 I&C Works
8.1 Introduction
8.1.1 Objective
contracts for TRANSCO.
The Design Guidelines describe the design requirement for the instrumentation and controls for the
projects. They are to be read in conjunction with the latest versions of the following documents:
• ADWEA Standard Instrumentation and Control Specifications for Water Works (W-I-SS-001 to
W-I-SS-009)
• ADWEA/ADDC/AADC Standard S-AAA-GEN-SFL General Requirements System Characteristics
• Water Transmission Security Standards (WTSS)
• ADWEA Standard Electrical Specifications for Water Works (W-E-SS-001 to W-I-SS-014)
• Metering and Data Exchange Code The latest version (MDEC)

TRANSCO shall provide the following typical document to the Consultant/Contractor on
commencement of design:
• Existing TRANSCO instrumentation and control network models (if any)
• As built drawings for P&IDs, control system architecture, etc. (existing systems)
• Operation and control philosophy (existing systems)
• Layout drawings of the control panels and equipment (Existing systems)
• Telecommunication network layout (Existing systems)
8.1.3 Glossary of Terms
Term Definition
A/M Auto-Manual
ATS Automatic Transfer Switch
CCTV Closed Circuit Television
DCS Distributed Control System
DMZ De-militarised zone (between SCADA and corporate networks)
EEMUA Engineering Equipment and Materials Users Association
GUI Graphic User Interface
Page 187 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Term Definition
H/O/A Hand-Off-Auto
HMI Human Machine Interface
ICA Instrumentation, Control and Automation
L/O/R Local-Off-Remote
LAN Local Area Network
LCP Local Control Panel
LCS Local Control Station
LDC Load Dispatch Centre
MCC Motor Control Center
MCCVCP Motor Vendor Control Center Panel (Supplied by Equipment Vendor)
O/A/C Open-Auto-Close
O/S/C Open-Stop-Close
OIT Operator Interface Terminal
OWS Operator Work Station
P&ID Piping and Instrumentation Diagram
PCS Process Control System
PID Proportional-Integral-Derivative
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
RIO Remote Input Output
RTU Remote Terminal Unit
S/S Start-Stop
SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
SCS Station Control System
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
VCP Vendor Control Panel (Supplied by Equipment Vendor)
VFD Variable Frequency Drive
WAN Wide Area Network
MDEC Metering and Data Exchange Code
PMP Pump Monitoring Panel
Page 188 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Term Definition
PFD Process Flow Diagram
OCP Operation and Control Philosophy
ESD Emergency Shut Down
FOC Fibre Optic Cable
OPGW Optical Ground Wire
8.1.4 Environment
The following minimum climate conditions apply unless advised otherwise by TRANSCO
• Outdoor Humidity 100%
• Outdoor Temperature (under Shade) 55°C
• Indoor Humidity 20- 80%
• Indoor Temperature Pump room 50°C
• Indoor Temperature Control Room 45°C
• Direct Sunlight 85°C
8.1.5 Typical Projects

The following are typical projects carried out by TRANSCO:
• Pumping Stations and pipelines

• Reservoirs/Tanks
• Interface points- Tap off valve and metering
• Tanker Water Filling Stations
• Water Wells
• Chemical dosing facilities

• Water quality monitoring stations
8.2 Preliminary design

8.2.1 Procedure
The purpose of the Preliminary Design task is to identify the key elements of the design to ensure that
the final installation will meet the functional requirements and performance of TRANSCO.
During the preliminary design phase, the Consultant is expected to:
• Visit the existing facility, or similar facility, and familiarize themselves with the existing
interfaces, PCS equipment including tagging, software, control strategies, and network
architecture to be matched and/or upgraded.
• Review all engineering reports and drawings for the ICA system related to the project.
Page 189 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
• Review previous preliminary design report(s) and detailed designs prepared for the ICA
system.
• Conduct a Project commencement meeting. The purpose of the meeting is for the Consultant
to introduce their project team and have a discussion on the general strategy and goals of the
project.
8.2.2 Design Documents

In the Preliminary design report (PDR), the following elements should appear, but not limited to:
• Equipment and Instrumentation List - Design equipment and instrumentation to permit full
monitoring and control capability under manual and/or automatic control.
• Servers/PLCs/Network - Review and document all existing hardware affected by the project,
and determine system capacity. Discuss capability for expansion and identify all additional
hardware required for modifications so as to fully integrate the new or expanded works into
the existing system. Identify all obsolete hardware that must be replaced as part of the
upgrading of the existing or expansion of the process control system.
• Control Wiring and Structured Cabling – Review and document all existing control wiring and
network cabling, and identify all additional cabling that will be required so as to fully integrate
the new or expanded works into the existing system.
• Alarm Notification and Security – Review the existing alarm notification and security system
of the facility, and document the proposed modifications and additions to provide the
required services for notification of the critical PCS alarms of the project.
• Process Narrative – Provide a Process Narrative or update existing for each process, clearly
describing how it is to be operated in all modes of process control. Process narratives to
provide a clear understanding of the relationships between the equipment and the process
variables to be monitored/controlled.
• Process Flow Diagrams – Provide a Process Flow Diagram (PFD) or update existing to clearly
illustrate the relationships between the various affected processes and associated
instrumentation.
• Design Alternatives – The Consultant should include a section detailing any alternative
designs that they feel might offer benefits to the Client in terms of cost or functionality.
• Cost Estimate – Include a cost estimate to construct the project according to the guidelines.
8.3 Final design

During final design stage, the final design report (FDR) shall be provided by Consultant containing the
following documents, but not limited to:
• Operation Control Philosophy (OCP) - The Consultant shall update the plant control
philosophy for all new processes. The new control philosophy shall describe the plant and
instrumentation, list all modes of operation, steps for each sequence and define the
interaction of control blocks for each continuous control algorithm. All events and alarm
conditions shall be listed, with details of the trigger, deadbands, timers, alarm priority,
triggered action and reset conditions (including how any manual reset will be carried out).
Interlocks, inhibits and emergency shutdown systems shall be detailed. Systems for protection
of people and the environment shall be subject to a SIL assessment and production of a Safety
Requirements Specification (SRS), in line with IEC 61508 and IEC 61511.
Page 190 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
• P&IDs - The Consultant shall prepare new P&IDs or update the existing P&IDs (master P&IDs)
provided by the Client. The instrumentation symbols and control and instrumentation loop
diagrams are generally based on the International Society of Automation Standards ANSI/ISA-
S5.1.
• SCADA Architecture Drawings – The Consultant shall prepare new SCADA Architecture
drawing or update the existing SCADA Architecture drawing of the facility, to show
modifications and additions of equipment.
• I/O List – The Consultant shall prepare the complete I/O list in tabular format indicating the
signal tag name, type, associated equipment, range, etc. The I/O signals shall be grouped as
much as possible based on the process area and equipment.
• Tele Information Plan List – The Consultant shall provide a list of data to be provided to local
pumping station SCADA and via telemetry to the Master SCADA (WCC Water SCADA System)
at the LDC.
• Equipment Power Requirements – The Consultant shall provide drawings and specifications
for any power supply upgrades or additions required as a result of new or modified
equipment.
• Cost Estimate – Provide an updated cost estimate.
Note-
1- The final instrument tag list shall be prepared by the EPC Contractor and will be submitted for
review and approval.
2- All the auxiliary systems such as fire alarm, HVAC, fans/blowers, anti-flooding, breakers
open/close status, etc. shall be interfaced with station control system.
Following the final design report (FDR) approval, the Consultant shall submit the Tender documents
for review and approval.
8.4 Design Criteria

8.4.1 General
The overall control system design should be one which highlights ease of use, resiliency to component
failure, modular construction/maintenance fail safe, and regional parts and support availability. The
process control system will be designed in accordance with typical commercial production facilities
standards. Design criteria intended to support the philosophical approach are bulleted below.
• The system installation approach will be geared toward location of electronic components
within secured facilities to the greatest extent possible. Where electronic components must
be installed outdoors, enclosures will be secured.
• Use of air conditioning units in remote panels will be avoided, if possible: panels components
will be designed for extreme conditions and outdoor panels will be designed to reflect /
radiate heat away from the panel.
• The selected control system equipment will be required to have regional repair, and
configuration support and readily available spare parts.
• Centralized control at the facility will be provided, thereby concentrating key components
within secure areas.
Page 191 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
• The use of redundant components will allow the process to continue uninterrupted and
maintenance tasks to be planned/scheduled. Redundancy shall include:
o Redundant WAN fiber optic cabling
o Use of redundant controllers, switches and routers when appropriate
o Use of redundant SCADA servers
o Use of redundant online power supplies for panels, communication hubs and key
network components.
8.4.2 Control System Philosophy

The general control philosophy at the facility is to provide a high level of automation with the minimal
use of selector switches and pushbutton controls. Manual control will typically be performed from the
computer based control system and not via control panels and pushbutton control stations. Control
logic will not be distributed outside the Plant control system, except in the case of vendor furnished
packages.
PLC and remote I/O cabinets will be strategically located in the pump station area. The main process
equipment packages will each be supplied with a main PLC processor, along with either remote I/O
cabinets or additional PLC cabinets which will accommodate all I/O points for that package. Additional
PLC processor with remote I/O cabinets may be provided to handle all other I/O for the facility area
outside of the package systems. Each PLC and remote I/O cabinet will be supplied from an
uninterruptible power supply (UPS).
The fiber optic cables will connect the remote I/O cabinets, remote reservoirs/tanks and tap off
control valves to the central computer system, tying in to an Ethernet switch in the building control
room. The Ethernet switch will provide connection capability for additional PLCs, workstations and
other control interfaces that are anticipated in future phases of the expansion of the project.
Workstations at the control room of the plant will serve as the operation staff's primary “window”
into the process, and will be configured to display all process information. The workstations will enable
the plant staff to monitor, interrogate, manipulate, and document plant processes. HMI terminals at
the PLC cabinets will serve as the secondary “window” into the process for the operations staff, but
are intended primarily for use by the equipment package vendors during testing and startup. The
touch screen HMI terminals will allow the plant staff to locally monitor the individual package
equipment processes for the facility systems. One large screen monitor shall be provided in control
room.
I/O depicted on the P&ID drawings for each process area will be displayed on the human machine
interface (HMI) control screens and all analogue data (as well as alarms and status points) will be
historically collected, recorded and trended. Generated control screens will be consistent in
presentation, quality, colour usage, symbol usage, and navigation options will be developed through
meetings with TRANSCO.
8.4.3 Process and Instrumentation Diagrams

Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&ID’s) will be developed as part of the Instrumentation,
Control and Automation (ICA) design for the facility and associated facilities. The P&ID’s will be drawn
in compliance with the International Society for Automation (ISA) Standard S5.1 and Client’s
standards. Diagram format including symbols and abbreviations will be shown in drawings. For the
typical P&ID arrangement in the water distribution refer to Attachment 1.
Page 192 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
8.5 Control System Architecture

8.5.1 Control overview
Each piece of equipment, such as a pump, valve, blower, chemical feeder, etc., will be controlled from
the station control system. Remote manual control, via the computer control system, will be from the
SCADA System operator interface stations. All automatic functions will be provided through the local
PLC, with a supervisory interface through the central computer control system. Local monitoring of
individual equipment packages will be available at the PLC panel mounted Human-Machine Interface
(HMI) or Graphical User Interface (GUI) terminals.
Control panels supplied with vendor-supplied package type equipment, such as sump pumps and
chemical feed pumps, will locally control the equipment in an automatic mode with monitoring
performed through the plant wide SCADA control system.
Local control will typically be performed via control panels and pushbutton control stations. Lock-out,
emergency stop pushbuttons will be provided at each piece of equipment. Where system control
panels or area control panels are required, local monitoring and control of equipment will be provided
via a graphical Human-Machine Interface (HMI) or Graphical User Interface (GUI) panel. These touch
screen panels may be used to display complex local controls at the field panel. The HMI or GUI will
communicate with the local PLC and will be configured to display specific data for the process area
and will allow control of the local equipment. Local manual control will be through the use of
hardwired selector switches and pushbuttons at the equipment.
Field sensors, process control equipment, and final control elements will be directly hard wired to RIO
rack module and PLCs. Control logic will reside in the PLCs. PLC and remote I/O cabinets will be
strategically located throughout the plant. Considerations in selecting locations will be the process
area, reducing conduit and wiring lengths, non-hazardous locations, and non-corrosive locations.
For the typical pump station overall control architecture refer to the Appendices.
8.5.2 Pump/Valve Control philosophy

The pump station will be designed for unattended operation using a PLC based control system with
remote monitoring and control. The control system will be automated to achieve maximum efficiency
without providing undue complexity to the operations or maintenance personnel. Modes of control
will be as defined in W-I-SS-002 section 10.2 and 10.3.
8.5.3 Emergency Shutdown

One emergency shutdown button will be located on a Local control panel (LCP). The emergency stop
pushbutton will shut down the associated pump. The LCP will also contain an emergency stop reset
button that can only be operated locally. The pump will only become available once the reset has been
operated.
Emergency Stops and Emergency Shut Down systems shall only use hardwired circuits acting directly
on the power to the final element, wherever possible. Where necessary, variable speed drive "safe
stop" functions may be considered. For complex shutdown systems (anything more than emergency
stop pushbuttons acting directly on a motor starter), a SIL assessment shall be carried out to determine
the required Safety Integrity Level.
8.5.4 Control Mode Design Considerations

The Instrumentation and Control system will be designed to implement the aforementioned control
modes as efficiently and as effectively as possible while complying with all appropriate standards and
Page 193 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
guidelines. Design choices will be made that provide potential minimum long term cost of ownership
both in terms of energy use and equipment maintenance.
8.5.5 Control and Monitoring Requirements

The control and monitoring objective is to provide efficient and effective control of the pumping
station. This will be accomplished by ensuring adequate and sufficient information is available to both
the automatic control system and the supervisory system. The supervisory system includes the LDC as
well.
8.5.6 Tagging and Naming Conventions

All Instrument tagging shall comply with the TRANSCO’s tagging system.
8.6 Process Requirements and Field Devices

8.6.1 Instrumentation Design Criteria
• The overriding philosophy is that all manual and automatic control actions must have a means
of positive feedback, to indicate and log that the control action has been successful. For
example, actuation of a solenoid valve shall be confirmed by the use of a flow or pressure
signal. All continuously-controlled parameters shall have an analogue instrument for
measuring and monitoring the accuracy and repeatability of control.
• "Smart" instruments will be utilized where cost effective, with hardwired instruments in all
other cases.
• Outdoor instruments will be designed with appropriate environmental considerations.
• Analyzers will be reagent less type and equipped with smart sensors.
• Ultrasonic type, or radar type or hydrostatic type level measurement could be used depending
on the process requirement and Client's approval
• Magnetic flow meters will be the preferred flow measurement instrument in primary process.
24VDC or loop-power will be the preferred scheme with quick-connections for signal (and
power where applicable).
The PLC units’ hardware and software employed at all SCADA workstations and operator interfaces
shall comply with the client’s preferred list.
Communications to valve actuators, instruments, and variable frequency drive (VFD) units will be by
network communications when cost effective. For other interfaces and instruments, hard wiring or
owner preferred equipment will be utilized. The inter-building/site communication medium will be
fiber optic cable with redundant pairs. All controllers and control panels will be furnished with
monitored, redundant power supplies and all area equipment groupings will be supported by smart
Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) units (with relay-card interface), monitored by the control system
via hardwire connection.
8.6.2 Level Measurement

Reservoir or tank level measurements will be made using a pressure transducer or an ultrasonic level
transducer, or radar sensor. The analogue signal will be taken back to the process area PLC.
Page 194 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
8.6.3 Level Switch
A reservoir or tank high and/or low level switch will be provided to increase reliability of detecting a
level alarm before the reservoir or tank overflows, or the pumps associated with the low level in the
reservoir or tank are damaged.
Depending upon the final configuration of a process area, an area flood monitoring switch will be
provided to detect accumulation of water resulting from a high level in a sump or flooded floor. Level
switch digital signals will be taken back to the process area PLC. Hardwired level signals also shall be
used for critical interlocking and inhibits, especially for those inhibits required to prevent equipment
damage if operated in manual mode.
8.6.4 Pressure Measurement

Selected pressure measurements of process lines, or differential pressure measurements across
devices and valves, will be monitored by the process area PLC.
8.6.5 Pressure Switch

A Low suction pressure switch will be hardwired into the pump control circuit to provide pump
protection. An auxiliary contact on the pressure switch will be taken to the pump PLC for monitoring
and alarming purposes.
8.6.6 Temperature Measurement

Process temperature measurements will be made using an RTD and temperature transmitter. The
analogue signal will be taken back to the process area PLC.
8.6.7 Vibration Measurement

The vibration level will be measured for pumps and motors. The interface device output 4-20mA will
be monitored at PLC and alarm/trip signal is used for alarm annunciation and a trip circuit.
8.6.8 Flow Measurement

Most process flow rate measurements will be measured using a magnetic flowmeter. Some
measurements will be measured by other type flow meters such as insertion type flowmeter
depending on the process line, location and flow capacity. Air flow measurements will be measured
by a mass thermal flow type flowmeter. The flow rate signals will be transmitted to the process area
PLC and totalized.
Note: The Contractor shall pay special attention during installation of flow sensor on water pipes. The
minimum straight distance upstream and downstream of Insertion flow sensor shall be according to
manufacturer recommendation.
Settlement metering system- The settlement metering equipment shall be installed inside a chamber
at interface points with ADDC or other customers. To interface with Transco's communication
network, one data logger/RTU and appropriate modem shall be utilized in the local control cabinet
(data logger cabinet). The telecommunication to nearest sub-station (outstation) shall be through
either digital radio or GSM, which shall be decided by Distribution Company (Licensed Operator
Company)
The settlement flow meters shall be in compliance with the latest MDEC requirement.
8.6.9 Analytical Measurement

The process will be measured for water quality with the respective analyzers. The analyzers will
generally measure turbidity, pH, conductivity, chlorine residual, ammonia, and other parameters. All
Page 195 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
analytical measured signals will be transmitted to the process area PLC for logging, display and
generation of alarms.
8.6.10 Instrumentation Schedule

The Contractor shall generate the Instrumentation Schedule, as an appendix to the specifications that
will list all instruments for the project. Instruments within the package systems will not be in the list
as they are inclusive to the package system itself.
As a minimum, the instruments will conform to the instrumentation list in:
Table 8.1: PUMP STATION
Table 8.2: RESERVOIR/SURGE VESSEL
Table 8.3: FIELD INSTRUMENTS/INTERFACE POINT

Table 8.1 – Pumping Station Instrumentation List.
Measurement Sensor Type Signal Type Applications QTY

SUCTION MAIN
Pressure switch Pressure ON-OFF Suction main 2
Pressure transmitter Diaphragm. Refer to Analogue 4-20mA Suction main 1
Clause 6.3 in WI-SS-
001
PUMP SUCTION
Pressure gauge Bourdon Gauge Pump suction 1
Pressure switch Refer to Clause 6.2 in ON-OFF Pump suction 1
WI-SS-001
PUMP DISCHARGE
Pressure gauge Bourdon Gauge Pump discharge 1
before NRV
Flow switch Refer to Clause 5.2 in ON-OFF Pump discharge 1
WI-SS-001
Pressure transmitter Diaphragm. Refer to Analogue 4-20mA Pump discharge 1
Clause 6.3 in WI-SS- before NRV
001
PUMP SET
Vibration sensor Vibration element Interface device Pump set- drive 1
end (DE) bearing
Vibration sensor Vibration element Interface device Pump set- non 1
drive end (NDE)
bearing
Temperature RTD Interface device Pump set- drive 1
measurement end (DE) bearing
Temperature RTD Interface device Pump set- non 1
measurement drive end (NDE)
bearing
Temperature RTD Interface device Pump set- Casing 1
measurement
Page 196 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Bearing oil level Gauge Pump set- If
indicator applicable
MOTOR SET
Vibration sensor Vibration element Interface device Motor set- drive 1
end (DE) bearing
Vibration sensor Vibration element Interface device Motor set- non 1
drive end (NDE)
bearing
Temperature RTD Interface device Motor set- drive 1
measurement end (DE) bearing
Temperature RTD Interface device Motor set- non 1
measurement drive end (NDE)
bearing
Bearing oil level Motor set- If
indicator applicable
Heat exchanger Refer to Clause 5.6 in Motor set- If
temperature WE-SS-004 applicable
Temperature RTD Interface device Motor winding 1 for
measurement winding temperature each
MAIN DISCHARGE PIPE

Pressure transmitter Diaphragm. Refer to Analogue 4-20mA Main discharge 2
Clause 6.3 in WI-SS- pipe- Send alarm
001 if pressure is high
Pressure switch Refer to Clause 6.2 in ON-OFF Main discharge 1
WI-SS-001 pipe
Pressure gauge Bourdon Gauge Discharge 1
pressure of PS
Flow measurement Electromagnetic Analogue 4-20mA PS discharge flow 1
SUMP PUMP and ANTI-FLOODING SYSTEM – PUMP HALL
Level switches at sump Float- IP68 ON-OFF SUMP Low, high, 3
1- Location 1 HiHi indication
and control
Level switches at sump Float- IP68 ON-OFF SUMP Low, high, 3
2- Location 2 HiHi indication
and control
Table 8.2 – Reservoir / Surge Vessel Instrumentation List.
RESERVOIR/ TANKS
Level Measurements Ultrasonic or Analogue 4-20mA Reservoir, Tank, 1
Chemical Tanks
Radar or Analogue 4-20mA Chemical Tanks,
Pressurized Tanks
Page 197 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Hydrostatic Analogue 4-20mA Chemical Tanks,
Pressurized Tanks
Level Gauge Diaphragm pressure Gauge Bottom of 1
reservoir/ Tank
Min. 300mm DIA
meter scale
Level switch Float- IP66 ON-OFF Reservoir, Tank, 1
Chemical Tanks
Level Controlled Surge Vessel
Level measurement Radar type Analogue 4-20mA On top of surge 1
vessel
Level Indication Diff. pressure type Analogue 4-20mA Local level 1
indication- digital
indicator
Pressure switch Refer to Clause 6.2 in ON-OFF On the air 1
WI-SS-001 receiver- part of
compressor
package
Pressure gauge Bourdon Gauge On top for vessel 1
air pressure
indication
Mass/pV Control Surge Vessel
Level measurement Radar type Analogue 4-20mA On top of surge 1
vessel
Level indication- Gauge Diff pressure Gauge On side of vessel-
Min. 300mm DIA
meter scale
Temperature RTD Interface device For air 1
transmitter temperature
measurement for
mass calculator
Pressure transmitter Diaphragm. Refer to Analogue 4-20mA For air pressure
Clause 6.3 in WI-SS- measurement for
001 mass calculator
Pressure gauge Bourdon Gauge On top for vessel 1
air pressure
indication
Diaphragm type Surge Vessel

Local level gauge glass Direct read magnetic Gauge Surge vessel side 1
type glass
Pressure gauge Bourdon Gauge Vessel pressure 1
indication
Table 8.3 – Field Instruments (Note 1) – Instrumentation List.
Tap off Interface point Control valve
Page 198 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Indicating Pressure Diaphragm. Refer Analogue 4-20mA Upstream of the 1
transmitter to Clause 6.3 in WI- Control Valve
SS-001
Indicating Pressure Diaphragm. Refer Analogue 4-20mA downstream of 2
transmitter to Clause 6.3 in WI- the Control Valve
SS-001
Pressure gauge Bourdon Gauge Upstream and 2
downstream of
the Control Valve
Flow measurement Electromagnetic Pulse In case of 1
settlement
application- FM is
MDEC compliant.
Installed inside the
Chamber
Diff. pressure switch Refer WI-SS-001 ON-OFF DP across Strainer 1
PH Analyzer Particular Spec Analogue 4-20mA Water quality 1
monitoring.
RTU shelter
Conductivity Analyzer Particular Spec Analogue 4-20mA Water quality 1
monitoring
RTU shelter g.
Residual chlorine Particular Spec Analogue 4-20mA Water quality 1
Analyzer monitoring.
RTU shelter
Temperature switch Refer WI-SS-001- ON-OFF Shelter high temp 1
Clause 8.2 alarm
Door switch- Shelter door Switch ON-OFF Shelter door 1
open/close alarm
Note 1
• All the above field instruments except the water quality analyzer and flowmeter transmitter
are loop powered from the RTU.
• The analyzer and the flowmeter transmitter are fed from a UPS supply.
• The water quality analyzer and flow transmitter shall be installed inside the RTU shelter
satisfying the shelter equipment layout drawing.
• The field instruments are connected to a PLC-based RTU (Remote Terminal Unit), programmed
in an IEC 61131 compliant language to achieve the required function of process monitoring
and control/override and protection loops for the Control valve of the interface points as per
TRANSCO requirement as stated in Operation and Control philosophy. The RTU is fed from the
UPS. This control system RTU shall be integrated to the upstream pump station and also to
LDC
• Telecom cabinet and SDH network interface shall be installed in the RTU shelter for
telecommunication of the signal to the other interface point RTUs/Pump station and LDC.
Page 199 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
For the instrument type and Nos. refer to the typical process diagram (Attachment 1) attached to this
document. The process flow diagram and instruments are indicative only. The Consultant will design
the complete system as per the project design requirement according to the TRANSCO’s design
guidelines and standard specifications.
8.7 Major Automation Hardware and Software

8.7.1 General
The control equipment and communications networks will have sufficient capacity and speed to
control and monitor the plant without jitter or interruptions. SCADA shall meet the response times
specified in ADWEA Specification W-I-SS-002, section 13.
The control system design will achieve a full, high level of redundancy. The failure of any one
component will not stop the process operation. The failure will be reported in the HMI/SCADA.
All the control components shall be replaceable and hot reconfigurable, without interrupting the
power.
The I/O modules shall be either located in process area or in electrical rooms. No I/O card will be
connected directly to the controller. As far as possible, equipment connected to each I/O module shall
be grouped in such a way that failure of one unit will not affect the whole plant operation.
All the controllers and servers will be redundant. The RIO will not be redundant. Only the power supply
and communication coupler (converter) will be redundant for the RIO.
All automation equipment (controllers, I/O, server, PC, switches, etc.) shall be fitted with a redundant
power supply.
8.7.2 PLC Hardware Requirements

The PLCs will have the appropriate processing and memory capacity. PLCs will have redundant power
supplies. The overall control system shall be based on a dual, hot standby configuration. The inputs
and outputs for the PLC will be 240VAC/24VDC for the discrete points, and 4-20 mA DC points for the
analogue signal inputs and outputs. Network compatible cards may be utilized for power
management, protection devices, variable speed drive units and using standardized interface
protocols.
The PLCs will match with the Client’s current PLC manufacturer/model preferred list.
As a minimum, the PLCs/RTUs will have the following communication protocol options, however the
Consultant shall coordinate with client prior to final design stage:
• Industrial standard, IEEE 802.3, 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet
• Modbus RS-485
• Profibus DP and PA
• Serial RS232 programming port
• DNP3 Level 3
• IEC 60870-5-101/104
• IEC 61850 / UCA 2
Page 200 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
For the PLC specification refer to ADWEA W-I-SS-002 section 8
8.7.3 Remote I/O Blocks

The field RIO blocks will read the digital and analogue signals. Each RIO will be dedicated to an
independent functional unit (e.g. MCC, pump, valve, etc.) and connected on the PROFIBUS DP network
via FO/Cu coupler or directly over twisted pair copper cable.
8.7.4 Backup Power Supplies (Uninterruptable Power Supply)

Uninterruptable Power Supplies (UPS) will be provided for the entire control and instrumentation
system. The UPS will maintain conditioned power to all associated loads under normal conditions (line
power available) and also under battery-powered conditions (for 8 hours period). For detail refer to
ADWEA W-E-SS-009.
8.7.5 Servers
These shall be specified and configured as defined in ADWEA specification W-I-SS-002, in particular
sections 6.1, 12.2.D and 12.2.I. Intel Xeon servers shall be installed, in a redundant architecture.
Depending on the type, size and complexity of the control system the number and functions of servers
will vary. Typical servers used in pump station facility shall be as following:
• Data servers are designed for recording data (HMI, events, alarms, trends, etc.). Each operator
workstation will be connected to data server to read / write the common parameters / values.
Equipment shall be installed in server panel(s) (bays) 19” in the server room.
• Historian servers are designed for recording data for longer time of operation (HMI, events,
alarms, trends, etc.) from Data server. Each operator workstation will be able to read data
stored in Historian server. A backup disk will be used to store at minimum 10 years of data
and shall be installed in communication racks / server racks (bays) 19”. Equipment shall be
installed in server panel(s) (bays) 19” in the server room
Reporting server shall be provided for creating and recording reports.
• Data warehouse servers. The only allowable connection to the corporate network is at the
LDC, via a demilitarized zone with dual firewalls. However, where a project requires a
connection to the business network, a synchronized copy of the historian shall be provided on
a server in a de-militarized zone (DMZ). See section 8.9.1. All external processes and
workstations using SCADA data shall access the historical data stored in the DMZ, with any
direct access to the servers in the SCADA network zone blocked.
8.7.6 Operator Work Station (OWS)

The Operator workstations will be provided at the central control room for operators to monitor and
control the equipment at the facility. These shall be specified and configured as defined in ADWEA
specification W-I-SS-002, in particular sections 6 and 12.2. Graphic displays will be developed and
show each process status, provide control of the equipment and display alarms. Each operator
workstation shall have a license, and each OWS shall have 2 VDUs, mouse and keyboard.
8.7.7 Engineering Work Station (EWS)

Configuration / Engineering workstation will be designed to be connected to the server and
Controllers networks. This workstation will provide configuration / programming to the system. These
shall be specified and configured as defined in ADWEA specification W-I-SS-002, in particular sections
6 and 12.2. The number and location of the EWS shall depend on the size and configuration of the
plant.
Page 201 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
8.7.8 Human Machine Interface (HMI)
For package plant such as the Hypo-Chlorination plants, pipeline tap-off branch and small scale
pumping station control systems the process shall be monitored and controlled locally by an
industrialised HMI mounted at the front face of the controller panel. These shall be specified and
configured as defined in ADWEA specification W-I-SS-002, section 7.
8.7.9 Hardwired Safety Interlocks

If PMP is relay based then all interlocks deemed critical to the protection of personnel and major
equipment, such as suction, discharge, vibration, etc. will be hardwired to the MCC with isolated
inputs to the PLC. If PMP is PLC based and operation is based on project specific particular
specification, then these are not hardwired interlocks. Only ESD (PB actuated) shall be hard wired. The
following hardwired interlocks, as a minimum shall be implemented in pumps protection circuit:
• Suction pressure switch

• Discharge pressure switch
• Discharge flow switch
• Pump/motor vibration and temperature
• Surge tank level
8.7.10 Controllers software

The software shall be configured to provide the functions identified in the Functional Design
Specification (FDS) and shall have the features defined in ADWEA specification W-I-SS-002, in
particular section 12.1. The following terms are used in the software programming of PLC/SCADA
functions:
• Operator Settings: Operator set or entered values will be constants that are adjustable or set
from operator displays. Examples of operator set or entered values are controller set points,
batch set points, etc. Specific values that are required to be operator set will be noted in the
process control strategy descriptions.
• Tunable Values: Tunable values will be constants that are adjustable at engineer level displays
without requiring any software reconfiguration. These values will not generally be adjustable
from operator level displays.
The following general PLC functions will be provided:
• All analogue and discrete inputs to the PLC will be displayed. Both RUNNING and OFF input
states will be displayed.
• All analogue inputs will have instrument failure alarms when the input is below 0 percent or
above 100 percent for a tunable time initially set at 10 seconds.
• All discrete FAIL inputs will be alarmed.
• When alarms are specified in the control strategy descriptions, alarms will be initiated from
the applicable inputs. If discrete inputs are not available, the specified alarms will be initiated
from the applicable analogue input.
• All analogue inputs will be trended.
Page 202 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
• All flow inputs and equipment run times will be totalized and recorded. All totalized values
will be displayed.
• Displays will be grouped functionally for ease of operation. Both analogue and discrete
functions associated with an item of equipment or a group of equipment will be provided on
the same display.
• All discrete outputs will generally be maintained outputs. For START/STOP PLC functions, the
PLC will issue a maintained START command until a RUNNING state is no longer detected or
when a STOP command is issued. When a momentary command is required, the PLC will issue
the command for two (2) seconds, and then remove the signal.
• For equipment that is controllable from the PLC, a control mode status signal will be sent to
the PLC to indicate when the PLC is allowed to control the equipment. The PLC will monitor
the control mode status (LOCAL/ REMOTE) and attempt to control only equipment that is in
the REMOTE mode.
• For equipment that the PLC is allowed to control, the PLC will provide a FAIL alarm if the
equipment fails to comply with a PLC command signal (START, STOP, OPEN, CLOSE) that has
been present for more than a tunable time period. In this event, the command will be
removed subsequent to the expiration of the tunable time period.
• All PID control functions (Proportional, Proportional + Integral, and Proportional + Integral
+Derivative) will be provided with standard analogue controller functions and operator
interfaces including the following:
 AUTO/MANUAL mode selection: In AUTO, the output of the controller will be based
on the PID control calculation. In MANUAL, the output of the controller will be
operator adjustable. Transfer between operational modes will be bumpless.
 Set point, process variable, and controller output will be displayed.
When equipment is tagged “OUT OF SERVICE” by the operator, all associated equipment will have
their alarms inhibited until the tagged equipment is re-tagged IN SERVICE.
8.7.11 Supervisory Control and Data Management

The SCADA software and displays shall be configured as defined in W-I-SS-002 section 12.2.
SCADA software shall be modular. To ensure that the polling and display of data is effectively
predictable, deterministic, and regular, the software modules shall be assigned such that the load is
balanced between several processors.
SCADA software shall operate on Microsoft Windows and a commonly available virtual operating
system (OS). A virtual OS shall be used where possible, to enable dynamic allocation load balancing,
automatic failover to hot standby processes and hot removal and swapping of hardware. Linux may
be used for associated database servers, with appropriate measures for redundancy and protection
of the data.
Direct communication with the Controllers shall be managed by a specific interface communication
unit on dedicated data servers. The exchange mode should be conceived in order to insure high safety
level (no loss of data).
The main management functions shall be as following:
Page 203 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
• Hot redundancy between servers
• Communication with the Controller in order to read internal data
• Writing task in the Controller’s bytes and words
• Status/value data change detection
• Exceeding threshold value detection

• Alarm file editing
• Process views, trends, data array presentation

• Alarms and trends storages
• Report editing data management.

• First Trip Analysis
8.7.12 Operator Interface

Display of plant status and other information shall be configured according to W-I-SS-002 and in
particular section 12.2.G. The hierarchical structure of the screens shall be designed to maximize
situational awareness, using the principles in EEMUA publication 201 and promoted by the ASM
Consortium. Navigation should be yoked, with related data grouped together. All data required to
perform a particular action shall be shown on one screen, or screens navigated by a single mouse click.
Backgrounds and static graphics shall be grey or muted colour, selected to suit TRANSCO standard
configurations. Dynamic objects and colours shall be selected so that the operator’s attention is drawn
only to those items requiring action, without distraction from animation or saturated colours on other
items.
8.7.13 Alarm Management

Alarm management shall be configured as defined in W-I-SS-002 section 12.2, with an alarm
management philosophy guided by best practice documents including EEMUA publication 191.
The alarms shall be assigned proposed priority levels to suit their criticality. The prioritized alarms list
shall then be issued for approval. During commissioning, an audit of “bad actors” shall be carried out
and the alarm grouping and prioritization shall be adjusted to remove these spurious alarm incidents.
8.7.14 Historian Data/Archiving

The plant controller data are polled from the PLCs and RTUs by the data servers. A separate, Historian
Server shall be configured to manage logging and long term storage of time-stamped data.
The Historian Server shall automatically store the following data:
• Values of each analogue signal (all measurements), sampling periods to be adjustable for each
or on event (status modification, threshold reached, etc.)
• All events (alarm, operator actions, derivative…etc.)
• Motors (run / stop ) status

• Valves (open / close) status
Page 204 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
• Running times, stopped times of motors
• Step of Grafcet (SFC)
• Critical set points
• Operator’s control actions or modifications to setpoints
The History Package shall be fully configurable and allow data to be collected and maintained at the
following frequencies or their multiples:
• Second
• Minute
• 15 minutes
• Hour
• Shift
• Day
• Week
• Month
• Year
The system will include sampling and storage of system variables, analogue variables, status of
discrete data, operator actions and alarm and event messages. States and values of all process data
shall be stored in internal files and refreshed permanently.
The system data historian shall be used for recording control system data on a historical basis and also
for retrieving such data for display, trend graphs or generation of custom reports.
8.7.15 Leak detection System (LDS)

The pipelines shall be protected against water leakage along their entire length. The LDS is to monitor
continuously the running pipeline and generate leak alarm upon detection of leak along the pipeline.
The Consultant shall study the leak detection methods suitable for the application and propose the
most reliable, efficient and cost effective method. As a general, there will be a combination of
hardware devices and software packages driving the LDS operation. The special software package will
be installed in the dedicated station server to monitor continuously the running pipeline system under
steady state flow conditions, by using a mass balance calculation. The intention is to propose a system
to detect the leaks in minimum time with high accuracy. The following methods shall be used
independently from each other for detection and location of leak, however the Consultant shall
propose the other methods as alternative for review and approval:
Leak detection
Compensated mass balance during normal pipeline operation.
Pressure monitoring under normal pipeline operation and during stand still.
Leak location
Negative pressure wave during pipeline operation and stand still.
Page 205 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Pressure gradient monitoring during pipeline operation.
The LDS functionality shall be processed and implemented in the station control system logic
(PLC/SCADA) and/or in the station servers. The pressure, negative pressure wave and level monitoring
are tasks of the station control system. The compensated mass balance, Pressure gradient and leak
location are tasks of the station servers in control centre.
The measured process values such as pressure, level, etc. in remote areas shall be provided and
processed at relevant control stations and transmitted to control centre.
Note- The accuracy, efficiency and cost effectiveness of LDS for each project shall be studied by
Consultant on case by case basis. The approval and adoption of the LDS shall be at the discretion of
Transco.
8.7.16 LDC SCADA Integration

8.7.16.1 LDC Software configuration
New or modified assets shall be updated as necessary in the LDC SCADA configuration. SCADA
software shall be configured using standards consistent with similar objects in the existing LDC
configuration, to ensure operator familiarity. Within this constraint, best practice set out in EEMUA
191 and 201 shall be adopted, to optimize alarm configuration and graphics and maximize operator
situational awareness.
The project system integrator shall also be responsible for modifications to the configuration of
servers, firewalls and switches to route the new data to the SCADA application server.
8.7.16.2 LDC Hardware changes

The effect of connections to new assets on the loading of servers and communications shall be
assessed. Where server hardware is loaded to an average of greater than 50% (disk activity or
processor load), the servers shall be upgraded with additional processors, storage controllers, storage
media or other components to achieve.
Where networks are loaded over 20% or SCADA polling times are compromised, additional
communication paths or capacity shall be provided. Any devices causing bottlenecks shall be
supplemented or replaced, as part of the project.
8.7.17 LDC Settlement Integration

Each settlement metering station shall be equipped with MDEC compliance flow meter. The flow
meter output pulse signal shall be interfaced to Data logger (settlement RTU) which is located in local
control cabinet (Data logger cabinet) near the flow meter. The flow signal shall be relayed to the
nearest sub-station, by an RTU through digital radio or GSM network (Etisalat). The sub-station
(outstation) shall accept the relayed signal and communicate to LDC (Instation) through Transco
SDH/FOC network.
For typical water DMP scope of work refer to Dwg. N14054/TYP/E-405 in the appendix.
The project specific requirements, including the communication method between settlement RTU and
sub-station outstation, shall be resolved and finalized by Distribution Company (Licensed Operator
Company)
The FOC network between the sub-stations and LDC facility shall be within the scope of work of
Transco
Page 206 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
8.8 Telecommunications Requirements

In general, telecommunications to the LDC shall comply with the requirements of ADWEA specification
W-I-SS-002. Attention is drawn to section 4.2 of that specification.
Telecom requirement shall follow the specified ADWEA/TRANSCO specifications listed below:
• S-TR-COM-OPT-SDH (Rev.0-2016)
• S-TR-COM-PCM (Rev.0-2016)
• S-CAB-INST-CONT-FOC-(Rev.0-2016)
• S-TR-CAB-ACC-FOC (Rev.0-2016)
• S-TR-CAB-FOC (Rev.0-2016)
• S-TR-CAB-GEN (Rev 0 -2016)
• S-TR-CAB-MAR-FOC (Rev.0-2016)
• S-TR-CAB-MAR-INST-FOC-PROT-TEL (Rev.0-2016)
• S-TR-CAB-INST-CONT-FOC-GEN (Rev.0-2009)
• S-TR-CIVIL-CAB (Rev.0-2013)
8.8.1 Telecommunications Media

Options for telecommunications media, for the WAN between sites and the LDC, are compared below
and listed in priority order. TRANSCO policy requires the use of fibre optic connections. Alternative
media may be considered as a temporary solution only, where the program or installation
complications commissioning in advance of completion of the fibre optic connection. Communications
with capital cost but no subscription fee are favoured over those with a monthly subscription fee.
It should be noted that wireless communications are prohibited at certain, sensitive locations such as
palaces and government buildings.
TRANSCO owns and operates SDH fibre optic network, using a combination of 16, 32 and 144 core,
single mode fibre optic cables (FOC) along pipelines and power line optical ground wires (OPGW).
Where a new water station is to be constructed, the network shall be extended to the new installation.
8.8.1.1 Site communications network

Communications between instruments, actuators, intelligent drives, PLCs/RTUs and RI/O racks may
be a combination of hardwired, legacy Modbus, Profibus and Ethernet/IP over copper or fibre optic
cables
8.8.1.2 SDH fibre optic network

TRANSCO currently operates a fibre optic network using a Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH). This
transport protocol uses line switching, allowing synchronous transport of multiple protocols and
ensuring better quality for streamed services such as phone calls and video. However, it is slower than
gigabit Ethernet. For the bandwidth requirements of valve and pumping station control and
monitoring, however, the SDH bandwidth is sufficient.
The SDH network operated by TRANSCO connects all of the primary substations and many pumping
stations across Abu Dhabi together and to the LDC, using multicore fiber optic lines. TRANSCO uses
ABB FOX‐515 rack or Alcatel 1660 hardware at each of the nodes on the SDH network.
Page 207 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
To make a new connection onto the network, a new Ethernet MUX card may need to be installed in
the FOX-515 rack, if there are no spare Ethernet ports. The connection from the water asset to the
SDH network can then be Ethernet-based – either over a new fibre optic cable or via connection to a
wireless / radio router.
Connection of pumping stations to the LDC shall be via the SDH network, in all cases. An SDH rack shall
be installed in the pumping station and it shall be connected by multicore fibre optic cable to the
existing SDH network at the nearest primary substation (usually the substation feeding power to the
pumping station) or existing pump station.
The Consultant should select a cost-effective telecommunication option among the SDH or other
means of communication, based on the type, location and topology of new water asset to
communicate with upstream pump station and LDC.
8.8.1.3 Digital radio

Connection of remote assets to the LDC communications network can be achieved via licenced
UHF/VHF radios. This medium provides fast, line-of-sight, encrypted communications. For congested
areas, subject to moving barriers and interference from other radio sources or barriers, millimetre
wave directed radio links should be considered.
All new radio links will be subject to a radio signal survey, for selection of appropriate hardware, aerial
configuration and radio band.
Digital radio shall be used for the ‘last mile’ connection to all assets other than pumping stations,
which will have a direct, SDH fibre optic connection.
All wireless connections shall use strong, AES encryption.
Wireless solutions are only acceptable as a temporary solution, until the permanent, fibre optic
connection is installed and commissioned.
8.8.1.4 ADWEA mesh Wi-Fi network

ADWEA has a mesh Wi-Fi network covering Abu Dhabi city, configured as a hidden network dedicated
for utilities communications and free for use by Abu Dhabi’s utilities companies. It is connected as the
last-mile onto TRANSCO’s fibre optic network. ADWEA advises that the Wi-Fi network has 95%
coverage throughout the city on Abu Dhabi Island and the Mainland.
Due to lower security level, the ADWEA mesh WIFI shall not be used for transferring the SCADA signals
in TRANSCO's water assets.
Meshed Wi-Fi network can be used for transmission of SCADA signals in exceptional cases where no
other communication media / means is available, subject to the establishment of a secure VPN and
data encryption for SCADA signal security and ADWEA approval.
8.8.1.5 MPLS network

The telecommunications providers in the UAE each operate a network with Multi-Protocol Label
Switching (MPLS). MPLS can be used for configuration of encrypted, private tunnel connections from
the field to the LDC, over the telecommunications network. The providers are actively developing their
MPLS infrastructure, including for extensions such as MPLS Transport Profile (MPLS-TP).
Internal MPLS network may be introduced by TRANSCO in future as part of development process. This
can be considered as a possible means of communication in parallel with the existing SDH network.
There is no intention to use MPLS system of other service providers.
Page 208 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
8.8.1.6 GSM/GPRS
Many existing assets are connected to the LDC, each via an RTU with a GSM modem, or GSM SIM. This
connects via the telecommunication provider’s cellular network. Most of Abu Dhabi has 3G or 4G
coverage, providing a sufficiently fast and robust connection for transfer of plant data, though not for
streaming CCTV signals.
The GSM/GPRS shall be considered where there is no FOC/SDH network available in the area.
8.8.2 Telecommunications Equipment

All offsite connections and any between different trust zones within the corporate networks shall be
protected by layer 2/3 switches and firewalls, with intrusion detection as appropriate.
Connections to the SDH network require ABB FOX-515 or Alcatel 1660 compatible hardware. For
conversion from Ethernet to SDH, an Ethernet interface card can be mounted into the FOX-515 rack.
Where Ethernet switches are installed at existing interface points, they may be used in the network
topology to communicate with each other and to upstream pump station.
8.9 Security
8.9.1 Security of Control and Monitoring Systems
Security of the data and control system shall be assured by compliance with National Electronic
Security Authority (NESA) requirements, along with ICS Cyber-Security best practice guidance
produced by US National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) and UK National Cyber Security
Centre (NCSC). In particular the following should be referred to:
• NESA documents, including the UAE National Cyber Security Strategy (NCSS), UAE Information
Assurance Standards (UAE IAS).
• IEC 62443 (incorporating ISA 99, implementing ISO 27001 for Industrial Control Systems (ICS))
• Guide to Industrial Control Systems (ICS) Security – NIST Special Publication 800-82 revision 2.
• NCSC standards, including archived guidelines produced by CPNI
A “defense in depth” approach should be adopted, with multiple layers of security to mitigate the
weaknesses in any one layer.
SCADA networks should be segmented into Trust Zones, with controlled access via a limited number
of conduits, managed by layer 2 and 3 switches and firewalls. Systems and processes on TRANSCO’s
business network should not have direct access to the SCADA servers – All data should pass via an
intermediate data server in a de-militarized zone (DMZ).
Data transmissions over third-party networks and wireless communications shall be provided with
strong AES encryption and VPN tunnels shall be used.
The components should be hardened, with vulnerable ports closed as necessary. Malware and
intrusion detection systems (IDS) should be included. The Consultant shall review options for ICS
protocol-aware firewalls, appliances or protection systems with the Client.
Permanent connections for remote support access to SCADA should be avoided. Where these are
required, they should remain physically disconnected until needed. Connection should be managed
under a procedure which includes authentication and multifactor verification of the remote user’s
identity.
Page 209 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
The solution on each project should integrate with TRANSCO’s security management procedures and
processes. System security shall be included in training agendas for each completed project.
8.9.2 Physical Security

The Consultant shall design the complete Security system for each facility (where applicable),
consisting of the:
• Gate control
• Access control system
• CCTV system
Security system features that will be evaluated in final design are as follows:
• Site Perimeter monitoring.

• Interior wide angle cameras in electrical and pump rooms.
• Access control on buildings.
• Use of card readers, magnetic door locks, electrical strike
• Pan-Tilt-Zoom (PTZ) and fixed position exterior cameras as appropriate.

• UPS backup for power.
For specification refer to ADWEA W-I-SS-007.
Page 210 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
9 Pipelines
9.1 Introduction
Pipelines are classified as either station piping or line piping. Pump Station Piping is defined as
pipework commencing at the pump station site upstream boundary and finishing at the point where
the discharge header exits the pump station site. Line piping is defined as the pipework extending
from the pump station boundary to the downstream storage tank/reservoir or customer take off
point. This section discusses line piping and explains the requirements for the design guidelines for
line pipe and its associated accessories and components, including:
• Conducting surveys;
• Designing pipe horizontal and vertical alignment;
• Selecting Pipe Material, and grade;
• Arrangements for valves, fittings, accessories;
• Designing for various installation requirements;
• Designing thrust restraints;
• Designing corrosion protection;
• Considerations for testing & commissioning;
• Design Drawing Requirements.
As a general principle, it is preferred to maximise pipework welding and fabrication in the workshop
and to minimise field fabrication. The reference standards for pipelines are BS/ISO /EN by preference.
Data requirements are addressed in the following section.
9.2 Design Codes
W-C-SS-001 - ADWEA’s Specification for Topographic Surveys
W-C-SS-002 -ADWEA’s Specification for Geotechnical Surveys
W-C-SS-016 -ADWEA’s Specification for Horizontal Directional Drilling for

Crossing Water Ways/Channels/Roads
W-P-SS-001 -ADWEA’s Specification for Ductile Iron Pipes, Fittings and

Accessories
W-P-SS-019 -ADWEA’s Specification for Cathodic Protection for Carbon

Steel Pipe Lines
W-P-SS-010 -ADWEA’s Specification for Construction, Testing &

Commissioning of Ductile Iron Pipe System
W-P-SS-012 -ADWEA’s Specification for Steel Piping Fabrication, Erection

and Testing
Page 211 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
W-P-SS-017 -ADWEA’s Specification for Construction, Testing &
Commissioning of High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe
System
ISO 4179 -Cement–Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings
ISO 2531/ EN545 -Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipes Fittings and accessories
ISO 4633 -Standard for Rubber Joints Rings for Water Supply Sewerage
and Drainage Pipelines
ISO 4427PE - Pipe for Water Supply
ASTM A674 - Standard Practice for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile

Iron Piping for Water or Other Liquids
EN545 -Ductile Iron Pipes, Fittings, Accessories and Their Joints for
Water Pipelines. Requirements and Test Methods
AWWA M11 - Steel Water Pipe – A Guide to Design and Installation.
AWWA C205 - Cement mortar lining of steel pipes and fittings
AWWA M55 - PE Pipe - Design and Installation
AWWA M51 - Air Valves: Air Release, Air/ Vacuum, and Combination
AWWA M11 - Steel Pipe- A Guide for Design and Installation
AWWA C205 - Cement- Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel
Water Pipe 4 In. (100 mm) and Larger- Shop Applied
API 5L - American petroleum Institute Specification for Line Pipe
DIN30670 - polyethylene coating of steel pipes and fittings–

requirements and testing
ASME B31.4 -Pipeline Transportation Systems for Liquid Hydrocarbons

and Other Liquids
BS EN 12201 - Plastic piping Systems for Water Supply -polyethylene
OSHA standards - Occupational Safety and Health Standards
AD-SDI Data Standard -Spatial Reference System”, Version 1.0, Abu Dhabi Systems
& Information centre (ADSIC), December 2010
9.3 Input Data

The following input data will be provided by TRANSCO to the Consultant or Contractor on
commencement of the study:
• Relevant existing system details
• Existing network models
Page 212 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
9.3.1.1 Provided by the Consultant or Contractor
The following input data will be collected by the Consultant or Contractor:
• System details of distribution company network.
• All remaining data necessary to facilitate the design
9.4 Topographical Survey

Topographical survey shall be conducted of the proposed pipe route following route approval from
the applicable municipality’s Town Planning Department (TPD). Topographical survey is to be
conducted by a qualified survey sub-Contractor approved by ADWEA / TRANSCO.
The topographical survey shall be conducted in accordance with the ADWEA / TRANSCO standard
specification w-c-ss-001. Surveys intervals along road corridors shall be to a maximum spacing of 20m,
and shall capture the following features, unless otherwise detailed in the specifications:
• Plot Setting out including property boundary;
• Footprints of any structures within the road corridor;
• Spot Heights;
• Topographical features (e.g. trees, kerb lines, landscaping edges, street lights / signposts etc.);
• Existing services (manholes, chambers, covers, kiosks, tanks, etc.);
Other general requirements for the topographical survey are as follow:
1. Spot height points will be used to generate 0.5m contour lines.
2. Vertical and Horizontal accuracy shall be in accordance with:
a. “AD-SDI Data Standard, Spatial Reference System”, Version 1.0, Abu Dhabi Systems &
Information centre (ADSIC), December 2010;
b. The requirements of the local TPD;
c. The standard and particular specifications
3. Survey shall be presented in accordance with the National Survey Datum in meters.
4. Survey coordinates shall be presented in Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM), WGS 84

(ITRF2000.0) Zones 39N and / or 40N (depending on location of survey).
Where any of the above stated requirements contradict, the most stringent shall apply.
9.5 Geotechnical Survey & Soil Tests

Geotechnical survey & soil tests shall be conducted of the proposed pipe route following route
approval from the applicable municipality’s Town Planning Department (TPD). Geotechnical Survey is
to be carried out in accordance with ADWEA standard specification w-c-ss-002 and in accordance with
section 3.2 of this guideline. Topographical survey is to be conducted by a qualified survey sub-
Contractor approved by ADWEA / TRANSCO.
The geotechnical survey & soil testing shall be conducted in accordance with the ADWEA / TRANSCO
standard specifications. Surveys shall capture the following details, unless otherwise detailed in the
specifications:
Page 213 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
1. Subterranean Strata and qualities;
2. Groundwater table depth & range;
3. Ground water quality (pH, Chlorides, Sulphates, TDS, presence of hydrocarbons);
4. Soil Quality (Redox potential, pH, Chlorides, Sulphates, moisture content at pipe depth, and
above maximum water table);
5. Soil Mechanical Characteristics (Vertical & Horizontal Bearing Capacity);
Details of geotechnical requirements are set out in guideline section for Geotechnical and Geophysical
Studies
9.6 Material Selection

The following pipe materials are to be considered for use on TRANSCO pipeline projects:
1. Ductile Iron (DI);
2. Carbon Steel - welded pipe and spigot and socket pipe;
3. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE).
Pipe material for any application is to be determined based on a Technical and Economical Assessment
to compare all the above materials. The assessment will be based on the whole Life Cycle Costs (WLCC)
taking into consideration, but not limited, to the following:
• The difference in service life for different materials;
• The difference in failure rate (based on historical performance) for each material;
• The difference repair costs for each material;
• Suitability of the material for the application (e.g. HDD, sub-sea installation, high pressure /
loads applications, etc.);
• Corrosion protection requirements over the asset service life;
• Special consideration is to be given to the risk of permeation by low-molecular-weight

pollutants, solvents, hydro-carbons, petroleum by-products.
Composite solutions may be considered where pipes of different materials are used in combination.
9.7 Design of Ductile Iron Pipelines

9.7.1 Applicable Codes & Standards
Ductile Iron Pipes, fittings, and appurtenances shall be designed in accordance with the following
codes and standards, in addition to any additional codes standards or requirements stated in the
specifications:
1. ISO 4179Cement–Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings;
2. ISO2531/EN545 Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipes Fittings and accessories;
3. ISO4633 Standard for Rubber Joints Rings for Water Supply Sewerage and Drainage
Pipelines;
Page 214 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
4. ASTM A674—Standard Practice for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for
Water or Other Liquids;
9.7.2 Pipe Wall Thickness Design

Wall thickness for ductile iron pipe based on ADWEA standard specifications is defined as pipe class
K9. As an alternative to class K9, C class pipes (EN545) can be considered based on the following table.
Table 9.1 – Pipe Class per Diameter.
DN(mm) Class of Pipe

Up to 300 K9, C40 up to C100
350 -600 K9, C30 up to C100
700 -800 K9, C25up to C64
900 - 1000 K9, C25 up to C50
1100-1200 K9, C20 up to C50
Over 1200 K9, C20 up to C30
Pipe design for Ductile Iron Pipes should also consider the following design considerations, in
accordance with EN545:
• Earth Load;
• Truck Loads;
• Bending Stress Design;
• Deflection Design;
• Internal Pressure Design;
• Additional allowances for wall thickness;
Most manufacturers tabulate safe ranges and loading conditions on ductile iron pipes. This is normally
acceptable and specific load/stress calculations would normally only be required outside the range of
the manufacturers information.
9.7.3 Pipe Protection at Crossings

9.7.3.1 Slab Protection
During construction, the Contractor shall determine the width of the cover slab and provide
reinforcement steel as per design. The Contractor shall also design the protection slab to withstand a
traffic load of SLW 60 or H-20. In case of a minimum cover of 1.5m is not achieved at site, the
Contractor need to provide duct protection instead of slab protection. In all the cases, the type of
protection shall be as per TRANSCO/Engineer and the concerned Authority requirements. The slab
length for road crossing shall not be less than trench top width plus 600 mm.
The pipe on the other hand, shall go through several checking to ensure that it can sustain the
overburden pressure, heavy traffic and operation vehicle loads. These checking include pipe collapsing
pressure, pipe allowable buckling pressure, and actual % of pipe deflection. This shall be done in
accordance with AWWA-M11. Moreover, the soil cover of the pipe in case of slab protection shall be
1.5m or above.
Page 215 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
For more details regarding design criteria for protection slab, refer to section W-C-SS-003 Rev1
“Specification for Civil/Structural General Requirements for Water Works” and section W-P-SS-010
Rev4 “Specification for Construction, Testing & Commissioning of Ductile Iron Pipe System”.
9.7.3.2 Duct Protection

Duct protections are used for open cut road crossings where required by TRANSCO/Engineer or the
concerned Authority. Ducts shall be sealed at each end.
The duct shall be GRP pipe encased with reinforced concrete.
In case of crossing with existing or future services, the Contractor shall follow the recommendation of
the concerned Authority whether to cross above or under the respective services and the required
clearance to be left.
The Contractor shall design the said duct to sustain the required loads in accordance with the codes
and ADWEA Standard Specification Ref. W - C - SS – 003 latest revision. For more details Typical
Drawing N14054/TYPGA - 313 shall be considered as a guide for the Contractor design
All concrete external surfaces shall be coated with two layers of Epoxy paint of 300 microns in total.
Duct location and ownership shall be clearly marked by installing duct marker bronze plates at both
ends of the road.
9.7.3.3 Culvert Protection
Box culvert protection is also used for open cut road crossings where required by TRANSCO / Engineer
or the concerned Authority.
Box Culvert shall be sealed at each end with solid blocks and shall have ladder extended to the top
ground near to the road shoulder for maintenance accessibility.
The Contractor shall design the said box culvert to sustain the required loads in accordance with the
relative codes and ADWEA Standard Specification Ref. W - C - SS - 003 - Rev. 01. For more details
Typical Drawings N14054/TYPGA – 317 shall be considered as a guide for the Contractor design".
Access shafts shall be provided at both ends of the culvert.
9.7.3.4 Utility Bridge Protection

Utility Bridge may be used where required by TRANSCO/Engineer or the concerned Authority. It
probably used to cross existing high diameters existing pipelines where protection slab is not possible
to protect the said pipes due to depth or any other restrictions.
Page 216 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
The Contractor shall design the said utility bridge to sustain the required loads in accordance with the
relative codes and ADWEA Standard Specification Ref. W - C - SS - 003 - Rev. 01. For more details
Typical DrawingN14054/TYPGA - 318 shall be considered as a guide for the Contractor design".
9.7.4 Maximum Deflection at Joints

The maximum pipe deflection at joints shall be maintained as per the lessor of ADWEA standard
specifications and the manufacturer’s specifications. Deflections allowed by ADWEA standard
specifications are tabulated below.
DN (mm) Allowable Joint Deflection (degrees)

40 - 300 3.5
350 - 600 2.5
700 - 2000 1.5
If deflections are made in any partial segments of pipe (pipes shorter than the full standard length e.g.
5.5m or 6.0m), particular attention shall be given to assessment of thrust and allowances for retained
pipe length.
9.8 Design of Carbon Steel Pipelines

Steel Pipes, and fittings shall be designed in accordance with the following codes and standards, in
addition to any additional codes standards or requirements stated in the specifications:
1. AWWA M11, Steel Water Pipe – A Guide to Design and Installation.
2. API 5L, American petroleum Institute Specification for Line Pipe.
3. AWWA C205 – Cement mortar lining of steel pipes and fittings;
4. DIN30670 –polyethylene coating of steel pipes and fittings – requirements and testing.
Carbon Steel line Piping can be either longitudinally or spirally welded.
9.8.2 Pipe Wall Thickness Design

Pipe wall thickness design for Steel Pipes will be undertaken for the following design considerations:
• Earth & External Hydrostatic Loads;
• Live Loads;
• Bending Stress Design;
• Deflection Design;
• Buckling Design;
• Internal Pressure Design;
• Longitudinal stresses due to thermal expansion / contraction;
Equations for calculation of the above loading/stress analysis are presented in Section 3.4 Pipe Stress
Analysis of this guideline
Page 217 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
The derived wall thickness shall be used to select a standard pipe class which can withstand the highest
loading condition.
For internal pressure, circumferential tension stress (Hoop stress) shall be based on requirements of
ASME B31.4 as set out in Pipe Stress Analysis Section. No Corrosion allowance is required, as pipes are
protected with suitable linings and coatings and are further supported with cathodic protection.
9.8.3 Pipe Protection at Crossings

Refer to section 9.7.3 under Design of Ductile Iron Pipelines for slab, duct, culvert, and utility bridge
pipe protections at crossings.
9.8.4 Allowances for Thermal Expansion & Contraction

Consideration is to be given to thermal expansion and contraction of carbon steel line pipes,
particularly during construction.
Consideration shall also be given to constructability in the selection of joints. Steel pipes may be either
rubber ring jointed, or welded. The following allowances are to be made:
1. A suitable distance of un-backfilled pipe shall be maintained before / after welded joints to
allow for localized thermal expansion during welding, to avoid damage to external coatings;
2. “Closure Welds” shall remain exposed for relieving expansion / contraction forces during
construction and normalizing of temperatures after backfilling;
3. For exposed pipes, expansion joints shall be located in between anchor points for flat pipes,
or on the downhill side of anchors for graded pipes;
4. Expansion joints on bridge crossing shall be in parallel to expansion joints on the bridge
structure;
5. Expansion and contraction induced forces on tees due to soil friction;
6. Anchor rings shall be used where the pipe passes through concrete chamber, anchor, wall,
etc., and shall be designed with dimensions to resist shear punching;
9.9 Design of High Density Polyethylene Pipelines

9.9.1 General Considerations for the Application of HDPE
During the selection of pipe materials, the following general considerations shall be taken into account
when selecting HDPE pipes for certain applications.
1. HDPE pipes & fittings shall be protected from prolonged exposure to:
a. Sunlight & other sources of UV radiation;
b. Continuously applied stress;
c. High Temperatures;
d. Oxidizing agents.
2. HDPE pipes and fittings shall be prevented from contact with:
a. Sharp objects;
b. Solvents, hydro-carbons, vapours, etc.;
Page 218 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
3. Exposed (non-buried) applications may be considered only if the material is specified to resist
these conditions;
4. In all non-buried applications, pipe support shall be continuous along the length of the pipe.
For any elevation or suspension of HDPE pipe on non-continuous supports, design calculations
shall demonstrate that long term deformation under loading will not impede the function or
structural integrity of the pipe;
5. Buoyancy forces are to be taken into consideration for HDPE pipes to be installed beneath the
water table and in sub-sea applications. Design calculations shall demonstrate suitability of
the bedding material to resist buoyancy in the worst case condition, when pipes are empty;
6. For sub-sea applications of HDPE pipe, design calculations shall be used to determine the
required spacing and weight of anchors, during the worst case condition;
7. Steel tape to be installed above buried HDPE pipes, with a small separation space to ensure
the metallic tape does not make contact with the pipe;
8. HDPE pipe entry to any structure or anchor shall be protected from shear force through a
compacted bedding.

High Density Polyethylene Pipes and fittings shall be designed in accordance with the following codes
and standards, in addition to any additional codes standards or requirements stated in the
specifications:
1. ISO 4427PE Pipe for Water Supply
2. BS EN 12201Plastic piping Systems for Water Supply -polyethylene.
9.9.3 Pressure Class & Pipe Wall Thickness Design

Pressure class & pipe wall thickness selection for HDPE pipes will be undertaken for the following
design considerations:
o Hydrostatic Design Pressure;
o Maximum Occasional Surge Pressure;
o External Dead Loads & Hydrostatic Loads;
o External Live Loads;
o Deflection Design;
o Buckling Design;
o Check of compressive stress due to external loading.
Design for wall compressive strength is to take the worst case scenario into consideration, which can
be 1.0 bar vacuum. Refer to Section 3.1 –Hydraulic Studies for minimum internal pressure design
cases. Analysis for internal and external loading will assume each to take place separately.
9.9.4 Allowances for Thermal Expansion & Contraction

Consideration is to be given to thermal expansion and contraction of HDPE pipes. The main
consideration for HDPE pipes shall be to prevent pull-out forces from joints and particularly when
Page 219 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
connecting to anchored structures, and other pipe materials with non-restrained joints. The
considerations are listed as follows:
1. All HDPE pipe joint connections will require fusion welded or mechanically restrained joints.
Unrestrained joints of any kind shall not be acceptable.
2. Small pipe deflections shall not be accommodated through mitred welded joints. Cold
Bending shall be used to accommodate deflections, as detailed the following sub-section;
3. Connections from HDPE pipe to other pipe materials shall be made using flange adaptors;
4. Connections from HDPE pipe to any unrestrained pipe system (other pipe materials) shall be
anchored immediately upstream of the adaptor connection on the HDPE side;
5. Thrust blocks shall not be considered as a suitable restraint against pull-out forces.
In addition to the above design considerations, HDPE pipe shall not be connected to any structure or
anchor until the pipe material is allowed to normalize in the pipe trench.
9.9.5 Maximum Deflection

Minor deflections, curvature and bends can be accommodated in HDPE pipes through Cold Bending
on site. Minor deflection and curvature can be achieved without requirement for fittings, dependent
upon Diameter Ratio (DR) and diameter of the pipe, in accordance with AWWA M55, Table 8-2.
Minor deflections and curvatures shall be uniformly distributed along pipe lengths as to prevent
kinking in the pipe material.
9.10 Alignment Selection

This section details the selection of pipe alignment along a pre-defined route. The configuration and
size of the network and the selection of routes through particular road corridors is defined during the
hydraulic modelling and optioneering stages of a project.
The selection of the pipe alignment is to be undertaken according to the following steps:
• STEP 1 – Data Collection and Preliminary Route:
o Collection of existing topographical & geotechnical information;
o Collection of As-Built drawings & service corridors from utilities;
o Collection of future plans from utilities;
o Determination of potential alignments.
• STEP 2 – Coordination with Utilities:
o Permission from utilities and authorities to pass through unused corridors / plots
(where applicable);
• STEP 3 – TPD Route Approval:
o Make application to Town Planning Department (TPD) of the relevant Municipality(s);
• STEP 4 – Utility, Authority, and Stakeholder NOCs:
o Obtain the No Objection Certificates for the TPD approved route from the relevant
utilities and authorities;
Page 220 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
• STEP 5 – Topographic Surveys & Geotechnical Surveys:
o Undertake topographical and geotechnical surveys of the approved route;
o Undertake Detailed Design based on this information, confirming the final route and
profile;
• STEP 6 – TPD Design Approval:
o Submit Detailed Design and NOCs to the (TPD) of the relevant Municipality(s);
Stakeholder NOCs may include, but not be limited to, the following:
o Other ADWEA group companies;
o Etisalat; Du; other Telecom Companies
o Abu Dhabi Sewerage Services Company (ADSSC);
o Environmental Agency of Abu Dhabi (EAD);
o Department of Transportation (DOT);
o Abu Dhabi Urban Planning Council (UPC);
o Oil & Gas (ADNOC, TAKREER);
o Tourism Development & Investment Company (TDIC);
o Developers;
o Contractors;
o Consultants.
The minimum NOC requirements may be defined by the TPD as part of the route approval process.
Approvals may also require that Trial pits and Ground Penetration Radar (GPR) surveys be required
prior to construction.
9.11 Pipe Profile

9.11.1 Minimum Gradients
Pipes shall be laid at a minimum gradient of 1:1000 upward and 1:500 downward in flow direction
(vertical: horizontal) in order to facilitate accumulation of entrained air at high points, and draining of
water towards low points for emptying of pipes.
No maximum pipe gradient is applicable, however pipes laid at gradients steeper than 30° shall be
assessed to determine the requirements for mechanical restraints to prevent movement or excessive
longitudinal stress on the structure or downstream fixtures.
Flat runs are generally not permitted, unless these are necessary over very short distances in order to
navigate obstructions, and where it can be demonstrated to TRANSCO through design calculations
that minimum gradient cannot be achieved, or would be more detrimental to the design.
9.11.2 Minimum Cover & Maximum Depth

Minimum cover shall be assessed independently for each design based on soil characteristics, bedding
design, pipe class, and external loading (live and dead loads). ADWEA standard specifications set the
minimum cover as 1000mm except for road crossings (1500mm), Right of Way (1200mm). Design
Page 221 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
calculations shall be presented to justify the minimum cover for various conditions anticipated in each
project.
Shallow pipe installations – where necessary – shall be supported with design calculations for suitable
protection by reinforced concrete cover slab or other means.
Maximum depth shall be determined based on Techno-Economical considerations, such as the effect
on pipe class, excavation depth and associated cost implications, and the spacing of air valves and
washout chambers. Maximum depth shall be supported with design calculations and testing for
several options.
9.11.3 Horizontal and Vertical Allowable Clearance

Horizontal and vertical clearance between TRANSCO lines and existing utilities shall be in accordance
with TRANSCO standard requirements and the concerned Authority regulations.
9.12 Valves
9.12.1 Valve Arrangement
The minimum requirement for placement of isolation valves shall be as follows:
• On Straight Runs – Distances between isolation valves on straight runs depends on pipe
location and is subject to TRANSCO project requirements. As a guide it is expected that
distance between isolating valves in an urban environment would not exceed 1km and for a
non-urban environment is likely to be in the range of 5km to 10km. Isolation valves shall be
placed strategically on straight runs near high points to facilitate drainage towards washout
points, and should be located to take into account ease of access for maintenance, and
sensitivity of local environment to pipe failure;
• At Pipe Intersections – Isolation valves shall be placed at all pipe intersections based on the
‘n-1’ condition, where ‘n’ is the number of pipes meeting at an intersection. For example, an
intersection of 3 pipes will have isolation valves on 2 of the pipes. Valves at intersections shall
be placed as close to the intersection as possible based on space availability. In general, valves
that are within ‘50D’ of the intersection, where ‘D’ is the diameter of a pipe from the
intersection, shall be considered as effective isolation at the intersection;
• At Key Facilities & Appurtenances – Key facilities such as reservoirs, pump stations, etc. will
have isolation valves at all incoming and outgoing lines in order to facilitate isolation of the
facility. This is in addition to isolation on and between all manifold pipe work in order to
facilitate isolation if individual pumps or reservoir compartments, without interrupting
service of the facility. Valves shall also be installed upstream and downstream of critical
appurtenances, flow meters, and major control valves to permit isolation for maintenance
purposes. Bypasses of facilities and critical appurtenances shall also include an isolation valve.
The Tee-Off branch for Air Valves and Wash outs shall also include an isolation valve. Isolation
valves shall also be provided at all boundaries to the system, such as incoming supply lines
from desalination plants, and outgoing lines for bulk consumers, interface points, etc.;
• At Cross Connections – Special consideration should be given to providing isolation at cross

connections between parallel lines. Cross connections require adequate valving in order to
improve operational flexibility. Valves shall be placed at cross connections based on the
specific operational function intended for each;
Page 222 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Where the location of isolation valves in accordance with the above conditions coincide, valves may
be considered to satisfy several of the above conditions. Placement of valves shall also be economized
by purposely locating them such as to satisfy multiple functions.
Control valves are to be placed based on their specific functions as required to fulfil the design. For
example:
• Flow & Pressure Control Valves are to be placed based on their functional requirements to
achieve hydraulic conditions, typically at interface points;
• Check Valves are to be placed as required to prevent backflow through pump stations and
bypass lines;
• Needle Type Control valves are to be placed at each inlet pipe to a reservoir or if unavailable
then altitude valve to be used.
Placement of air valves is discussed in the following sub-section.
9.12.2 Air Valve & Washout Arrangement

The minimum requirement for placement of Air Valves shall be as follows:
• At the Start and end of Pipelines – A vacuum breaker valve should be installed at the start
and end of pipelines (e.g. immediately after a pump station of incoming flow boundary such
as a desalination plant, or toward a reservoir / pump station or bulk consumer connection);
• At Isolated High Points – A combined Air Valve shall be installed at every isolated high point
along the pipe profile;
• Along Long ascending & Descending Runs – A vacuum breaker valve should be placed on long
ascending runs of constant gradient, and a combination valve on long descending runs of
constant gradient at a maximum spacing of 5km;
• On Either Side of Flat Runs, and NDM/HDD Sections – Although flat runs of pipe are to be
avoided, these may be required in special circumstances in order to pass obstructions. In such
circumstances, and on either side of a HDD of NDM run which cannot accommodate
intermediate air valves, a combination air valve shall be installed at the start and end of such
sections;
• At Inflexion Points – Where a pipeline profile changes to a lesser gradient on an ascending

run, or a steeper gradient on a descending run, a combination air valve shall be placed in close
vicinity to where the change in gradient occurs.
The calculation of number and size of air valves is covered under Section 7 Mechanical Design
Guideline. Guidance is also given in AWWA M51.
Where the location of air valves in accordance with the above conditions coincide, air valves may be
considered to satisfy several of the above conditions. Placement of air valves shall also be economized
by purposely locating them such as to satisfy multiple functions.
The minimum requirement for placement of Wash-Out Chambers shall be as follows:
• At Isolated Low Points – A Washout Chamber shall be installed at every isolated low point
along the pipe profile. In special circumstances such as through HDD sections, it may not be
possible to place a washout at the lowest point in the profile. In such circumstances, the
Page 223 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
washout shall be placed as close as possible to the low point, and design should facilitate
emptying of the lower section by pumping;
• Along Long ascending & Descending Runs – A washout chamber shall be placed on long
ascending or descending runs at a maximum spacing of 1km;
Placement of Washout Chambers shall be arranged taking into consideration the location of isolation
valves such that each isolation “cluster” can be drained towards a washout at the lowest point, and
has a vacuum breaker valve at its highest point to facilitate emptying. An isolation cluster is a segment
of a network or pipe that can be completed enclosed from the surrounding network by the closure of
valves bounding it. Spacing of washout valves is to be determined on a case by case basis in discussion
with TRANSCO.
Where ever a line valve is located at a low point, the option to include a washout valve either side of
the line valve (but within the same chamber) should be considered. This will allow draining the pipeline
either side of the line valve.
Washout valves can also be classified as 2 types: - major wash out with large diameter at distinct low
points and; minor washout with smaller diameter at other low points.
At NDRC (non-disruptive road crossing) locations Wash out Facilities should be provided at one side
of the crossing. This should take the form of an access flange at the top point of the crossing to allow
insertion of a submersible drainage pump reaching to the bottom level of the pipeline.
Washout valves should be sized to allow draining of the pipeline at a flow velocity of between 0.3
and 0.6 metres per second. This velocity range is based on minimizing the risk of possible transients.
Refer to AWWA M51 for further information. Refer also to Hydraulics Section 3.1.4.4
9.12.3 Valve Installation Design

All valves shall be FBE coated and lined ductile iron (unless TRANSCO allows relaxation), and shall have
a pressure rating the same or equal to the design rating of the pipelines on which they are installed.
Refer to ADWEA Specification W-P-SS-009 for more details on valve coatings and lining. All valves shall
be installed in reinforce concrete chambers with adequate access, ventilation, and clearance for
installation, maintenance and replacement of the valve in future if required. All valves shall be
accompanied by a dismantling joint, and all internal pipework within chambers shall also be FBE
coated ductile iron or carbon steel, up to the puddle flange. Transition with HDPE pipelines shall be
outside the valve chamber.
Any additional requirements as per the project specifications shall also be applicable. Refer also to
Mechanical section of this guideline.
9.13 Fittings & Accessories

There are a number of fittings which are required for line piping both in chambers and in buried pipe
conditions. Some of these are described below:
• Standard Ductile Iron Fittings. These include bends, tees, reducers, crosses and can be either
flanged or spigot and socket jointed. Flanged fittings should be used in chambers when
connecting with valves, meters etc. In general it is preferred not to use flanged fittings in
buried locations although there are some special cases which require a single flanged joint to
connect a straight pipeline between existing structures. If the flanged joint is used then it
needs to be protected with mastic putty covering bolts and then covered with shrink wrapping
Page 224 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
or tape wrapping. Spigot and socket joints are normally used outside chambers and may
require thrust blocks and supports depending on the hydraulic loading applied.
• Wrought Carbon Steel Fittings are used in ground and in chambers. Wrought fittings are
preferred by TRANSCO.
• Fabricated Carbon Steel Fittings. These are used both in ground and in chambers on line
piping. In ground the fittings have welded joints and joint protection is as per welded steel
pipe joints. In chambers the fittings can be either welded or flanged jointed. The choice
depends on the function of the fitting and the ability to disassemble to allow removal of
meters, valves etc.
• Joint Fittings (Dismantling Joints, stepped couplings, collars, flange adapters, isolation
couplings). Joint fittings are used inside or outside chambers to connect pipes and fittings and
to allow insertion/removal of valves and meters etc. The choice of fitting depends on available
space, the need for thrust restraint, type of end fitting for connection to valves and pipes and
to a lesser extent the relative cost of the fittings. Inside chambers there is a need for at least
one joint fitting for each valve or meter to facilitate its installation/ removal. Outside the
chamber there would normally be the need to have one joint fitting for each run of pipe
between chambers, although there is nothing to prevent using joint connectors for each pipe
connection to a chamber
• Expansion Joints. Expansion joints can be two basic types-bellows type and slip type. Bellows
type allows for relatively large expansion lengths whereas the slip type normally allow for
smaller longitudinal pipe movement. For water supply systems the thermal expansion is not
normally large and the slip type joint would be sufficient. An example of a slip type joint is a
non-pressure restraining dismantling joint. Expansion joints are commonly used in above
ground locations such as bridge crossings
• Flanged Joints with Cathodic Protection. Cathodic Protection Insulation gasket shall be steel
reinforced rubber with flat steel reinforcing ring cast inside gasket and with no external
protrusion.
9.13.1 Flow & Pressure Meters

The minimum requirement for placement of permanent flow and pressure meters shall be as follows:
o At Incoming Boundaries – At all incoming boundaries to the TRANSCO system, such as

connections from pump stations and desalination plants;
o At Interface Points – In accordance with TRANSCO’s standard detail for Interface Points with
generating companies and distribution companies;
o At Key Facilities – Upstream and downstream of major facilities such as Reservoirs and pump
stations;
o At Strategic Locations in the Network – At major transmission intersections for the

monitoring of flow at key junctures;
Refer to Mechanical Section 7.4.2 for details on flow meters
9.13.2 Disinfection & Water Quality Testing

Disinfection booster station requirements shall be determined based on the results of Water Quality
Modelling, in accordance with Hydraulic Studies Section of this Guideline. Disinfection booster
Page 225 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
stations may be either permanent or temporary. Temporary installations shall be facilitated through
design by including adequate interface facilities for connection and removal from the live mains.
Monitoring would include pH and free chlorine.
Permanent Water Quality testing points consist of permanent apparatus to facilitate manual collection
of samples. Samples should be representative of the water quality at different strata in the pipe flow.
Sampling points should permit the collection of samples from live mains.
Sampling points shall be positioned at all incoming boundaries to the TRANSCO system, such as
connections from desalination plants, and upstream of interface points. Also, sampling points shall be
provided upstream and downstream of key facilities such as pump stations and reservoirs, and at
strategic junctures in the transmission system.
In general, sampling points should be provided in vicinity to permanent flow meters, as flow is an
important consideration in the interpretation of water quality data.
9.13.3 Flanged Manhole Access Points

For long runs of large diameter (600mm or larger) lines which are inaccessible or continuously welded,
flanged manhole access points shall be provided at intervals of 1.5km. A flange manhole access point
consists of a vertical upward facing Tee with a flanged end, which is sealed with a bolted blank flange.
The access point is enclosed within a reinforced concrete chamber with suitable man-entry
arrangements. The tee section is to be a 600 dia. branched tee. In many locations the air valve chamber
can be used as access point rather than constructing additional dedicated access chambers. Where
access is required for deep pipes a chamber is to be provided with ladders designed as per OSHA
standards with intermediate landings etc.
9.14 Pipe Installation

Pipes are to be installed either in open trenches, or Non-destructive methods (NDM), such as micro-
tunnelling, and horizontal directional drilling (HDD). Open trench installation is to be considered for
all pipes, except where conditions prevent trench excavation. Circumstances that warrant the use of
NDM include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Obstructions or sensitive sites at the surface preventing open trench excavation (e.g. major
roads, facilities, buildings, tourist attractions, etc.);
• Narrow corridors which would restrict deep trench excavations;
• Costly re-instatement requirements that would make NDM installation more cost effective;
• Crossing of dense and / or sensitive existing buried services;
• Natural obstructions such as water canals.
NDM installations are to be kept to a minimum and shall cease at the nearest distance before and
after an obstruction or condition requiring NDM.
General Design requirements for open trench and NDM methods are presented in the following sub-
sections.
9.14.1 Open Trench

Trenches shall be a minimum width of 0.5 m from either side of the outer diameter of pipes, and
maintain this width up to the crown of the pipe.
Page 226 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
The trench bottom should be excavated to a minimum of 50mm below the outside bottom of the pipe.
If unstable ground is encountered, or large stones, boulders, tree stumps, or waste material, the
trench shall be excavated to 200mm below the outer diameter of the pipe, and filled with Structure
Compacted Fill.
Trench excavations can be expanded locally to facilitate joint sockets, welding, etc. However trench
width shall not be excessively over excavated to prevent dead load from surrounding fill in excess of
the pipe design. In circumstances of over excavation, an engineered compacted fill shall be specified
to maintain distribution of soil loads in accordance with the design assumptions.
Sheet piling and appropriate temporary works will be designed for deep excavations and excavation
below the water table. Dewatering requirements will also be specified in the design.
9.14.2 Trenchless Methods

The design of the pipes, thrust /reception pits, and thrust wall shall be carried out by the Contractor
and approved by ADWEA/ENGINEER. Prior to commencement of WORKS, the Contractor needs to
submit to the Contractor certain documents for his approval such as programme of WORKS, soil
investigation report, design calculations, materials specification, and method statements.
Pipes shall be designed to sustain maximum axial thrust with a 4.0 factor of safety based on full
effective area and ultimate compressive strength of the pipe material. Pipe joints shall be designed to
avoid projections and should be tested at maximum permissible deflection by being subjected to 2
bars hydrostatic pressure.
The Contractor shall design the thrust and reception pits for minimum dimensions. Interlocking steel
sheet piles shall be used for securing excavations. In order to resist the jacking force in the thrust pit,
a reinforced concrete wall shall be provided at the pit. The Contractor needs to ensure that the pits
are dry during NDM WORKS.
Special design consideration will be given to pipes installed through NDMs, to account for the
following:
1. Maximum compression stresses on pipes to be “pushed” into tunnelled excavations;
2. Maximum tensile stress for pipes “pulled” into tunnelled excavations;
3. Maximum curvature (cold bending) for plastic pipes, and deflection at joints for spigot-socket
jointed pipes through excavated sections;
4. Stresses on end capping / anchoring points as a result of thermal expansion / contraction, and
contraction due to internal loading, for pipes run through a tunnelling casing;
5. Spacers to prevent contact between metallic pipes and metallic tunnel casing;
6. Shear Forces at entry / exit transition points to grouted and un-grouted tunnelled sections;
HDPE pipe “pulled” into place for NDM installation is to include “weak links” to protect against
exceeding maximum tensile strength.
The above considerations shall be addressed in detailed design and supported with design calculations
demonstrating the adequacy to accommodate additional stresses and loading to be encountered
during NDM installations. Particular attention shall be given to grouting / non-grouting, and
transitional arrangements at entry / exit to tunnel casings. NDM installations are discussed further
in the Civil Design Guidelines.
Page 227 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
9.14.2.1 Horizontal Directional Drilling (HDD)
Pipe material selection for HDD installations shall take into account the following considerations:
o HDD installations need to be “pulled” behind the reaming head, requiring pipe material with
flexible, welded or mechanically restrained joints;
o Pipe materials need to be continuously fed into the tunnel. Materials with joints that cannot
be assembled will need to have sufficient and parallel staging area for preparation of long,
pre-joined pipe lengths;
o The maximum curvature / deflection at joints shall be taken into consideration for the
selection of a pipe material and the vertical and horizontal alignment of the drilling route.
Selection of pipe material, joint types, drilling method, drilling routes, and staging areas shall be
presented with supporting design calculations.
The Contractor has to submit method statement where details about procedure, equipment, labour,
schedule and plan are specified. The Contractor shall also provide A0 size design profiles where drilling
installation coordinates and depths are illustrated.
Equipment of HDD comprise of four (4) main components; drilling system, steering system, and drilling
fluid (mud) system.
The drilling procedure consists of several stages and actions as follows:
1) Site preparation
2) Drill path survey
3) Soil investigation
4) Bathymetric survey
5) Environmental protection adherence
6) Safety adherence
7) Pipe compliance
8) Pilot hole
9) Reaming
10) Steel pipe pulling
The Contractor shall ensure adequate performance of hydrostatic testing on the string of pipelines of
welded pipe joints. In case of failure of any of the sections, the Contractor should point out the cause
of it, fix it, and retest again to ensure that the section is passing.
HDD installations should be in accordance with ADWEA Standard Specification w-c-ss-016
9.14.3 Design of non-Buried pipes

For applications where pipes are not buried, such as pipes routed through ducts, bridge cavities,
attached to bridge platforms, or on elevated supports, the following design considerations will be
made:
• Pipes shall be analysed for loading as beams and / or columns, and calculations shall be
presented to determine maximum spacing of supports. Where support spacing is restricted
calculations shall determine any necessary adjustment to pipe wall thickness or material
changes as required to operate as a beam for the required spacing;
Page 228 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
• The supports shall be structurally analysed, including all pipeline live and dead loads, external
loads, and vibrations. Pipe wall thickness shall be reviewed for localized stresses (particularly
at supports). Calculations shall be presented to justify material selection, grade, dimensions,
and anchoring;
• The supports shall be structurally analysed for action as thrust restraints including at individual
joints and fittings. Calculations shall be presented to justify material selection, grade,
dimensions, and anchoring of pipe supports;
• Thermal Expansion / Contraction shall be determined for the length of the expose pipeline,
and the resulting forces on the pipeline and restraints shall be taken into consideration.
Calculations shall be presented to demonstrate the forces exerted on the pipeline, supports,
and adjacent structures;
• Pipe spans on supports will be laid with a minimum grade to avoid pooling between supports
(particularly for HDPE pipes).
Pipes acting as a beam shall be designed to minimize deflection such as to prevent damage to internal
linings and external coatings, and prevent permanent deformation of plastic pipes. Calculations shall
be presented to justify that deflection is within the allowances for the specified linings and coatings.
For plastic pipes, calculations will be presented to justify that the long term deflection of pipes over
the asset service life is within acceptable limits to preserve the function and structural integrity of the
pipe. Joint types will be taken into consideration in these analyses, and the strength of bolts for flanged
joints suitably assessed.
Design calculations are discussed further in the Pipe Stress Analysis in Section 3 of this Guideline.
Methodology for design calculations is also set out in AWWA M11.
9.15 Thrust Restraint

Internal and External forces can contribute to joint movement and separation. For buried pipes, thrust
protection shall be provided to resist internal forces. Internal forces to be considered are hydrostatic
force acting asymmetrically and are based on the test pressure. For non-buried pipes, thrust restraint
is to be considered in the design of anchoring and supports, in additional to external forces. Table of
thrust equations is given in the Civil Design Section of this Guideline
Thrust restraint shall be provided for all spigot / socket and mechanical joints that are not restrained
against longitudinal movement and separation. Thrust restraint shall not be required for welded
plastic or steel pipes provided that the surrounding soil interaction provides sufficient resistance to
thrust for continuously welded sections of pipe. The same shall apply to continuous lengths of
mechanically restrained pipe.
Thrust is to be checked at locations where there is a change in flow direction or cross-section, such as
at fittings (reducers, tees, dead-ends, etc.), bends, and appurtenances (valves, meters, filters, etc.).
Thrust protection will be provided where the resistance from surrounding soil interaction is not
sufficient to counteract thrust forces, or where disturbance of the surrounding soil strata is
anticipated.
Where the need for thrust restraint is identified, the following types shall be considered:
1. Reinforced Concrete Thrust Blocks;
2. Piled Thrust Blocks;
Page 229 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
3. Mechanical Restraining Joints (where not already applied);
4. Line Anchor.
The type of thrust protection to be adopted shall be based on a techno-economical comparison for
individual applications. Specifically, the lowest cost thrust restraint shall be considered, taking into
consideration limitations of space and soil characteristics, which may limit the technically feasible
options. Each type of thrust protection is discussed further in the following sub-sections.
9.15.1 Reinforced Concrete Thrust Blocks

All thrust Blocks shall be reinforced in order to sustain the thermal stresses even if there is no flexure
stress.
Reinforced concrete thrust blocks are designed based on the concept of distributing thrust force to a
larger cross-sectional area of soil, as sufficient to resist the thrust force, based on the soil’s horizontal
bearing strength. These may also be designed to resist vertical movement by action of gravity on the
concrete block.
Thrust blocks shall be designed to satisfy specific dimensional requirements, in accordance with
AWWA M41, Section 8.3. Where soil is disturbed behind the bearing face, back fill is to be with a
material of equivalent or better bearing strength, and back filling shall be compacted and tested to
achieve a minimum density to be specified in the design.
For vertical thrust forces, a gravity thrust block shall be designed to counteract upward thrust forces.
Downward thrust forces shall be based on the vertical bearing strength of the surrounding strata.
9.15.2 Piled Thrust Blocks

Piled thrust blocks are designed based on the concept of distributing thrust force to a reinforced
concrete pile(s). Piled thrust blocks are to be used where space limitations or soil characteristics would
prevent the adoption of reinforced concrete thrust blocks. Piled thrust blocks may also be used in
circumstances where disruption of the surrounding soil is anticipated. However, piled thrust blocks
are not commonly used in TRANSCO projects. The preferred method is to perform soil improvement
where unsuitable soil is removed and replaced with suitable backfill allowing use of reinforced thrust
blocks. If necessary, racking piles can be used.
9.15.3 Mechanical Restraining Joints

Use of Mechanical Restraining joints on pipes that are not already mechanically restrained is another
form of thrust restraint. These are designed based on the philosophy of creating contiguously
restrained sections of pipe which collectively have sufficient soil interaction to counteract thrust
forces on a fitting of appurtenance contained therein.
Mechanical Restraining Joints may be used as an alternative to piled thrust blocks where space
limitations or soil characteristics would prevent the adoption of mass concrete thrust blocks.
Since Mechanical restraining joints also depend on interaction with surrounding soil, due
consideration shall be given for any anticipated disruption of the supporting soil strata. Furthermore,
the design of thrust protection using mechanically restrained joints shall exclude lengths of pipe with
no soil interaction, such as lengths of pipe laid through ducting or pipe casing.
9.15.4 Line Anchors

A paragraph needs to be developed here.
Page 230 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
9.16 Corrosion Protection

Design of corrosion protection shall be mandatory for Ductile Iron and Steel pipes. Corrosion
protection shall not be required for HDPE pipes in general, however pipe material should be specified
based on the corrosion risks identified in specific applications (e.g. resistance to oxidation and UV
radiation).
In circumstances that would cause deterioration of a High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe, such as
exposure to solvents, chemicals, high temperatures, or regular temperature fluctuations, HDPE shall
not be considered for use.
Corrosion protection requirements shall be determined continuously along pipeline lengths, and
protection may be increased where high risk conditions are identified.
9.16.1 Soil Testing

Soil shall be tested for the following parameters to establish corrosivity:
1. Soil Resistivity;
2. pH;
3. Oxidation-Reduction Potential;
4. Sulfide ion content;
5. Chloride Ion Content;
6. Moisture Content;
7. Ground water fluctuation.
Also, investigations are to be undertaken to identify any direct current applied to adjacent or nearby
pipelines for cathodic protection (e.g. oil & gas lines).
9.16.2 Lining
Internal linings shall be considered for Ductile Iron and carbon steel pipes to protect the material from
the corrosive effects of the potable water.
9.16.2.1 DI Pipes:
DI pipes shall be internally cement mortar (buried) or FBE (exposed) lined in accordance with ADWEA
specification w-p-ss-001
9.16.2.2 Steel Pipes:

Steel pipes shall be cement mortar lined in accordance with AWWA C205 except where pipes are
exposed and they are lined with FBE.
9.16.3 Coating
9.16.3.1 DI Pipes:
Buried DI pipes shall be externally protected by a Metallic zinc and Bituminous Coating and
Polyethylene sheet encasement. The Buried Station Piping shall have FBE internal lining and external
coating. The PE sheet encasement shall be neatly warped and taped to the pipe, to ensure minimum
gap between the outer pipe water and PE sheets. Tape wrapping shall be applied where the soil is
aggressive or highly aggressive; refer to sub section “Resistivity Survey for Corrosivity of Soil along
Pipeline Route” under section 3.2.2.12 “Geophysical Investigation”.
Page 231 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
Exposed (non-buried, non-sub-merged) DI pipes shall be protected using a bonded applied protective
layer (FBE), with due consideration to aesthetical requirements of the surrounding environment (e.g.
on a bridge crossing). Coating shall be in accordance with ADWEA specification w-p-ss-001.
All pipe joints that are coated with polyurethane DI shall be protected by heat shrinkage sleeves. The
function of these sleeves is to provide protection for the joints against corrosion as they have high
shrink ratio and high penetration resistant thick structure. For more details about the minimum
requirements of manufacturing heat shrinkable sleeves, refer to section 8.4.7 in W-P-SS-001 R4 in
ADWEA’s specification.
9.16.3.2 Steel Pipes:

Carbon steel buried and/or below water table Steel pipes shall externally protected by Fusion Bonded
Polyethylene (3LPE) in accordance with DIN30670. The Buried Station Piping shall have internal FBE
lining. Welded joints shall be protected with Heat Shrink Sleeve. Rubber ring jointed pipes shall be
coated with Fusion Bonded Polyethylene(3LPE) or Fusion Bonded medium Density Polyethylene in
accordance with AS 4321.
Carbon Steel pipes used for NDM and HDD applications shall be further protected by an epoxy based
polymer concrete, in order to protect the fusion bonded polyethylene outer coating during pipe
insertion. Fittings and appurtenances on steel pipes that are manufactured of dissimilar metals shall
be wrapped in Polyethylene sheet encasement, and connected to steel pipes using electrically
insulating joints.
Exposed Carbon Steel pipes shall be protected using FBE coating.
9.16.4 Cathodic Protection

Impressed Current Cathodic protection is required for Carbon Steel pipes in accordance with ADWEA
Specification w-p-ss-019
For Cathodic Protection applied to Steel pipes, the protected pipe segment shall be made electrically
continuous through the adoption of joint bonding. It shall be applied in conjunction with the standard
external protection of Fusion Bonded Epoxy.
9.17 Contamination & Permeation Protection

Pipe materials passing through contaminated areas, or that are likely to be exposed to petroleum by-
products such as solvents, hydro-carbons, low molecular weight substances, or vapours shall be
designed taking into consideration their permeability to such substances.
Pipe material fittings, appurtenances and joints (including gaskets) shall be specified that are resistant
to permeation from such substances.
HDPE shall not be used in locations where the presences of these substances in confirmed or exposure
is likely to occur in future.
Pipelines through heavily contaminated soils shall be laid in ducts which are resistant to permeation
and degradation from these substances. The ducting shall extend beyond the contaminated areas with
a safe margin, and ends of the ducts shall be capped to prevent soils and liquids entering.
9.18 Testing & Commissioning

During design, particular consideration will be given to determining the test pressures for distinct
sections of pipe. The pressure ratings of all components including pipes, joints (including gaskets),
fittings, thrust restraints, and appurtenances shall be consistent across distinct sections of pipe, such
Page 232 of 233

N-14054
Design Guidelines
that the entire pipe can be pressure tested without limitation imposed on test pressure by any
component.
Furthermore, the placement of air release, vacuum breaker valves, isolation valves, and washout
chambers shall take into consideration the requirements for flushing, testing, disinfection, and filling
of the pipelines for testing and commissioning.
Hydrostatic testing and commissioning will be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with
ADWEA standard specifications w-p-ss-010, w-p-ss-012 and w-p-ss-017 for ductile iron, carbon steel
and HDPE pipelines respectively. Pressure tests are to be carried out in pipeline sections with not more
than 20m elevation difference.
The detailed design shall incorporate a testing and commissioning plan to demonstrate how the
pipeline will be tested, disinfected and commissioned prior to hand over. Disinfection /testing to be
in accordance with AWWA C651. The plan shall take into account:
• Sequence of pipeline sections to be tested
• Interfaces with existing pipeline systems
• Locations of air valves, wash out valves, isolating valves in both the existing and new pipeline
system to be utilised as part of testing and commissioning process
• Testing methods to be adopted
• Volumes of water required, source of water and method of pressurising pipeline
• Means of maintaining the existing system during the testing and commissioning process
Page 233 of 233

Geotechnical and Geophysical Studies Guideline_TRANSCO
APPENDIX A
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
N 14054 TRANSCO
WATER STANDARD DESIGN GUIDELINES
LIST OF DRAWINGS
N14054/TYP/LD-101
NOTES:
18
01 02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17 16 02
18
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL PUMP STATION

GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
PLAN ABOVE PLATFORM LEVEL
PLAN @ ABOVE OPERATING PLATFORM LEVEL

N14054/TYP/GA-201
NOTES:
SCHEDULE OF PIPEWORK AND FITTINGS

SUCTION SIDE
DELIVERY SIDE
04
07 15
02 09 12 13 16 02
06
03 08 10 11 14
05
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
SECTION A-A NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
N 14054 TRANSCO

GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
SECTION A-A
N14054/TYP/GA-202
Xref .\XREF\X-Frame.dwg
NOTES:
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
ROOF PLAN TYPICAL PUMP STATION

GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
ROOF PLAN
N14054/TYP/GA-203
NOTES:
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
SCHEDULE FOR DOORS SCHEDULE FOR WINDOWS
N 14054 TRANSCO

GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
SCHEDULE OF DOORS AND WINDOWS
N14054/TYP/GA-204
GENERATOR CONTROL
PANEL ROOM
GENERATOR
BUILDING
UC001.1
LVSG
BATTERY
ROOM
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND

GENERATOR ROOM -
GROUND FLOOR PLAN
N14054/TYP/GA-205
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL SWITCHGEAR AND GENERATOR ROOM

SECTION A-A & B-B
N14054/TYP/GA-206
LEGENDS
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
N14054/TYP/GA-207
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL ELECTRO CHLORINATION BUILDING

PLAN
N14054/TYP/GA-209
LEGENDS
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL ELECTRO CHLORINATION BUILDING

ELEVATION AND SECTION
N14054/TYP/GA-210
MALE TOILET DOCUMENT ROOM
OFFICE ENGINEER OFFICE RECEPTION SERVER/UPS & ETISALAT ROOM RECEPTION
SHOWER
SHOWER
KITCHEN AND
DINING
FEMALE TOILET
MALE TOILET
STORE ROOM
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
ENGINEER OFFICE DOCUMENT ROOM
PRAYER ROOM
MEETING ROOM
OFFICE
ENGINEER OFFICE RECEPTION SERVER/UPS & ETISALAT ROOM
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL ADMINISTRATION BUILDING AND CONTROL

ROOM
GROUND FLOOR PLAN AND
SECTION A-A & B-B
N14054/TYP/GA-211
LEGENDS
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
LCD MONITOR
KEYBOARD

LCD MONITOR
KEYBOARD
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL GUARD HOUSE

SECTIONS
N14054/TYP/GA-212
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL QRM BUILDING

PLAN, SECTION A-A AND B-B
N14054/TYP/GA-213
SHOWER
AIR HANDLING WORKSHOP

LOCKER W.C UNITS ROOM
ROOM
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
CORRIDOR MACHINERY
PARKING
KITCHEN
STORAGE ROOM
MASTER CONTROL ROOM
(RAISED FLOOR)
LABORATORY
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL WORKSHOP AND STORES

SECTION A-A AND B-B
N14054/TYP/GA-214
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
ALTERNATIVE PUMP LAYOUT WITH

SUCTION AND DISCHARGE HEADERS
OUTSIDE THE PUMP STATION BUILDING
N 14054 TRANSCO

GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
ALTERNATIVE PUMP LAYOUT
N14054/TYP/GA-215
DOOR SCHEDULE WINDOW, LOUVRE & GRILLES SCHEDULE
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
ARCHITECTURAL
SCHEDULE OF DOORS AND WINDOWS
N14054/TYP/GA-216
TABLE OF ROOM FINISHES TABLE OF ROOM FINISHES
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
ARCHITECTURAL
SCHEDULE OF ROOM FINISHES
N14054/TYP/GA-217
NOTES:
TYPE-I (PIPELINES IN BUND FOR WET SOIL CONDITION) TYPE-II (PIPELINES PARTIALLY BURIED FOR WET SOIL CONDITION)
TYPICAL SECTION TYPICAL SECTION
SCHDULE OF DIMENSIONS SCHDULE OF DIMENSIONS
NOTE: NOTE:
TYPE-IVA (PIPELINES DIRECTLY BURIED IN TYP. DETAIL OF F.O.C PROTECTION TILE

TYPE-IIIA (PIPELINES IN NORMAL / DRY SAND AREA)
TRENCH FOR WET SOIL CONDITION) & WARNING TAPE
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
NOTE: NOTE: TYPICAL SECTION
TYPE-IIIB (PIPELINES IN NORMAL / DRY SAND & HARD AREA WITH PROTECTIVE BUND) TYPE-IVB (PIPELINES DIRECTLY BURIED IN TRENCH FOR WET SOIL CONDITION PROTECTIVE BUND))
N 14054 TRANSCO
SCHDULE OF DIMENSIONS SCHDULE OF DIMENSIONS WATER STANDARD DESIGN GUIDELINES
TYPICAL SECTIONS OF TRANSMISSION

PIPELINES WITH SERVICE TRACK
NOTE: TYPICAL SECTION NOTE: TYPICAL SECTION
N14054/TYP/GA-301
NOTES:
TYPE-I (PIPELINES IN BUND FOR WET SOIL CONDITION) TYPE-II (PIPELINES PARTIALLY BURIED FOR WET SOIL CONDITION)
TYPICAL SECTION
TYPICAL SECTION
SCHDULE OF DIMENSIONS SCHDULE OF DIMENSIONS
NOTE: NOTE:
TYPE-IVA (PIPELINES DIRECTLY BURIED IN TYP. DETAIL OF F.O.C PROTECTION TILE

TYPE-IIIA (PIPELINES IN NORMAL / DRY SAND & HARD AREA)
TRENCH FOR WET SOIL CONDITION) & WARNING TAPE
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
SCHDULE OF DIMENSIONS
NOTE: NOTE: TYPICAL SECTION
TYPE-IIIB (PIPELINES IN NORMAL / DRY SAND & HARD AREA PROTECTIVE BUND) TYPE-IVB (PIPELINES DIRECTLY BURIED IN TRENCH FOR WET SOIL CONDITION WITH PROTECTIVE BUND)
N 14054 TRANSCO
SCHDULE OF DIMENSIONS SCHDULE OF DIMENSIONS WATER STANDARD DESIGN GUIDELINES
TYPICAL SECTIONS OF TRANSMISSION

NOTE: PIPELINES WITHOUT SERVICE TRACK
NOTE:
N14054/TYP/GA-302
NOTES:
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
N14054/TYP/GA-303
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
N14054/TYP/GA-304 1
NOTES:
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL DETAILS OF AIR VALVE CHAMBER IN ALL

LOCATIONS EXCEPT EMBANKMENTS
N14054/TYP/GA-305
NOTES:
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL DETAILS OF AIR VALVE

CHAMBER IN EMBANKMENTS
N14054/TYP/GA-306
NOTES:
LEGENDS
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
N14054/TYP/GA-308 1
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
N14054/TYP/GA-309
NOTES:
LEGEND:
2 2
8 8
7 7
4 5 4 3
SECTION E-E SECTION F-F
5 4 TYPICAL DRAWINGS
4
6
3 1
PLAN
N 14054 TRANSCO
N14054/TYP/GA-310
NOTES:
SECTION B-B
LEGEND:
DETAIL-M
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
SECTION A-A
N 14054 TRANSCO
DETAIL-N WATER STANDARD DESIGN GUIDELINES
N14054/TYP/GA-311
NOTES:
LEGEND:
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
WO
AV
N14054/TYP/GA-312
NOTES:
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
N14054/TYP/GA-313
NOTES:
LEGENDS
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
N14054/TYP/GA-314
NOTES:
A A
LEGENDS
PLAN SECTION-A
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
B B
PLAN N 14054 TRANSCO

SECTION-B
N14054/TYP/GA-315
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
N14054/TYP/GA-316
SECTION B-B
PLAN
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
SECTION A-A SECTION C-C
N14054/TYP/GA-317
SECTION B
PLAN
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
SECTION C
SECTION A
N14054/TYP/GA-318
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL DETAILS OF
PIPE RISER
FOR NDRC WORKS
N14054/TYP/GA-319
NOTES:
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL DETAILS OF NON-DISRUPTIVE METHOD OF

ROAD CROSSING (NDRC) FOR DI PIPELINE
N14054/TYP/GA-320
NOTES:
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL DETAILS OF NON-DISRUPTIVE METHOD OF

OIL/GAS CROSSING (NDRC) FOR DI PIPELINE
N14054/TYP/GA-321
NOTES:
LEGENDS
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
N14054/TYP/GA-322
NOTES:
LEGENDS
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL DETAILS OF
FIBRE OPTIC CABLE
PULLING PITS, SPLICING AND
ELECTRICAL CABLE PITS
N14054/TYP/GA-324
TOPC TOPC
LEGENDS
TOPC
TOPC
TOPC
TOPC
TOPC
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
N14054-TYP-GA-325
NOTES:
LEGENDS
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
DETAIL - 2
N 14054 TRANSCO
DETAIL - 1
TYPICAL DETAILS OF
CONCRETE RESERVOIR FLOOR PLAN
AND GA
N14054/TYP/GA-326
LEGENDS
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
N14054/TYP/GA-327
NOTES:
LEGENDS
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL DETAILS OF
CONCRETE RESERVOIR
ELEVATIONS
N14054/TYP/GA-328
NOTES:
LEGENDS
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL DETAILS OF
CONCRETE RESERVOIR
CROSS SECTIONS
N14054/TYP/GA-329
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
NO SCALE
N14054/TYP/GA-330
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
N14054/TYP/GA-331 1
NOTES:
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL OVERALL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
N14054/TYP/E-401
NOTES:
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL 11KV SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
N14054/TYP/E-402
NOTES:
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL 400V DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
N14054/TYP/E-403
NOTES:
LEGEND :
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO

CONTROL ARCHITECTURE
N14054/TYP/E-404
LEGEND :
DETAIL-A
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
02 ISSUED FOR REVIEW 18APR18
01 ISSUED FOR REVIEW 23FEB17
0 ISSUED FOR REVIEW 11OCT16
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL CONTROL ARCHITECTURE

FOR INTERFACE POINT
NO SCALE
N14054/TYP/E/405 02
NOTES:
LEGEND :
TYPICAL DRAWINGS
N 14054 TRANSCO
TYPICAL P & ID FOR PUMP STATION, SURGE VESSEL,

TANK / RESERVOIR AND INTERFACE POINT
N14054/TYP/E-406
APPENDIX B
APPENDIX B – SIZE AND WEIGHT REQUIREMENTS

APPENDIX C
APPENDIX C – SOIL PROPERTIES FOR ANALYSIS AND

DESIGN
APPENDIX D
APPENDIX D – BOREHOLE LOG SAMPLE

APPENDIX E
APPENDIX E – MARINE EIA SURVEY FOR OFFSHORE

DEVELOPMENT
Environmental Scoping Report
Upon project award, CONTRACTOR should provide TRANSCO with a full “data request list”.
The data request list should include all required documentation and data required for the EIA
report writing.
During the planning stage of this project, CONTRACTOR should familiarize with the project site
prior to any undertaking of environmental site activities. CONTRACTOR should review all
available background and secondary information related to the Project.
CONTRACTOR should prepare the Environmental Scoping Report. The Scoping Report should
include information pertaining to all environmental aspects of the proposed project that could
potentially create significant environmental impacts and could subsequently require further in-
depth studies. The associated tasks proposed should include a review of all of the secondary
information and data available, site visit and stakeholder consultations related to the area of
influence.
The Scoping Report should be submitted to TRANSCO along with the full proposed design
drawings, construction method statement and the proposed construction schedule for the full
project.
Ex-Situ Water Quality Survey
Samples should be taken from a mid-water depth at 20 survey locations, every 500 m along
both of the pipeline alignments. Samples should be collected using a Kemmerer water sampler
(Wildco Model 1200-030), or similar. Water sampling should be undertaken in advance of any
sediment sampling in order to minimize artificially influencing TSS and other analyses that are
affected by sediment load I the water column. Water samples should be handled, stored and
tested in accordance with applicable APHA (American Public Health Association) and US EPA
extraction and test methods (specifically; US EPA SOP#EH- 01). Water samples should be
appropriately transferred from the water sampler to pre-labeled, sterilised sample bottles
provided by the analytical laboratory. Containers should be capped securely, and samples for
each station should be enclosed in a clear, clean, sterilized re-sealable plastic bag, transferred
to cooler with ice and maintained below 4°C until received by the analytical laboratory.
Pertinent data should be recorded in field data sheets and chain of custody record should be
completed. Sediment samples should be stored separately from marine water quality samples.
Powder-less gloves should be utilized for handling all samples that are appropriate for the
sampled parameters. A clean pair of gloves should be worn for each sample obtained, and the
glove should be disposed after the sample is stored in the Cooler. All non-dedicated sampling
equipment should be decontaminated prior to collection of additional samples.
Samples should be sent to an ISO 17025, ENAS accredited and approved laboratory for
analysis of the following parameters:
 BOD5 (mg/L);
 Ammonia (Free as N) or Ammonia (NH3-N) (mg/L);
 Dissolved oxygen (DO) (mg/L);
 Total suspended solids (TSS) (mg/L);
 pH;
 Phosphate (PO4) (mg/L);
 Sulfides (S) (mg/L);
 Nitrate (NO3-N) (mg/L);
 Nitrite (NO2-) (mg/L);
 Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) (mg/L);
 Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons (TPH) (mg/L);
 Metals (Al, As, Ba, Cd, Cr, Cu, Fe, Mn, Hg, Ni, Zn, P) (mg/L);
 Total bacterial count (MPN/100 ml);
 Enterococci (MPN/100 ml); and
 Chlorophyll-a (μg/L).
The process of sampling, to storage in coolers should not take more than 15 minutes.
Temperature should be verified via measurement by thermometer and recorded regularly on the
field logs during sampling and transport to laboratory. Samples should be delivered to the
laboratory within 8 hours of sampling.
In-Situ Water Survey
Water quality should be measured in-situ at each location (20 total along both alignments) using
a calibrated YSI 6600V2-4 Multi-Parameter Intelligent Water Quality Logger, or similar. At each
station, readings should be logged at one (1) meter intervals through the water column with
measurements recorded at the surface down to one (1) meter from the seabed. The following
parameters should be recorded:
 Dissolved oxygen (DO) (mg/L);

 Temperature (°C);
 Conductivity;
 pH;
 Salinity (ppt);
 Chlorophyll ‘a’; and
 Turbidity (NTU).
Care should be taken not to disturb the seabed during sampling in order to avoid recording
artificially elevated turbidity measurements.
Water clarity should be measured using a secchi disk lowered vertically through the water
column from the survey vessel.
Qualitative assessment of the following should also be recorded at each location:
 Floating Particles/Floatable/Debris;
 Odour; and
 Colour (qualitative- change from background).
Results of the above sampling should be assessed against the relevant ambient water quality
objectives for sea and coastal waters.
Zooplankton and Fish Larvae Survey
Zooplankton tows should be conducted at a total of 10 stations along both of the pipeline
alignments, at 1 km intervals. Tows should be undertaken within the surface 1 m of the water
column, using a plankton net of 100 μm mesh size with a flow meter mounted in the mouth of
the net. A constant and slow towing speed should be adopted to ensure that the net stays at a
uniform depth throughout the duration of the tow (5 minutes total).
Once retrieved, and before removing the cod end, the plankton net should be washed down
with a seawater hose. This should ensure that all of the sampled plankton is concentrated at the
cod end. After rinsing the plankton net, the cod end should be removed and washed thoroughly
internally and externally with seawater to ensure that no plankton has adhered to the sides.
Care should be taken to ensure that all of the plankton in the cod end is transferred into the 250
ml sample container via the built in valve of the cod end. A solution of 10% Formalin buffered
with seawater should then be added to the sample container to preserve the plankton. Sample
containers should be wrapped in tin foil and immediately placed in a dark, cooled storage
container prior to transfer to the analytical laboratory for sorting and analysis. Samples should
be transferred under CoC procedures.
Sediment Quality Survey
Sediment samples should be collected at 20 survey locations, every 500 m along both of the
pipeline alignments. Sediment sampling should be conducted using a Van Veen grab sampler.
As soon as sediment samples are collected, and before their transferal into sample containers,
visual observations should be made and a record of the following should be made:
 Sediment color;
 Character;
 Volume;
 Any visual or olfactory indications of contamination;
 Any visual presence of biological organisms; and
 Photograph.
Sediment should then be transferred to sterilized sample bottles provided by the analytical
laboratory.
Filled samples should then be transferred to coolers with ice and maintained below 4ºC until
received by the analytical laboratory. Sediment samples should be collected, handled, stored
and analyzed in accordance with applicable APHA (American Public Health Association) and
US EPA (specifically; US EPA SOP#EH-02) extraction and test methods.
All sampling equipment should be decontaminated prior to collection of each sample. The time
from sampling to storage in coolers should not take more than 15 minutes. Samples should be
delivered to the laboratory within 8 hours of sampling.
Samples should be sent to an ISO 17025, ENAS accredited and approved laboratory for
analysis of the following parameters:
 Ammonia (mg/kg);
 Hydrogen sulfide (mg/kg);
 Sulfate, SO4 (mg/kg);
 Total organic carbon (TOC) (mg/kg);
 Organic phosphorous (mg/kg);
 Metals (Al, As, Ba, Cd, Cr, Cu, Fe, Mn, Hg, Ni, Zn, P) (mg/kg);
 Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons (TPH) (mg/kg);
 BTEX (mg/kg);
 Phenols (mg/kg);
 Sediment oxygen demand (SOD) (mg/kg); and
 Total bacterial count (MPN/100 ml).
Pertinent data should be recorded in field data sheets and chain of custody (CoC) records
should be completed. Sediment samples should be stored separately from marine water quality
samples.
Powder-less gloves should be utilized for handling all samples that are appropriate for the
sampled parameters. A clean pair of gloves should be worn for each sampling session, and
gloves should be disposed after the sample is stored in the Cooler.
During the reporting stage of this project, all results should be compared against internationally
and locally recognized standards for assessing the extent of contamination in marine
sediments.
Infaunal Sediment Analysis
A total of 10 benthic in-fauna samples should be collected along both of the pipeline alignments,
at 1 km intervals. Samples should be collected using a Van Veen grab sampler. Benthic infauna
samples should be processed from the whole of the grab. All samples intended for benthic
invertebrate analysis should be initially sieved (100 μm mesh) whilst on site at each station and
in-turn fully analyzed at a later point in a laboratory. Samples should be preserved using a
mixture of 10% buffered formalin. The samples should be kept at room temperature until
reaching the analytical laboratory. All samples for benthic sampling and sieving field work
protocol should be performed in accordance with the ISO/DIS
16665 international standard, and in line with the ROPME (MOOPAM local guidelines).
Visual Ecology Survey
The precise details of the visual ecology survey should be decided based upon the preliminary
results of the geophysical survey. All areas that are of potential interest should be surveyed
further using either drop down video camera or a towed seabed mounted camera. Areas of
interest that should be surveyed are any potential rocky outcrops or potential coral reef areas
that may impact the position of the pipeline alignment. Any potential areas of interest should be
investigated using a drop down video camera where the substrate should be identified and any
sensitive organisms should be noted.
Baited Remote Underwater Video Systems (BRUVS) should be utilized to assess the extent of
demersal fish populations in the study area. BRUVS consist of an underwater video camera and
bait station mounted on a support frame and provides a non-destructive and non-intrusive
method of assessing fish populations. Each BRUVS should be deployed on the seabed for 30
minutes, and any fish that were attracted to the bait plume should be recorded using a high
definition video camera. The recordings provide a quantitative and repeatable measurement of
the abundance and diversity of fish and invertebrates in the immediate area of the deployment.
BRUVS should be specifically deployed in areas adjacent to rocky reef habitat (breakwaters) in
an attempt to capture a broad range of reef associated fishes.
Video footage should be analyzed to determine species richness and maximum abundance.
Maximum abundance should be calculated by counting the maximum number of any one
species present in any one frame (MaxN).
APPENDIX F
APPENDIX F – GUIDELINE FOR PRELIMINARY

INVESTIGATION FOR CONSULTANT
Preliminary Field Investigation for Preliminary Design Purposes (CONSULTANT)
Building Site (incl.

Preliminary Field and Laboratory Along Pipeline
Pumping Station and
Investigation Requirements Route
Reservoir)
Geophysical Investigation Covering the site with Along pipeline
lines spaced 100 m route
MASW 240 m spread spaced 100 Along pipeline route
m
ERT Lines of 475 m spaced 100 Along pipeline route
m
Trial Test Pits (TP) Minimum four (4), Every 1000 m
depending on the size of staggered with the
the area, indicative value BH
of 4 per square kilometer
Moisture Content One (1) test per soil type and per TP
Atterberg Limits One (1) test per soil type and per TP
Particle Size Distribution with
TP Testing
One (1) test per soil type and per TP

Hydrometer Analysis
Unsoaked and 4-day soaked CBR* One (1) test per soil type and per TP
Standard Chemical Tests of Soil One (1) test per soil type and per TP
Standard Chemical Tests of Water One (1) test, if water encountered
Soakage testing or percolation
One (1) test per TP
testing
Boreholes (BH) Drilling – Coring Minimum three (3) BH, up Every 1000 m, to
to 20 m depth 10 m depth,
staggered with the
TP
Core Logging Continuous-each
Continuous - each BH
BH
Standard Penetration Tests (SPT) In each BH In each BH
Moisture Content One (1) test per soil type and per BH
Particle Size Distribution One (1) test per soil type and per BH
Atterberg Limits One (1) test per soil type and per BH
Cerchar Scratch Test and One (1) test per
One (1) test per rock type
Determination of Cerchar rock type and per
and per BH
Abrasivity Index BH
BH Testing
Method B (ASTM D7012 – 14)-

Elastic Moduli of Undrained Rock One (1) test per
Core Specimens in Triaxial rock type and per
and per BH
Compression Without Pore BH
Pressure Measurements
Method C (ASTM D7012 – 14) - One (1) test per
Unconfined Compressive Strength rock type and per
and per BH
of Intact Rock Core Specimens BH
Standard Chemical Tests of Soil One (1) test per soil type and per BH
Standard Chemical Tests of Water One (1) test per BH
Packer Test in Rock One (1) test per BH at desired depth (i.e.
foundation or pipeline level)
(*) only for evaluation of the mechanical strength of natural ground, subgrades and base
courses beneath new carriageway construction.
APPENDIX G
APPENDIX G – REQUIRED ANALYSES PER SOIL TYPE

AND DESIGNED STRUCTURES
Soil Classification Embankment and Cut Structure Foundations Retaining Structures
Slopes (Bridges and Retaining (Conventional, Crib and MSE)
Structures)
Unified AASHTO1 Soil Slope Settlement Bearing Settlement Lateral Earth Stability
Type Stability2 Analysis Capacity Analysis Pressure Analysis
Analysis Analysis
GW A-1-a GRAVEL Generally Required for Generally not GW, SP, SW & All walls should
Well- Generally, not required spread needed except SP soils be designed to
graded not required if except footings, pile for SC soils or generally provide
cut or fill possibly for or drilled for large, heavy suitable for minimum F.S. =
slope is 1.5H SC soils. shaft structures. backfill behind 2 against
to 1V or foundations. or in retaining overturning &
GP A-1-a GRAVEL flatter, and or reinforced F.S. = 1.5
Poorly- underdrains Empirical soil walls. against sliding
graded are used to Spread correlations with along base.
draw down footings SPT values
GM A-1-b GRAVEL the water generally usually used to GM, GC, SM &
Silty table in a cut adequate estimate SC soils External slope
slope. except settlement generally stability
possibly for suitable if have considerations
GC A-2-6A-2- GRAVEL SC soils less than 15% same as
7 Clayey Erosion of fines. previously given
slopes may for cut slopes &
SW A-1-b SAND be a problem embankments.
Well- for SW or SM Lateral earth
graded soils. pressure
analysis
required using
SP A-3 SAND soil angle of
Poorly- internal friction.
graded
SM A-2-4A-2- SAND
5 Silty
SC A-2-6A-2- SAND
7 Clayey
ML A-4 SILT Required Required Required. Required. These soils are

Inorganic unless non- unless non- not
silt plastic. plastic. recommended
Sandy Spread Can use SPT for use directly
footing values if non- behind or in
Erosion of generally plastic. retaining or
slopes may adequate. reinforced soil
be a problem. walls.
CL A-6 CLAY Required Required

Inorganic
Lean
Clay
OL A-4 SILT Required Required

Organic
MH A-5 SILT Required. Required. Required. Required. These soils are All walls should
Inorganic not be designed to
recommended provide
Erosion of Deep Consolidation for use directly minimum F.S. =
slopes may foundation test data behind or in 2 against
be a problem. generally needed to retaining walls. overturning &
required estimate F.S. = 1.5
Soil Classification Embankment and Cut Structure Foundations Retaining Structures

Slopes (Bridges and Retaining (Conventional, Crib and MSE)
Structures)
Unified AASHTO1 Soil Slope Settlement Bearing Settlement Lateral Earth Stability
Type Stability2 Analysis Capacity Analysis Pressure Analysis
Analysis Analysis
unless soil settlement against sliding
CH A-7 CLAY Required. Required. has been amount and along base.
Inorganic preloaded. time.
Fat Clay
External slope
stability
OH A-7 CLAY Required. Required.
considerations
Organic
same as
previously given
PT ---- PEAT Required. Required. Deep Highly for cut slopes &
Muck foundation compressible embankments
required and not suitable
Long term unless peat for foundation
settlement excavated support
can be and
significant replaced.
Rock Fills - not required for Required for Required where Required.
slopes 1.5H to 1V or flatter. spread rock is badly
footings or weathered or
drilled closely Use rock
Cuts - required but shafts. fractured (low backfill angle of
depends on spacing, RQD). internal friction.
orientation and strength of
discontinuities and Empirically
durability of rock related to May require in
RQD3 situ test such as
Pressuremeter.
TRANSCO
Abu Dhabi Transmission & Despatch Company

TRANSCO Water Standard Design Guidelines - 23may 2018 Final PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TRANSCO Water Standard Design Guidelines - 23may 2018 Final PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

N-14054 Consultancy Services for the Development of

Water Standard Design Guideline

Project No. N14054

Document No: MWH/ABU/D900167/R03

01 28/2/17 Draft Final Report PF TY BP, MH

02 13/7/17 Final Report SM PF BB, MH

03 18/4/2018 Final Report (amended) MY PF BB,MH

with respect to its use by any other person.

an application for permission or approval or to fulfil a legal requirement.

Appendix A – Typical Drawings ………………………………………………………………………………………………………I

Appendices contain additional information relating to geotechnical investigations, 55 typical drawings

o Water Transmission Code (WTC) Rev 4, 2012

• Water Transmission Code

• Preliminary Design Report (PDR)

• Steady State Hydraulics

3.1.1 Input Data

• Existing TRANSCO network models (if any)

3.1.1.2 Provided by the Consultant/Contractor

• Existing Distribution Company (DISCO) network models (if any)

3.1.2 Modelling Software

Type Existing or Proposed

Source of Information As built or Design

Levels as built or design

Type Existing or proposed

Source of Information From Data sheet or From Contractor or assumed

Darcy Weisbach equation is given below.

H L = head loss due to friction, m

G = acceleration due to gravity, m/sec2

Roughness values shall be established by field measurement or based on appropriate industry

Pipe Material Roughness Value (mm)

uPVC 0.0045 0.003 – 0.006

GRP 0.045 0.03 – 0.06

Carbon Steel lined with Cement 0.10 0.05 – 0.15

Ductile Iron / Carbon Steel lined

3.1.3.2 Minor Loss

Fitting Loss Coefficient ‘K’ Fitting Loss Coefficient ‘K’

Entry Losses Exit losses

-Sharp Edge 0.5 -Sudden Enlargement 1.0

-Rounded Entrance 0.25 Bellmouth Outlet 0.2

-Bellmouth Entrance 0.05

Bends (R/D=1) Bends (R/D 2 to 7)

-22.5 degree 0.15 -22.5 degree 0.1

-45 degree 0.3 -45 degree 0.2

-90 degree 0.75 -90 degree 0.4

Tee Angle Branch

-flow in line 0.3 -flow in line 0.35

-line to branch 0.9 -line to branch (45 deg.) 0.6

Sudden Enlargements Sudden Contractions

Inlet: outlet dia. Inlet: outlet dia.

3:4 0.2 4:3 0.2

1:2 0.6 2:1 0.35

1:5 1.0 5:1 0.5

Taper Gate Valves

Inlet: outlet dia. -fully open 0.12

3:4 0.04 -25% closed 1.0

1:2 0.12 -50% closed 6.0

Globe Valve 10.0 Reflux Valve 1.0 – 2.0

Ball Valve 0.1 Butterfly Valve (open) 0.5 - 2.0

45 degree 0.12 90 degree 0.2

Ball valve (100% open) 0.25 Diffuser (1:4) 0.1

h m = head loss due to fitting, m

g = acceleration due to gravity, m/sec2